Download as pdf or txt
Download as pdf or txt
You are on page 1of 282



System x3200 M3 Types 7327 and 7328


Problem Determination and Service Guide


System x3200 M3 Types 7327 and 7328


Problem Determination and Service Guide
Note: Before using this information and the product it supports, read the general information in
Appendix B, “Notices,” on page 247, and the IBM Safety Information, and IBM Environmental Notices and
User's Guide on the IBM System x Documentation CD, and the Warranty Information document that
comes with the server.

Fifth Edition (August 2011)


© Copyright IBM Corporation 2011.
US Government Users Restricted Rights – Use, duplication or disclosure restricted by GSA ADP Schedule Contract
with IBM Corp.
Contents
Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . vii
Guidelines for trained service technicians . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . viii
Inspecting for unsafe conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . viii
Guidelines for servicing electrical equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . ix
Safety statements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . x

Chapter 1. Start here. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1


Diagnosing a problem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Undocumented problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4

Chapter 2. Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Related documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Notices and statements in this document . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Features and specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Server controls, LEDs, and power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Front view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Rear view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Server power features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Internal connectors, LEDs, and switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
System-board internal connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
System-board external connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
System-board optional-devices connectors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
System-board LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
System-board jumpers and switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20

Chapter 3. Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Diagnostic tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Event logs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Viewing event logs through the Setup utility . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Viewing event logs without restarting the server . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Clearing the event logs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
POST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
POST error codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
System-event log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Integrated management module (IMM) error messages . . . . . . . . . . 35
Checkout procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
About the checkout procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Performing the checkout procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Troubleshooting tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
DVD drive problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
General problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Hard disk drive problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Intermittent problems. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Keyboard, mouse, or pointing-device problems . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Memory problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Microprocessor problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Monitor or video problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Optional-device problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Power problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Serial port problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
ServerGuide problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Software problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Universal Serial Bus (USB) port problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2011 iii


Error LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Power-supply LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Diagnostic programs and messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Running the diagnostic programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Diagnostic text messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Viewing the test log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Diagnostic messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Recovering the server firmware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Automated boot recovery (ABR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Three boot failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Solving SCSI problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Solving power problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Solving Ethernet controller problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Solving undetermined problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Problem determination tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131

Chapter 4. Parts listing, System x3200 M3 Types 7327 and 7328 . . . . . 133
Replaceable server components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Power cords . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138

Chapter 5. Removing and replacing server components . . . . . . . . 141


Installation guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
System reliability guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
Working inside the server with the power on . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Handling static-sensitive devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Returning a device or component . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Removing and replacing consumable parts and Tier 1 CRUs . . . . . . . 145
Removing the side cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Installing the side cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Removing the lower bezel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Installing the lower bezel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Removing the upper bezel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Installing the upper bezel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Removing an adapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
Installing an adapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Removing and installing internal drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Removing a hot-swap power supply. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Installing a hot-swap power supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Removing a memory module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Installing a memory module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Removing an optional ServeRAID-MR10i SAS/SATA controller . . . . . . 175
Installing an optional ServeRAID-MR10i SAS/SATA controller . . . . . . 175
Removing an optional ServeRAID-MR10is VAULT SAS/SATA controller 177
Installing an optional ServeRAID-MR10is VAULT SAS/SATA Controller 177
Removing a USB embedded hypervisor flash device . . . . . . . . . 180
Installing a USB embedded hypervisor flash device . . . . . . . . . . 180
Removing the virtual media key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
Installing the virtual media key. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
Removing the system battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
Installing the battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
Removing and replacing consumable parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
Removing and replacing Tier 2 CRUs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Removing the rear system fan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Installing the rear system fan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
Removing the hard disk drive fan assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
Installing the hard disk drive fan assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191

iv System x3200 M3 Types 7327 and 7328: Problem Determination and Service Guide
Removing the simple-swap backplate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
Installing the simple-swap backplate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
Removing the SAS/SATA hard disk drive backplane . . . . . . . . . . 195
Installing the SAS/SATA hard disk drive backplane . . . . . . . . . . 196
Removing the front-panel assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
Installing the front-panel assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
Removing the front USB connector assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
Installing the front USB connector assembly. . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
Removing the rear adapter retention bracket . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
Installing the rear adapter retention bracket . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
Removing the front adapter-retention bracket . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
Installing the front adapter-retention bracket . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
Removing the hot-swap power supply cage . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
Installing the hot-swap power supply cage . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
Removing and replacing FRUs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
Removing a ServeRAID-BR10il v2 SAS/SATA controller . . . . . . . . 204
Installing a ServeRAID-BR10il v2 SAS/SATA controller . . . . . . . . . 205
Removing a non-hot-swap power supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
Installing a non-hot-swap power supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
Removing the microprocessor and fan sink . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
Installing a microprocessor and fan sink . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
Removing the system board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
Installing the system board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217

Chapter 6. Configuration information and instructions . . . . . . . . 221


Updating the firmware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
Configuring the server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
Using the ServerGuide Setup and Installation CD. . . . . . . . . . . 223
Using the Setup utility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
Using the Boot Manager program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
Starting the backup server firmware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
Using the integrated management module . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
Using the remote presence capability and blue-screen capture . . . . . . 231
Enabling the Intel Gigabit Ethernet Utility program . . . . . . . . . . 232
Configuring the Ethernet controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
Enabling and configuring Serial over LAN (SOL) . . . . . . . . . . . 233
Using the LSI Configuration Utility program . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
IBM Advanced Settings Utility program. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
Updating IBM Systems Director . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
Updating the Universal Unique Identifier (UUID) . . . . . . . . . . . 237
Updating the DMI/SMBIOS data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240

Appendix A. Getting help and technical assistance . . . . . . . . . . 245


Before you call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
Using the documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
Getting help and information from the World Wide Web . . . . . . . . . 245
Software service and support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
Hardware service and support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
IBM Taiwan product service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246

Appendix B. Notices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247


Trademarks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
Important notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
Particulate contamination. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
Documentation format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
Telecommunication regulatory statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250

Contents v
Electronic emission notices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
250
Federal Communications Commission (FCC) statement . . . . . . . .
250
Industry Canada Class A emission compliance statement . . . . . . . .
250
Avis de conformité à la réglementation d'Industrie Canada . . . . . . .
250
Australia and New Zealand Class A statement . . . . . . . . . . . .
250
European Union EMC Directive conformance statement . . . . . . . .
251
Taiwanese Class A warning statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
251
Chinese Class A warning statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
251
Japanese Voluntary Control Council for Interference (VCCI) statement 252
Korean Class A warning statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252

Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253

vi System x3200 M3 Types 7327 and 7328: Problem Determination and Service Guide
Safety
Before installing this product, read the Safety Information.

Antes de instalar este produto, leia as Informações de Segurança.

Pred instalací tohoto produktu si prectete prírucku bezpecnostních instrukcí.


Læs sikkerhedsforskrifterne, før du installerer dette produkt.

Lees voordat u dit product installeert eerst de veiligheidsvoorschriften.

Ennen kuin asennat tämän tuotteen, lue turvaohjeet kohdasta Safety Information.

Avant d'installer ce produit, lisez les consignes de sécurité.

Vor der Installation dieses Produkts die Sicherheitshinweise lesen.

Prima di installare questo prodotto, leggere le Informazioni sulla Sicurezza.

Les sikkerhetsinformasjonen (Safety Information) før du installerer dette produktet.

Antes de instalar este produto, leia as Informações sobre Segurança.

Antes de instalar este producto, lea la información de seguridad.

Läs säkerhetsinformationen innan du installerar den här produkten.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2011 vii


Guidelines for trained service technicians
This section contains information for trained service technicians.

Inspecting for unsafe conditions


Use the information in this section to help you identify potential unsafe conditions in
an IBM® product that you are working on. Each IBM product, as it was designed
and manufactured, has required safety items to protect users and service
technicians from injury. The information in this section addresses only those items.
Use good judgment to identify potential unsafe conditions that might be caused by
non-IBM alterations or attachment of non-IBM features or options that are not
addressed in this section. If you identify an unsafe condition, you must determine
how serious the hazard is and whether you must correct the problem before you
work on the product.

Consider the following conditions and the safety hazards that they present:
v Electrical hazards, especially primary power. Primary voltage on the frame can
cause serious or fatal electrical shock.
v Explosive hazards, such as a damaged CRT face or a bulging or leaking
capacitor.
v Mechanical hazards, such as loose or missing hardware.

To inspect the product for potential unsafe conditions, complete the following steps:
1. Make sure that the power is off and the power cord is disconnected.
2. Make sure that the exterior cover is not damaged, loose, or broken, and
observe any sharp edges.
3. Check the power cord:
v Make sure that the third-wire ground connector is in good condition. Use a
meter to measure third-wire ground continuity for 0.1 ohm or less between
the external ground pin and the frame ground.
v Make sure that the power cord is the correct type, as specified in “Power
cords” on page 138.
v Make sure that the insulation is not frayed or worn.
4. Remove the cover.
5. Check for any obvious non-IBM alterations. Use good judgment as to the safety
of any non-IBM alterations.
6. Check inside the server for any obvious unsafe conditions, such as metal filings,
contamination, water or other liquid, or signs of fire or smoke damage.
7. Check for worn, frayed, or pinched cables.
8. Make sure that the power-supply cover fasteners (screws or rivets) have not
been removed or tampered with.

viii System x3200 M3 Types 7327 and 7328: Problem Determination and Service Guide
Guidelines for servicing electrical equipment
Observe the following guidelines when you service electrical equipment:
v Check the area for electrical hazards such as moist floors, nongrounded power
extension cords, and missing safety grounds.
v Use only approved tools and test equipment. Some hand tools have handles that
are covered with a soft material that does not provide insulation from live
electrical currents.
v Regularly inspect and maintain your electrical hand tools for safe operational
condition. Do not use worn or broken tools or testers.
v Do not touch the reflective surface of a dental mirror to a live electrical circuit.
The surface is conductive and can cause personal injury or equipment damage if
it touches a live electrical circuit.
v Some rubber floor mats contain small conductive fibers to decrease electrostatic
discharge. Do not use this type of mat to protect yourself from electrical shock.
v Do not work alone under hazardous conditions or near equipment that has
hazardous voltages.
v Locate the emergency power-off (EPO) switch, disconnecting switch, or electrical
outlet so that you can turn off the power quickly in the event of an electrical
accident.
v Disconnect all power before you perform a mechanical inspection, work near
power supplies, or remove or install main units.
v Before you work on the equipment, disconnect the power cord. If you cannot
disconnect the power cord, have the customer power-off the wall box that
supplies power to the equipment and lock the wall box in the off position.
v Never assume that power has been disconnected from a circuit. Check it to
make sure that it has been disconnected.
v If you have to work on equipment that has exposed electrical circuits, observe
the following precautions:
– Make sure that another person who is familiar with the power-off controls is
near you and is available to turn off the power if necessary.
– When you are working with powered-on electrical equipment, use only one
hand. Keep the other hand in your pocket or behind your back to avoid
creating a complete circuit that could cause an electrical shock.
– When you use a tester, set the controls correctly and use the approved probe
leads and accessories for that tester.
– Stand on a suitable rubber mat to insulate you from grounds such as metal
floor strips and equipment frames.
v Use extreme care when you measure high voltages.
v To ensure proper grounding of components such as power supplies, pumps,
blowers, fans, and motor generators, do not service these components outside of
their normal operating locations.
v If an electrical accident occurs, use caution, turn off the power, and send another
person to get medical aid.

Safety ix
Safety statements
Important:

Each caution and danger statement in this document is labeled with a number. This
number is used to cross reference an English-language caution or danger
statement with translated versions of the caution or danger statement in the Safety
Information document.

For example, if a caution statement is labeled with “Statement 1”, translations for
that caution statement are in the Safety Information document under “Statement 1”.

Be sure to read all caution and danger statements in this document before you
perform the procedures. Read any additional safety information that comes with the
server or optional device before you install the device.

x System x3200 M3 Types 7327 and 7328: Problem Determination and Service Guide
Statement 1:

DANGER

Electrical current from power, telephone, and communication cables is


hazardous.

To avoid a shock hazard:


v Do not connect or disconnect any cables or perform installation,
maintenance, or reconfiguration of this product during an electrical
storm.
v Connect all power cords to a properly wired and grounded electrical
outlet.
v Connect to properly wired outlets any equipment that will be attached to
this product.
v When possible, use one hand only to connect or disconnect signal
cables.
v Never turn on any equipment when there is evidence of fire, water, or
structural damage.
v Disconnect the attached power cords, telecommunications systems,
networks, and modems before you open the device covers, unless
instructed otherwise in the installation and configuration procedures.
v Connect and disconnect cables as described in the following table when
installing, moving, or opening covers on this product or attached
devices.

To Connect: To Disconnect:

1. Turn everything OFF. 1. Turn everything OFF.


2. First, attach all cables to devices. 2. First, remove power cords from outlet.
3. Attach signal cables to connectors. 3. Remove signal cables from connectors.
4. Attach power cords to outlet. 4. Remove all cables from devices.
5. Turn device ON.

Safety xi
Statement 2:

CAUTION:
When replacing the lithium battery, use only IBM Part Number 33F8354 or an
equivalent type battery recommended by the manufacturer. If your system has
a module containing a lithium battery, replace it only with the same module
type made by the same manufacturer. The battery contains lithium and can
explode if not properly used, handled, or disposed of.

Do not:
v Throw or immerse into water
v Heat to more than 100°C (212°F)
v Repair or disassemble

Dispose of the battery as required by local ordinances or regulations.

xii System x3200 M3 Types 7327 and 7328: Problem Determination and Service Guide
Statement 3:

CAUTION:
When laser products (such as CD-ROMs, DVD drives, fiber optic devices, or
transmitters) are installed, note the following:
v Do not remove the covers. Removing the covers of the laser product could
result in exposure to hazardous laser radiation. There are no serviceable
parts inside the device.
v Use of controls or adjustments or performance of procedures other than
those specified herein might result in hazardous radiation exposure.

DANGER
Some laser products contain an embedded Class 3A or Class 3B laser
diode. Note the following.

Laser radiation when open. Do not stare into the beam, do not view directly
with optical instruments, and avoid direct exposure to the beam.

Class 1 Laser Product


Laser Klasse 1
Laser Klass 1
Luokan 1 Laserlaite
Appareil A` Laser de Classe 1

Safety xiii
Statement 4:

≥ 18 kg (39.7 lb) ≥ 32 kg (70.5 lb) ≥ 55 kg (121.2 lb)

CAUTION:
Use safe practices when lifting.

Statement 5:

CAUTION:
The power control button on the device and the power switch on the power
supply do not turn off the electrical current supplied to the device. The device
also might have more than one power cord. To remove all electrical current
from the device, ensure that all power cords are disconnected from the power
source.

2
1

xiv System x3200 M3 Types 7327 and 7328: Problem Determination and Service Guide
Statement 8:

CAUTION:
Never remove the cover on a power supply or any part that has the following
label attached.

Hazardous voltage, current, and energy levels are present inside any
component that has this label attached. There are no serviceable parts inside
these components. If you suspect a problem with one of these parts, contact
a service technician.

Statement 12:

CAUTION:
The following label indicates a hot surface nearby.

Statement 13:

DANGER
Overloading a branch circuit is potentially a fire hazard and a shock hazard
under certain conditions. To avoid these hazards, ensure that your system
electrical requirements do not exceed branch circuit protection
requirements. Refer to the information that is provided with your device for
electrical specifications.

Safety xv
Statement 15:

CAUTION:
Make sure that the rack is secured properly to avoid tipping when the server
unit is extended.

xvi System x3200 M3 Types 7327 and 7328: Problem Determination and Service Guide
Statement 26:

CAUTION:
Do not place any object on top of rack-mounted devices.

This server is suitable for use on an IT power-distribution system whose maximum


phase-to-phase voltage is 240 V under any distribution fault condition.

Statement 27:

CAUTION:
Hazardous moving parts are nearby.

Safety xvii
xviii System x3200 M3 Types 7327 and 7328: Problem Determination and Service Guide
Chapter 1. Start here
You can solve many problems without outside assistance by following the
troubleshooting procedures in this Problem Determination and Service Guide and
on the IBM Web site. This document describes the diagnostic tests that you can
perform, troubleshooting procedures, and explanations of error messages and error
codes. The documentation that comes with your operating system and software
also contains troubleshooting information.

Diagnosing a problem
Before you contact IBM or an approved warranty service provider, follow these
procedures in the order in which they are presented to diagnose a problem with
your server:
1. Determine what has changed.
Determine whether any of the following items were added, removed, replaced,
or updated before the problem occurred:
v IBM System x Server Firmware (server firmware)
v Device drivers
v Firmware
v Hardware components
v Software
If possible, return the server to the condition it was in before the problem
occurred.
2. Collect data.
Thorough data collection is necessary for diagnosing hardware and software
problems.
a. Document error codes and system-board LEDs.
v System error codes: See “POST error codes” on page 26 for information
about a specific error code.
v See “System-board LEDs” on page 19 for the location of the
system-board LEDs.
v Software or operating-system error codes: See the documentation for
the software or operating system for information about a specific error
code. See the manufacturer's Web site for documentation.
b. Collect system data.
Run the Dynamic System Analysis (DSA) diagnostics program to collect
information about the hardware, firmware, software, and operating system.
Have this information available when you contact IBM or an approved
warranty service provider. See “Running the diagnostic programs” on page
74 for the instructions to run the DSA program.
If you need to download the latest version of DSA, go to
http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/supportsite.wss/
docdisplay?brandind=5000008&lndocid=SERV-DSA or complete the
following steps.

Note: Changes are made periodically to the IBM Web site. The actual
procedure might vary slightly from what is described in this document.
1) Go to http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/.
2) Under Product support, click System x.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2011 1


3) Under Popular links, click Software and device drivers.
4) Under Related downloads, click Dynamic System Analysis (DSA).
For information about DSA command-line options, go to
http://publib.boulder.ibm.com/infocenter/toolsctr/v1r0/index.jsp?topic=/
com.ibm.xseries.tools.doc/erep_tools_dsa.html or complete the following
steps:
1) Go to http://publib.boulder.ibm.com/infocenter/toolsctr/v1r0/index.jsp.
2) In the navigation pane, click IBM System x and BladeCenter Tools
Center.
3) Click Tools reference > Error reporting and analysis tools > IBM
Dynamic System Analysis.
3. Follow the problem-resolution procedures.
The four problem-resolution procedures are presented in the order in which they
are most likely to solve your problem. Follow these procedures in the order in
which they are presented:
a. Check for and apply code updates.
Most problems that appear to be caused by faulty hardware are actually
caused by the server firmware (formerly BIOS firmware), device firmware, or
device drivers that are not at the latest levels.
1) Determine the existing code levels.
In DSA, click Firmware/VPD to view system firmware levels, or click
Software to view operating-system levels.
2) Download and install updates of code that is not at the latest level.
Important: Some cluster solutions require specific code levels or
coordinated code updates. If the device is part of a cluster solution,
verify that the latest level of code is supported for the cluster solution
before you update the code.
To display a list of available updates for your server, go to
http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/supportsite.wss/
docdisplay?brandind=5000008&lndocid=MIGR-4JTS2T or complete the
following steps.

Note: Changes are made periodically to the IBM Web site. The actual
procedure might vary slightly from what is described in this document.
a) Go to http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/.
b) Under Product support, click System x.
c) Under Popular links, click Software and device drivers.
d) Click System x3200 M3 to display the list of downloadable files for
the server.
You can install code updates that are packaged as an UpdateXpress
System Pack or UpdateXpress CD image. An UpdateXpress System
Pack contains an integration-tested bundle of online firmware and
device-driver updates for your server. Use UpdateXpress System Pack
Installer to acquire and apply UpdateXpress System Packs and
individual firmware and device-driver updates. For additional information
and to download the UpdateXpress System Pack Installer, go to the
System x and BladeCenter Tools Center at http://publib.boulder.ibm.com/
infocenter/toolsctr/v1r0/index.jsp and click UpdateXpress System Pack
Installer.

2 System x3200 M3 Types 7327 and 7328: Problem Determination and Service Guide
Be sure to separately install any listed critical updates that have release
dates that are later than the release date of the UpdateXpress System
Pack or UpdateXpress image.
When you click an update, an information page is displayed, including a
list of the problems that the update fixes. Review this list for your
specific problem; however, even if your problem is not listed, installing
the update might solve the problem.
b. Check for and correct an incorrect configuration.
If the server is incorrectly configured, a system function can fail to work
when you enable it; if you make an incorrect change to the server
configuration, a system function that has been enabled can stop working.
1) Make sure that all installed hardware and software are supported.
See http://www.ibm.com/servers/eserver/serverproven/compat/us/ to
verify that the server supports the installed operating system, optional
devices, and software levels. If any hardware or software component is
not supported, uninstall it to determine whether it is causing the problem.
You must remove nonsupported hardware before you contact IBM or an
approved warranty service provider for support.
2) Make sure that the server, operating system, and software are
installed and configured correctly.
Many configuration problems are caused by loose power or signal
cables or incorrectly seated adapters. You might be able to solve the
problem by turning off the server, reconnecting cables, reseating
adapters, and turning the server back on. See “Checkout procedure” on
page 55 for the instructions to perform the checkout procedures.
If the problem is associated with a specific function (for example, if a
RAID hard disk drive is marked offline in the RAID array), see the
documentation for the associated controller and management or
controlling software to verify that the controller is correctly configured.
Problem determination information is available for many devices such as
RAID and network adapters.
For problems with operating systems or IBM software or devices,
complete the following steps.

Note: Changes are made periodically to the IBM Web site. The actual
procedure might vary slightly from what is described in this document.
a) Go to http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/.
b) Under Product support, click System x.
c) From the Product family list, select System x3200 M3.
d) Under Support & downloads, click Documentation, Install, and
Use to search for related documentation.
c. Check for service bulletins.
IBM service bulletins document known problems and suggested solutions.
To search for service bulletins, complete the following steps.

Note: Changes are made periodically to the IBM Web site. The actual
procedure might vary slightly from what is described in this document.
1) Go to http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/.
2) Under Product support, click System x.
3) From the Product family list, select System x3200 M3.
4) Under Support & downloads, click Troubleshoot.

Chapter 1. Start here 3


d. Check for and replace defective hardware.
If a hardware component is not operating within specifications, it can cause
unpredictable results. Most hardware failures are reported as error codes in
a system or operating-system log. See “Troubleshooting tables” on page 57
and Chapter 5, “Removing and replacing server components,” on page 141
for more information.
Troubleshooting procedures are also provided on the IBM Web site. A single
problem might cause multiple symptoms. Follow the diagnostic procedure for
the most obvious symptom. If that procedure does not diagnose the
problem, use the procedure for another symptom, if possible. To locate
troubleshooting procedures for your server, complete the following steps.

Note: Changes are made periodically to the IBM Web site. The actual
procedure might vary slightly from what is described in this document.
1) Go to http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/.
2) Under Product support, click System x.
3) From the Product family list, select System x3200 M3.
4) Under Support & downloads, click Troubleshoot.
5) Under Diagnostic, select the troubleshooting procedure for the symptom
that you are observing.
For more troubleshooting information, see Chapter 3, “Diagnostics,” on page
23.
If the problem remains, contact IBM or an approved warranty service
provider for assistance with additional problem determination and possible
hardware replacement. To open an online service request, go to
http://www.ibm.com/support/electronic/. Be prepared to provide information
about any error codes and collected data.

Undocumented problems
If you have completed the diagnostic procedure and the problem remains, the
problem might not have been previously identified by IBM. After you have verified
that all code is at the latest level, all hardware and software configurations are valid,
and no light path diagnostics LEDs or log entries indicate a hardware component
failure, contact IBM or an approved warranty service provider for assistance. To
open an online service request, go to http://www.ibm.com/support/electronic/. Be
prepared to provide information about any error codes and collected data and the
problem determination procedures that you have used.

4 System x3200 M3 Types 7327 and 7328: Problem Determination and Service Guide
Chapter 2. Introduction
This Problem Determination and Service Guide contains information to help you
solve problems that might occur in the IBM System x3200 M3 Types 7327 or 7328
server. It describes the diagnostic tools that come with the server, error codes and
suggested actions, and instructions for replacing failing components.

The most recent version of this document is available at http://www.ibm.com/


systems/support/.

Replaceable components are of four types:


v Consumable part: Purchase and replacement of consumable parts
(components, such as batteries and printer cartridges, that have depletable life)
is your responsibility. If IBM acquires or installs a consumable part at your
request, you will be charged for the service.
v Tier 1 customer replaceable unit (CRU): Replacement of Tier 1 CRUs is your
responsibility. If IBM installs a Tier 1 CRU at your request, you will be charged for
the installation.
v Tier 2 customer replaceable unit: You may install a Tier 2 CRU yourself or
request IBM to install it, at no additional charge, under the type of warranty
service that is designated for the server.
v Field replaceable unit (FRU): FRUs must be installed only by trained service
technicians.

For a list of replaceable components for the server, see “Replaceable server
components” on page 133.

For information about the terms of the warranty and getting service and assistance,
see the Warranty Information document that comes with the server.

Related documentation
In addition to this document, the following documentation also comes with the
server:
v Installation and User’s Guide
This document is in Portable Document Format (PDF) on the IBM System x
Documentation CD. It provides general information about setting up and cabling
the server, including information about features, and how to configure the server.
It also contains detailed instructions for installing, removing, and connecting
some optional devices that the server supports.
v Rack Installation Instructions
This printed document contains instructions for installing the server in a rack.
v Safety Information
This document is in PDF on the IBM xSeries® Documentation CD. It contains
translated caution and danger statements. Each caution and danger statement
that appears in the documentation has a number that you can use to locate the
corresponding statement in your language in the Safety Information document.
v Warranty Information
This printed document contains information about the terms of the warranty.
v Environmental Notices and User Guide

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2011 5


This document is in PDF format on the IBM System x Documentation CD. It
contains translated environmental notices.

Depending on the server model, additional documentation might be included on the


IBM System x Documentation CD.

The xSeries and BladeCenter Tools Center is an online information center that
contains information about tools for updating, managing, and deploying firmware,
device drivers, and operating systems. The xSeries and BladeCenter Tools Center
is at http://publib.boulder.ibm.com/infocenter/toolsctr/v1r0/index.jsp.

The server might have features that are not described in the documentation that
comes with the server. The documentation might be updated occasionally to include
information about those features, or technical updates might be available to provide
additional information that is not included in the server documentation. These
updates are available from the IBM Web site. To check for updated documentation
and technical updates, complete the following steps.

Note: Changes are made periodically to the IBM Web site. The actual procedure
might vary slightly from what is described in this document.
1. Go to http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/.
2. Under Product support, click System x.
3. Under Popular links, click Publications lookup.
4. From the Product family menu, select System x3200 M3 and click Continue.

Notices and statements in this document


The caution and danger statements that appear in this document are also in the
multilingual Safety Information document, which is on the IBM System x
Documentation CD. Each statement is numbered for reference to the corresponding
statement in the Safety Information document.

The following notices and statements are used in this document:


v Note: These notices provide important tips, guidance, or advice.
v Important: These notices provide information or advice that might help you avoid
inconvenient or problem situations.
v Attention: These notices indicate potential damage to programs, devices, or
data. An attention notice is placed just before the instruction or situation in which
damage might occur.
v Caution: These statements indicate situations that can be potentially hazardous
to you. A caution statement is placed just before the description of a potentially
hazardous procedure step or situation.
v Danger: These statements indicate situations that can be potentially lethal or
extremely hazardous to you. A danger statement is placed just before the
description of a potentially lethal or extremely hazardous procedure step or
situation.

Features and specifications


The following information is a summary of the features and specifications for
Machine Type 7327 or 7328. Depending on the server model, some features might
not be available, or some specifications might not apply. See the PDSG on the
System x Documentation CD for additional information about the server.

6 System x3200 M3 Types 7327 and 7328: Problem Determination and Service Guide
Table 1. Features and specifications
Microprocessor: Integrated functions: RAID controllers:
v Supports one Intel quad-core (Xeon v Integrated management module (IMM), v A ServeRAID-BR10il v2 SAS/SATA
3400 series) or dual-core (Celeron which provides service processor adapter that provides RAID levels 0, 1,
G1101, Pentium G6950, or Core i3 control and monitoring functions, video and 1E (comes standard on some
series) processor the IbexPeak 3420 controller, and (when the optional virtual hot-swap SAS and hot-swap SATA
chip set and Multi-chip Package media key is installed) remote models).
processor architecture keyboard, video, mouse, and remote
v An optional ServeRAID-MR10i
v Designed for LGA 1156 socket hard disk drive capabilities
SAS/SATA adapter that provides RAID
v Scalable up to four cores v Intel 82574L Gb Ethernet controller
levels 0, 1, 5, 6, and 10 can also be
v 32 KB instruction cache, 32 KB data v Integrated Trusted Platform Module
ordered.
cache, and up to 8 MB L3 cache that is (TPM) support
shared among the cores v Integrated SATA controller (simple-swap v An optional ServeRAID-MR10is
v Support for Intel Extended Memory 64 and hot-swap models) SAS/SATA adapter that provides RAID
Technology (EM64T) v Seven Universal Serial Bus (USB) 2.0 levels 0, 1, 5, 6, and 10 can also be
ports (two front and four rear of the ordered.
Note: chassis), one internal for the optional
v Use the Setup utility to determine the USB Hypervisor key. Environment:
type and speed of the microprocessors. v One serial port v Air temperature:
– Server on: 10°C to 35°C (50°F to
v For a list of supported microprocessors, v Two Ethernet ports
see http://www.ibm.com/servers/eserver/ v One system-management RJ-45 on the 95°F)
rear to connect to a systems Altitude: 0 to 914.4 m (3000 ft)
serverproven/compat/us/.
management network. This system – Server on: 10°C to 32°C (50°F to
Memory: management connector is shared to the 89.6°F)
v Minimum: 1 GB IMM functions. This connector is active Altitude: 914.4 m (3000 ft) to 2133.6
v Maximum: 32 GB with or without the optional IBM Virtual m (7000 ft)
– 16 GB using unbuffered DIMMs Media Key installed. – Server off: 10°C to 43°C (50°F to
(UDIMMs) v Six SATA II ports (four through the 109.4°F)
– 32 GB using registered DIMMs iPASS connector for simple-swap drives Maximum altitude: 2133.6 m (7000.0
(RDIMMs) and two for the optical DVD and tape ft)
v Types: PC3-8500 or PC3-10600 drives) – Shipping: -40°C to 60°C (-40°F to
(single-rank or dual-rank), ECC 140°F)
unbuffered or registered v Humidity (operating and storage): 8% to
double-data-rate 3 (DDR3) 1066 or 80%
1333 MHz registered or unbuffered v Particulate contamination:
SDRAM DIMM Attention: Airborne particulates and
v Connectors: six dual inline memory reactive gases acting alone or in
module (DIMM) connectors, two-way combination with other environmental
interleaved factors such as humidity or temperature
v Supports: might pose a risk to the server. For
– 1 GB, 2 GB, and 4 GB unbuffered information about the limits for
DIMMs particulates and gases, see “Particulate
– 1 GB, 2 GB, 4 GB, and 8 GB contamination” on page 249.
registered DIMMs

Drives (depending on the model): Fans: Heat output:


v Diskette (optional): External or internal Three speed-controlled fixed fans Approximate heat output:
USB FDD drive and memory key v Minimum configuration: 188 Btu per
v Hard disk drives: Hot-swap SAS, Power supply: hour (55 watts)
hot-swap SATA, or simple-swap SATA One of the following power supplies: v Maximum configuration: 1784 Btu per
(support AHCI mode) v One or two redundant 430-watt (90-240 hour (523 watts)
v One of the following SATA attached V ac) with Active Energy Manager
optical drives: v One non-redundant 401-watt (90-240 V Electrical input:
– DVD-ROM ac) without Active Energy Manager v Sine-wave input (50 or 60 Hz) required
– Multiburner (optional) v Input voltage and frequency ranges
Size: automatically selected
Drive bays (depending on the model): v Height: 438 mm (17.25 in.) v Input voltage low range:
v Two 5.25 in. half-high bays (one optical v Depth: 540 mm (21.25 in.) – Minimum: 100 V ac
drive installed). v Width: 216 mm (8.5 in.) – Maximum: 127 V ac
v One 3.5 in. slim-high removable-media v Weight: 19.6 kg (43 lb) to 21.4 kg (47 v Input voltage high range:
drive bay (optional diskette drive) lb) depending upon configuration – Minimum: 200 V ac
v Four 3.5 in. slim-high hard disk drive – Maximum: 240 V ac
bays (some models) v Input kilovolt-amperes (kVA)
v Eight 2.5 inch slim-high hard disk drive approximately:
bays (some models) – Minimum: 0.20 kVA (all models)
– Maximum: 0.55 kVA

Chapter 2. Introduction 7
Table 1. Features and specifications (continued)
Up to six expansion slots (depending Acoustical noise emissions:
on the model): v Sound power, idling: 5.0 bel Notes:

v Six expansion slots on the system v Sound power, operating: 5.3 bel 1. Power consumption and heat output
board vary depending on the number and
type of optional features installed and
– Two PCI Express Gen2 x8 slots (x8 the power-management optional
links) features in use.
– One PCI Express Gen2 x4 slot (x4 2. These levels were measured in
link) controlled acoustical environments
– Two PCI 32-bit/33 MHz slots according to the procedures specified
– One PCI Express Gen2 x4 slot (x4 by the American National Standards
electrical and mechanical) for the Institute (ANSI) S12.10 and ISO 7779
ServeRAID-BR10il v2 SAS/SATA and are reported in accordance with
adapter ISO 9296. Actual sound-pressure
levels in a given location might exceed
Video controller (integrated into IMM): the average values stated because of
room reflections and other nearby
v Matrox G200 video integrated on the
noise sources. The declared
system board
sound-power levels indicate an upper
– Compatible with SVGA and VGA limit, below which a large number of
Note: The maximum video resolution is computers will operate.
1280 x 1024 at 85 MHz

8 System x3200 M3 Types 7327 and 7328: Problem Determination and Service Guide
Server controls, LEDs, and power
This section describes the controls, light-emitting diodes (LEDs), and connectors on
the front and rear of the server, and how to turn the server on and off. For the
location of the LEDs on the system board, see “System-board LEDs” on page 19.

Note: The illustrations in this document might differ slightly from your model.

Front view
The following illustration shows the 3.5-inch SAS/SATA hot-swap hard disk drive
model:

The following illustration shows the 3.5-inch SATA simple-swap hard disk drive
model:

Chapter 2. Introduction 9
The following illustration shows the 2.5-inch SAS/SATA hot-swap hard disk drive
model:

10 System x3200 M3 Types 7327 and 7328: Problem Determination and Service Guide
Hard disk drive activity LED
Power-control button System error LED
DVD-eject
Power-on LED button

DVD drive USB 2


activity LED USB 1
(green)

Hard disk
drive activity
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
LED (green)

Hard disk
drive status
LED (amber)

Power control button and power-on LED


Press this button to turn the server on and off manually or to wake the
server from a reduced-power state. The states of the power-on LED are as
follows:
Off: AC power is not present, or the power supply or the LED itself has
failed.
Flashing rapidly (4 times per second): The server is turned off and is
not ready to be turned on. The power-control button is disabled. This will
last approximately 1 to 3 minutes.
Flashing slowly (once per second): The server is turned off and is
ready to be turned on. You can press the power-control button to turn on
the server.
Lit: The server is turned on.
Fading on and off: The server is in a reduced-power state. To wake the
server, press the power-control button or use the IMM Web interface.
See “Logging on to the Web interface” on page 232 for information on
logging on to the IMM Web interface.
Hard disk drive activity LED
When this LED is flashing, it indicates that the associated hard disk drive is
in use.
System-error LED
When this amber LED is lit, it indicates that a system error has occurred.
An LED on the system board might also be lit to help isolate the error.
SeeChapter 3, “Diagnostics,” on page 23 for additional information.
USB connectors
Connect USB devices to these connectors.

Chapter 2. Introduction 11
DVD-eject button
Press this button to release a CD or DVD from the DVD drive.
DVD drive activity LED
When this LED is lit, it indicates that the DVD drive is in use.
Hot-swap hard disk drive activity LED (some models)
On some server models, each hot-swap drive has a hard disk drive activity
LED. When this green LED is flashing, it indicates that the drive is in use.
When the drive is removed, this LED also is visible on the SAS/SATA
backplane, next to the drive connector. The backplane is the printed circuit
board behind drive bays 4 through 7 (or bays 4 through 11 on some
2.5-inch hard disk drive SAS models).
Hot-swap hard disk drive status LED (some models)
On some server models, each hot-swap hard disk drive has an amber
status LED. If this amber status LED for a drive is lit, it indicates that the
associated hard disk drive has failed.
If an optional ServeRAID adapter is installed in the server and the LED
flashes slowly (one flash per second), the drive is being rebuilt. If the LED
flashes rapidly (three flashes per second), the adapter is identifying the
drive.
When the drive is removed, this LED also is visible on the SAS/SATA
backplane, below the hot-swap hard disk drive activity LED.

12 System x3200 M3 Types 7327 and 7328: Problem Determination and Service Guide
Rear view
The following illustration shows the LEDs and connectors on the rear of the
hot-swap server model.

Power cord
AC Power LED
DC power LED

Fault (error)LED
Serial (Com1)
Video

Ethernet transmit/
receive activity LED
(amber)
Ethernet
USB 1 and 2
connector
USB 3 and 4
Ethernet link
status LED
(green)

The following illustration shows the LEDs and connectors on the rear of the
simple-swap server model.

Power-cord connector
Connect the power cord to this connector.

Chapter 2. Introduction 13
AC power LED
This green LED provides status information about the power supply. During
typical operation, both the ac and dc power LEDs are lit. For any other
combination of LEDs, see the “Power-supply LEDs” on page 71.
DC power LED
This green LED provides status information about the power supply. During
typical operation, both the ac and dc power LEDs are lit. For any other
combination of LEDs, see the “Power-supply LEDs” on page 71.
Power-error (!) LED
When this amber LED is lit, it indicates that the power supply has failed.
Serial connector
Connect a 9-pin serial device to this connector.
Video connector
Connect a monitor to this connector.
USB connectors
Connect USB devices to these connectors.
Ethernet connector
Use either of these connectors to connect the server to a network. When
you use the Ethernet 1 connector, the network can be shared with the IMM
through a single network cable.
Ethernet transmit/receive activity LED
This LED is on the Ethernet connector. When this LED is lit, it indicates that
there is activity between the server and the network.
Ethernet link status LED
This LED is on the Ethernet connector. When this LED is lit, it indicates that
there is an active connection on the Ethernet port.

Server power features


When the server is connected to an ac power source but is not turned on, the
operating system does not run, and all core logic except for the service processor
(the Integrated Management Module) is shut down; however, the server can
respond to requests to the service processor, such as a remote request to turn on
the server. The power-on LED flashes to indicate that the server is connected to ac
power but is not turned on.

Turning on the server


Approximately 5 seconds after the server is connected to ac power, one or more
fans might start running to provide cooling while the server is connected to power
and the power-on button LED will blink quickly. Approximately 1 to 3 minutes after
the server is connected to ac power, the power-control button becomes active (the
power-on LED will blink slowly). You can turn on the server by pressing the
power-control button.

The server can also be turned on in any of the following ways:


v If a power failure occurs while the server is turned on, the server will restart
automatically when power is restored.
v If your operating system supports the Wake on LAN feature, the Wake on LAN
feature can turn on the server.

Note: When 4 GB or more of memory (physical or logical) is installed, some


memory is reserved for various system resources and is unavailable to the

14 System x3200 M3 Types 7327 and 7328: Problem Determination and Service Guide
operating system. The amount of memory that is reserved for system resources
depends on the operating system, the configuration of the server, and the
configured peripheral component interconnect (PCI) options.

Turning off the server


When you turn off the server and leave it connected to ac power, the server can
respond to requests to the service processor, such as a remote request to turn on
the server. While the server remains connected to ac power, one or more fans
might continue to run. To remove all power from the server, you must disconnect it
from the power source.

Some operating systems require an orderly shutdown before you turn off the server.
See your operating-system documentation for information about shutting down the
operating system.

Statement 5:

CAUTION:
The power control button on the device and the power switch on the power
supply do not turn off the electrical current supplied to the device. The device
also might have more than one power cord. To remove all electrical current
from the device, ensure that all power cords are disconnected from the power
source.

2
1
The server can be turned off in any of the following ways:
v You can turn off the server from the operating system, if your operating system
supports this feature. After an orderly shutdown of the operating system, the
server will be turned off automatically.
v You can press the power-control button to start an orderly shutdown of the
operating system and turn off the server, if your operating system supports this
feature.
v If the operating system stops functioning, you can press and hold the
power-control button for more than 4 seconds to turn off the server.
v The server can be turned off by Wake on LAN feature.
v The integrated management module (IMM) can turn off the server as an
automatic response to a critical system failure.

Chapter 2. Introduction 15
Internal connectors, LEDs, and switches
The illustrations in this section show the connectors, light-emitting diodes (LEDs),
and switches on the system board. The illustrations might differ slightly from your
hardware.

System-board internal connectors


The following illustration shows the internal connectors on the system board.

Virtual
media key Main HDD fan connector
connector power

DIMM 1
DIMM 2
DIMM 3
DIMM 4
DIMM 5
DIMM 6
System fan
connector
Battery
Microprocessor

Microprocessor
fan connector

Optional
internal USB
tape drive
connector
Front USB
connector
ServeRAID-BR10il
SAS/SATA controller
connector
Simple-swap
hard disk drive
backplane signal
Hypervisor Wake Hot-Swap HDD
key connector on Operator Backplane config 1
LAN Information
Optical Hot-Swap HDD
Panel
Drive Signal Backplane config 2

16 System x3200 M3 Types 7327 and 7328: Problem Determination and Service Guide
System-board external connectors
The following illustration shows the external input/output (I/O) connectors on the
system board.

Serial (com1)
Video
Ethernet connector 1
USB connectors 1 & 2
Ethernet connector 2
USB connectors 3 & 4
SW1 (NMI button)

Note: When you disconnect the power source from the server, you lose the ability
to view the LEDs because the LEDs are not lit when the power source is removed.
Before you disconnect the power source, make a note of which LEDs are lit,
including the LEDs that are lit on the operation information panel and LEDs inside
the server on the system board.

Chapter 2. Introduction 17
System-board optional-devices connectors
The following illustration shows the system-board connectors for user-installable
optional devices.

Virtual
media key
connector

DIMM 1
DIMM 2
DIMM 3
DIMM 4
DIMM 5
DIMM 6

Battery
Microprocessor

Slot 1: PCIe2 x8(8,4,1) 25w

Slot 2: PCIe2 x8(8,4,1) 25w

Slot 3: PCIe2 x1 10w

Slot 4: PCI 32bit, 33MHz


ServeRAID-BR10il
Slot 5: PCI 32bit, 33MHz SAS/SATA controller
connector

Hypervisor
key connector

18 System x3200 M3 Types 7327 and 7328: Problem Determination and Service Guide
System-board LEDs
The following illustration shows the LEDs on the system board.

System board DIMM 1 - 6 HDD fan


error LED error LEDs error LED

Standby
power LED
Battery error LED
System fan error LED

CPU error
LED
PCI Express
slot 1 error LED H8 Heartbeat
PCI Express LED
slot 2 error LED

IMM heart
Microprocessor
beat LED
fan error LED
Slot 3 error LED
Slot 4 error LED
Slot 5 error LED

SAS/SATA Controller
error LED

Chapter 2. Introduction 19
System-board jumpers and switches
The following illustration shows the jumpers and switches on the system board.

Trusted Platform Module (TPM) Boot block Clear CMOS


jumper (J31) jumper (JP6) jumper (JP1)

The following table describes the function of each jumper block.


Table 2. System-board jumper blocks
Jumper number Jumper name Jumper setting
JP1 Clear CMOS jumper v Pins 1 and 2: Keep CMOS
data (default).
v Pins 2 and 3: Clear CMOS
data (including power-on
password).
JP6 Boot block jumper v Pins 1 and 2: Boot from
primary BIOS page
(default).
v Pins 2 and 3: Boot from
backup BIOS page.

20 System x3200 M3 Types 7327 and 7328: Problem Determination and Service Guide
Table 2. System-board jumper blocks (continued)
Jumper number Jumper name Jumper setting
J31 Trusted Platform Module Pins 1 and 2: Enable TPM
(TPM) jumper physical presence.To enable
TPM physical presence,
complete the following steps:
1. Turn off the server and
remove all power cords
and external cables.
2. Remove the pin jumper
from JP6 and install it on
J31 pins 1 and 2. Take
note which pins the
jumper is originally
installed on JP6.
3. Turn on the server and
access the Setup utility
menu to verify that the
TPM function has been
activated (see “Using the
Setup utility” on page
225).
4. Turn off the server and
replace the jumper on
JP6.
5. Turn on the server.
Notes:
v If no jumper is present in JP1 or JP6, the server responds as if the pins are set to 1 and
2.
v Changing the position of the boot block jumper from pins 1 and 2 to pins 2 and 3 before
the server is turned on alters which flash ROM page is loaded. Do not change the jumper
pin position after the server is turned on. This can cause an unpredictable problem.

Chapter 2. Introduction 21
22 System x3200 M3 Types 7327 and 7328: Problem Determination and Service Guide
Chapter 3. Diagnostics
This chapter describes the diagnostic tools that are available to help you solve
problems that might occur in the server.

If you cannot locate and correct the problem using the information in this chapter,
see Appendix A, “Getting help and technical assistance,” on page 245 for more
information.

Diagnostic tools
The following tools are available to help you diagnose and solve hardware-related
problems:
v POST error messages and error logs
The power-on self-test (POST) generates messages to indicate successful test
completion or the detection of a problem. See “POST” on page 26, “Event logs”
on page 24, and “POST error codes” on page 26 for more information.
v Troubleshooting tables
These tables list problem symptoms and actions to correct the problems. See
“Troubleshooting tables” on page 57 for more information.
v Dynamic System Analysis (DSA) Preboot diagnostic programs
The DSA Preboot diagnostic programs provide problem isolation, configuration
analysis, and error log collection. The diagnostic programs are the primary
method of testing the major components of the server and are stored in
integrated USB memory. The diagnostic programs collect the following
information about the server:
– System configuration
– Network interfaces and settings
– Installed hardware
– Service processor status and configuration
– Vital product data, firmware, and UEFI configuration
– Hard disk drive health
– RAID controller configuration
– Controller event logs, including the following information:
- System error logs
- Temperature, voltage, and fan speed information
- Self-monitoring Analysis, and Reporting Technology (SMART) data
- Machine check registers
- USB information
- Monitor configuration information
- PCI slot information
The diagnostic programs create a merged log that includes events from all
collected logs. The information is collected into a file that you can send to IBM
service and support. Additionally, you can view the server information locally
through a generated text report file. You can also copy the log to removable
media and view the log from a Web browser. See “Running the diagnostic
programs” on page 74 and “Diagnostic messages” on page 75 for more
information.
v Server LEDs
Use the LEDs on the server to diagnose system errors quickly. See “Error LEDs”
on page 69 for more information.
v IBM Electronic Service Agent

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2011 23


IBM Electronic Service Agent is a software tool that monitors the server for
hardware error events and automatically submits electronic service requests to
IBM service and support. In addition, it can collect and transmit system
configuration information on a scheduled basis so that the information is available
to you and your support representative. It uses minimal system resources, and is
available free of charge. For more information and to download IBM Electronic
Service Agent, go to http://www.ibm.com/support/electronic/

Event logs
Error codes and messages are displayed in the following types of event logs:
v POST event log: This log contains the three most recent error codes and
messages that were generated during POST. You can view the POST event log
through the Setup utility.
v System-event log: This log contains messages that were generated during
POST and all system status messages from the service processor. You can view
the contents of the system-event log from the Setup utility for more information.
The system-event log is limited in size. When it is full, new entries will not
overwrite existing entries; therefore, you must periodically clear the system-event
log through the Setup utility. When you are troubleshooting, you might have to
clear the system-event log to make the most recent events available for analysis.
Each system-event log entry is displayed on its own page. Message are listed on
the left side of the screen, and details about the selected message is displayed
on the right side of the screen. To move from one entry to the next, use the Up
Arrow (↑) and Down Arrow (↓) keys.
The system-event log indicates an assertion event when an event has occurred.
It indicates a de-assertion event when the event is no longer occurring.
v Integrated management module (IMM) event log: This log contains a filtered
subset of all IMM, POST, and system management interrupt (SMI) events. You
can view the IMM event log through the IMM Web interface and through the
Dynamic System Analysis (DSA) program (as the ASM event log).
v DSA log: This log is generated by the Dynamic System Analysis (DSA) program,
and it is a chronologically ordered merge of the system-event log (as the IPMI
event log), the IMM chassis-event log (as the ASM event log), and the
operating-system event logs. You can view the DSA log through the DSA
program.

Viewing event logs through the Setup utility


To view the POST event log or system-event log, complete the following steps:
1. Turn on the server.
2. When the prompt <F1> Setup is displayed, press F1. If you have set both a
power-on password and an administrator password, you must type the
administrator password to view the event logs.
3. Select System Event Logs and use one of the following procedures:
v To view the POST event log, select POST Event Viewer.
v To view the IMM system-event log, select System Event Log.

Viewing event logs without restarting the server


When the server is not hung and the IMM is connected to a network, methods are
available for you to view one or more event logs without having to restart the
server.

24 System x3200 M3 Types 7327 and 7328: Problem Determination and Service Guide
If you have installed Portable or Installable Dynamic System Analysis (DSA), you
can use it to view the system-event log (as the IPMI event log), the IMM event log
(as the ASM event log), the operating-system event logs, or the merged DSA log.
You can also use DSA Preboot to view these logs, although you must restart the
server to use DSA Preboot. To install Portable DSA, Installable DSA, or DSA
Preboot or to download a DSA Preboot CD image, go to http://www.ibm.com/
systems/support/supportsite.wss/docdisplay?lndocid=SERV-DSA
&brandind=5000008 or complete the following steps.

Note: Changes are made periodically to the IBM Web site. The actual procedure
might vary slightly from what is described in this document.
1. Go to http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/.
2. Under Product support, click System x.
3. Under Popular links, click Software and device drivers.
4. Under Related downloads, click Dynamic System Analysis (DSA) to display
the matrix of downloadable DSA files.

If IPMItool is installed in the server, you can use it to view the system-event log.
Most recent versions of the Linux operating system come with a current version of
IPMItool. For information about IPMItool, see http://publib.boulder.ibm.com/
infocenter/toolsctr/v1r0/index.jsp?topic=/com.ibm.xseries.tools.doc/co...or complete
the following steps.

Note: Changes are made periodically to the IBM Web site. The actual procedure
might vary slightly from what is described in this document.
1. Go to http://publib.boulder.ibm.com/infocenter/toolsctr/v1r0/index.jsp.
2. In the navigation pane, click IBM System x and BladeCenter Tools Center.
3. Expand Tools reference, expand Configuration tools, expand IPMI tools, and
click IPMItool.

For an overview of IPMI, go to http://publib.boulder.ibm.com/infocenter/systems/


index.jsp?topic=/liaai/ipmi/liaaiipmi.htm or complete the following steps:
1. Go to http://publib.boulder.ibm.com/infocenter/systems/index.jsp.
2. In the navigation pane, click IBM Systems Information Center.
3. Expand Operating systems, expand Linux information, expand Blueprints
for Linux on IBM systems, and click Using Intelligent Platform Management
Interface (IPMI) on IBM Linux platforms.

You can view the IMM event log through the Event Log link in the IMM Web
interface.

The following table describes the methods that you can use to view the event logs,
depending on the condition of the server. The first two conditions generally do not
require that you restart the server.
Table 3. Methods for viewing event logs
Condition Action
The server is not hung and is connected to a Use any of the following methods:
network. v Run Portable or Installable DSA to view
the event logs or create an output file that
you can send to IBM service and support.
v Alternatively, you can use IPMItool to view
the system-event log.

Chapter 3. Diagnostics 25
Table 3. Methods for viewing event logs (continued)
Condition Action
The server is not hung and is not connected Use IPMItool locally to view the system-event
to a network. log.
The server is hung. v If DSA Preboot is installed, restart the
server and press F2 to start DSA Preboot
and view the event logs.
v If DSA Preboot is not installed, insert the
DSA Preboot CD and restart the server to
start DSA Preboot and view the event
logs.
v Alternatively, you can restart the server
and press F1 to start the Setup utility and
view the POST event log or system-event
log. For more information, see “Viewing
event logs without restarting the server” on
page 24.

Clearing the event logs


To clear the event logs, complete the following steps.

Note: The POST event log is automatically cleared each time the server is
restarted.
1. Turn on the server.
2. When the prompt <F1> Setup is displayed, press F1. If you have set both a
power-on password and an administrator password, you must type the
administrator password to view the error logs.
3. Use one of the following procedures:
v To clear the IMM system-event log, select System Event Logs --> System
Event Log. Select Clear System Event Log; then, press Enter twice.

POST
When you turn on the server, it performs a series of tests to check the operation of
the server components and some optional devices in the server. This series of tests
is called the power-on self-test, or POST.

Note: This server does not use beep codes for server status.

If the system-board tray is configured to require entry of a password to complete


the system startup, you need to type both the administrator password and power-on
password to complete the system startup, if either password is set.

If POST detects a problem, an error message is displayed. See “POST error codes”
for more information.

POST error codes


The following table describes the POST error codes and suggested actions to
correct the detected problems. These errors can appear as severe, warning, or
informational.

26 System x3200 M3 Types 7327 and 7328: Problem Determination and Service Guide
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem
is solved.
v See Chapter 4, “Parts listing, System x3200 M3 Types 7327 and 7328,” on page 133 to determine which
components are customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units
(FRU).
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a
trained service technician.
v Go to the IBM support Web site at http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/ to check for technical
information, hints, tips, and new device drivers or to submit a request for information.
Error code Description Action
0010002 Microprocessor not supported. 1. (Trained service technician only) Reseat the
microprocessor and restart the server.
2. (Trained service technician only) Remove the
microprocessor and install a new microprocessor.
Restart the server. If the error is corrected, the old
microprocessor is bad and must be replaced.
3. Replace the following components one at a time,
in the order shown, restarting the server each
time.
a. (Trained service technician only)
Microprocessor
b. (Trained service technician only) System
board
0011000 Invalid microprocessor type. 1. Update the server firmware to the latest level (see
“Updating the firmware” on page 221).
2. (Trained service technician only) Remove and
replace the affected microprocessor (error LED is
lit) with a supported type (see “Installing a
microprocessor and fan sink” on page 211).
0011004 Microprocessor failed BIST. 1. Update the server firmware to the latest level (see
“Updating the firmware” on page 221).
2. (Trained service technician only) Reseat
microprocessor.
3. Replace the following components one at a time,
in the order shown, restarting the server each
time:
a. (Trained service technician only)
Microprocessor
b. (Trained service technician only) System
board
001100A Microcode updated failed. 1. Update the server firmware to the latest level (see
“Updating the firmware” on page 221).
2. (Trained service technician only) Replace the
microprocessor.

Chapter 3. Diagnostics 27
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem
is solved.
v See Chapter 4, “Parts listing, System x3200 M3 Types 7327 and 7328,” on page 133 to determine which
components are customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units
(FRU).
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a
trained service technician.
v Go to the IBM support Web site at http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/ to check for technical
information, hints, tips, and new device drivers or to submit a request for information.
Error code Description Action
0050001 DIMM disabled. 1. If the server fails the POST memory test, reseat
the DIMMs.
2. Remove and replace any DIMM for which the
associated error LED is lit (see “Removing a
memory module” on page 168 and “Installing a
memory module” on page 169).
3. Run the Setup utility to enable all the DIMMs.
4. Run the DSA Preboot memory test (see “Running
the diagnostic programs” on page 74).
0051003 Uncorrectable DIMM error 1. If the server failed the POST memory test, reseat
the DIMMs.
2. Remove and replace any DIMM for which the
associated error LED is lit (see “Removing a
memory module” on page 168 and “Installing a
memory module” on page 169).
3. Run the Setup utility to enable all the DIMMs.
4. Run the DSA Preboot memory test (see “Running
the diagnostic programs” on page 74).
0051006 DIMM mismatch detected Make sure that the DIMMs match and are installed in
the correct sequence (see “Installing a memory
module” on page 169).
0051009 No memory detected. 1. Make sure that the server contains DIMMs.
2. Reseat the DIMMs.
3. Install DIMMs in the correct sequence (see
“Installing a memory module” on page 169).
005100A No usable memory detected. 1. Make sure that the server contains DIMMs.
2. Reseat the DIMMs.
3. Install DIMMs in the correct sequence (see
“Installing a memory module” on page 169).
4. Clear CMOS memory to re-enable all the memory
connectors (see “System-board jumpers and
switches” on page 20).
0058001 PFA threshold exceeded 1. Update the server firmware to the latest level (see
“Updating the firmware” on page 221).
2. Reseat the DIMMs and run the memory test (see
“Running the diagnostic programs” on page 74).
3. Replace the failing DIMM, which is indicated by a
lit LED on the system board.

28 System x3200 M3 Types 7327 and 7328: Problem Determination and Service Guide
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem
is solved.
v See Chapter 4, “Parts listing, System x3200 M3 Types 7327 and 7328,” on page 133 to determine which
components are customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units
(FRU).
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a
trained service technician.
v Go to the IBM support Web site at http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/ to check for technical
information, hints, tips, and new device drivers or to submit a request for information.
Error code Description Action
0058007 DIMM population is unsupported. 1. Make sure the installed DIMMs follow the
population rules and sequence described in
“Installing a memory module” on page 169.
2. Reseat the DIMMs, and then restart the server.
3. Remove the lowest-numbered DIMM pair of those
that are identified and replace it with an identical
pair of known good DIMMs, then restart the
server.
4. Return the removed DIMMs, one pair at a time, to
their original connectors, restarting the server after
each pair, until a pair fails. Replace the DIMMs in
the failed pair with identical known good DIMMs,
restarting the server after each DIMM is installed.
Replace the failed DIMM. Repeat this step until
you have tested all removed DIMMs.
5. (Trained service technician only) Replace the
system board.
0058008 DIMM failed memory test. 1. Reseat the DIMMs, and then restart the server.
2. Replace the following components one at a time,
in the order shown, then restart the server after
each:
a. DIMM
b. (Trained service technician only) System
board
00580A4 Memory population changed. Information only. Memory has been added, moved, or
changed.
0068002 CMOS battery cleared. 1. Reseat the battery.
2. Clear the CMOS memory (see “System-board
jumpers and switches” on page 20).
3. Replace the following components one at a time,
in the following order, restarting the server after
each one:
a. Battery
b. (Trained service technician only) System
board

Chapter 3. Diagnostics 29
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem
is solved.
v See Chapter 4, “Parts listing, System x3200 M3 Types 7327 and 7328,” on page 133 to determine which
components are customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units
(FRU).
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a
trained service technician.
v Go to the IBM support Web site at http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/ to check for technical
information, hints, tips, and new device drivers or to submit a request for information.
Error code Description Action
2011001 PCI-X PERR 1. Reseat all affected adapters.
2. Update the PCI adapter firmware.
3. Remove the adapter.
4. Replace the following components one at a time,
in the order shown, restarting the server each
time:
a. Adapter
b. (Trained service technician only) System
board
2018001 PCI Express uncorrected or uncorrected error 1. Reseat all affected adapters.
2. Update the PCI adapter firmware.
3. Remove the adapter.
4. Replace the following components one at a time,
in the order shown, restarting the server each
time:
a. Adapter
b. (Trained service technician only) System
board

30 System x3200 M3 Types 7327 and 7328: Problem Determination and Service Guide
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem
is solved.
v See Chapter 4, “Parts listing, System x3200 M3 Types 7327 and 7328,” on page 133 to determine which
components are customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units
(FRU).
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a
trained service technician.
v Go to the IBM support Web site at http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/ to check for technical
information, hints, tips, and new device drivers or to submit a request for information.
Error code Description Action
2018002 Option ROM resource allocation failure Informational message that some devices might not
be initialized.
1. If possible, rearrange the order of the adapters in
the PCI slots to change the load order of the
optional-device ROM code.
2. Run the Setup utility, select Startup Options, and
change the boot priority to change the load order
of the optional-device ROM code.
3. Run the Setup utility and disable some other
resources, if their functions are not being used, to
make more space available.
a. Select Startup Options -> Planar Ethernet
(PXE/DHCP) to disable the integrated
Ethernet controller ROM.
b. Select Advanced Functions -> PCI Bus
Control -> PCI ROM Control Execution to
disable the ROM of the adapter in the PCI
slots.
c. Select Devices and I/O Ports to disable any
of the integrated devices.
4. Replace the following components one at a time,
in the order shown, restarting the server each
time:
a. Each adapter
b. (Trained service technician only) System
board
3xx0007 (xx Firmware fault detected, system halted 1. Recover the server firmware to the latest level
can be 00 - (see “Updating the firmware” on page 221).
19)
2. Undo any recent configuration changes, or clear
CMOS memory to restore the settings to the
default values (see “System-board jumpers and
switches” on page 20.
3. Remove any recently installed hardware.
3038003 Firmware corrupted 1. Run the Setup utility, select Load Default
Settings, and save the settings to recover the
server firmware.
2. (Trained service technician only) Replace the
system board.
3048005 Booted secondary (backup) UEFI Image Information only. The backup switch was used to boot
the secondary bank.

Chapter 3. Diagnostics 31
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem
is solved.
v See Chapter 4, “Parts listing, System x3200 M3 Types 7327 and 7328,” on page 133 to determine which
components are customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units
(FRU).
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a
trained service technician.
v Go to the IBM support Web site at http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/ to check for technical
information, hints, tips, and new device drivers or to submit a request for information.
Error code Description Action
3048006 Booted secondary (backup) UEFI image 1. Run the Setup utility, select Load Default
because of ABR Settings, and save the settings to recover the
primary UEFI settings.
2. Turn off the server and remove it from the power
source.
3. Reconnect the server to the power source, then
turn on the server.
305000A RTC date/time is incorrect 1. Adjust the date and time settings in the Setup
utility, and then restart the server.
2. Reseat the battery.
3. Replace the following components one at a time,
in the order shown, restarting the server each
time:
a. Battery
b. (Trained service technician only) System
board
3058001 System configuration invalid 1. Run the Setup utility, and select Save Settings.
2. Run the Setup utility, select Load Default
Settings, and save the settings.
3. Reseat the following components one at a time in
the order shown, restarting the server each time:
a. Battery
b. Failing device (if the device is a FRU, it must
be reseated by a trained service technician
only)
c. (Trained service technician only) System board
3058004 Three boot failure 1. Undo any recent system changes, such as new
settings or newly installed devices.
2. Make sure that the server is attached to a reliable
power source.
3. Remove all hardware that is not listed on the
ServerProven Web site at http://www.ibm.com/
servers/eserver/serverproven/compat/us/.
4. Make sure that the operating system is not
corrupted.
5. Run the Setup utility, save the configuration, and
then restart the server.
3108007 System configuration restored to default Information only. This is message is usually
settings associated with the CMOS battery clear event.

32 System x3200 M3 Types 7327 and 7328: Problem Determination and Service Guide
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem
is solved.
v See Chapter 4, “Parts listing, System x3200 M3 Types 7327 and 7328,” on page 133 to determine which
components are customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units
(FRU).
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a
trained service technician.
v Go to the IBM support Web site at http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/ to check for technical
information, hints, tips, and new device drivers or to submit a request for information.
Error code Description Action
3138002 Boot configuration error 1. Remove any recent configuration changes made
to the Setup utility.
2. Run the Setup utility, select Load Default
Settings, and save the settings.
3808000 IMM communication failure 1. Remove power from the server for 30 seconds,
and then reconnect the server to power and
restart it.
2. Update the IMM firmware to the latest level (see
“Updating the firmware” on page 221).
3. Make sure that the virtual media key is seated
and not damaged.
4. (Trained service technician only) Replace the
system board.
3808002 Error updating system configuration to IMM 1. Remove power from the server, and then
reconnect the server to power and restart it.
2. Run the Setup utility and select Save Settings.
3. Update the IMM firmware to the latest level (see
“Updating the firmware” on page 221).
3808003 Error retrieving system configuration from 1. Remove power from the server, and then
IMM reconnect the server to power and restart it.
2. Run the Setup utility and select Save Settings.
3. Update the IMM firmware to the latest level (see
“Updating the firmware” on page 221).
3808004 IMM system event log full v When using out-of-band, use the IMM Web
interface or IPMItool to clear the logs from the
operating system.
v When using the local console:
1. Run the Setup utility.
2. Select System Event Log.
3. Select Clear System Event Log.
4. Restart the server.
3818001 Core Root of Trust Measurement (CRTM) 1. Run the Setup utility, select Load Default
update failed Settings, and save the settings.
2. (Trained service technician only) Replace the
system board.
3818002 Core Root of Trust Measurement (CRTM) 1. Run the Setup utility, select Load Default
update aborted Settings, and save the settings.
2. (Trained service technician only) Replace the
system board.

Chapter 3. Diagnostics 33
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem
is solved.
v See Chapter 4, “Parts listing, System x3200 M3 Types 7327 and 7328,” on page 133 to determine which
components are customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units
(FRU).
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a
trained service technician.
v Go to the IBM support Web site at http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/ to check for technical
information, hints, tips, and new device drivers or to submit a request for information.
Error code Description Action
3818003 Core Root of Trust Measurement (CRTM) 1. Run the Setup utility, select Load Default
flash lock failed Settings, and save the settings.
2. (Trained service technician only) Replace the
system board.
3818004 Core Root of Trust Measurement (CRTM) 1. Run the Setup utility, select Load Default
system error Settings, and save the settings.
2. (Trained service technician only) Replace the
system board.
3818005 Current Bank Core Root of Trust 1. Run the Setup utility, select Load Default
Measurement (CRTM) capsule signature Settings, and save the settings.
invalid
2. (Trained service technician only) Replace the
system board.
3818006 Opposite bank CRTM capsule signature 1. Switch the server firmware bank to the backup
invalid bank (see “Starting the backup server firmware”
on page 229).
2. Run the Setup utility, select Load Default
Settings, and save the settings.
3. Switch the bank back to the primary bank.
4. (Trained service technician only) Replace the
system board.
3818007 CRTM update capsule signature invalid 1. Run the Setup utility, select Load Default
Settings, and save the settings.
2. (Trained service technician only) Replace the
system board.
3828004 AEM power capping disabled 1. Check the settings and the event logs.
2. Make sure that the Active Energy Manager feature
is enabled in the Setup utility. Select System
Settings -> Power -> Active Energy -> Capping
Enabled.
3. Update the server firmware to the latest level (see
“Updating the firmware” on page 221).
4. Update the IMM firmware to the latest level (see
“Updating the firmware” on page 221).

System-event log
The system-event log contains messages of three types:
Information
Information messages do not require action; they record significant
system-level events, such as when the server is started.

34 System x3200 M3 Types 7327 and 7328: Problem Determination and Service Guide
Warning
Warning messages do not require immediate action; they indicate possible
problems, such as when the recommended maximum ambient temperature
is exceeded.
Error Error messages might require action; they indicate system errors, such as
when a fan is not detected.

Each message contains date and time information, and it indicates the source of
the message (POST or the IMM).

Integrated management module (IMM) error messages


The following table describes the IMM error messages and suggested actions to
correct the detected problems. For more information about IMM, see the Integrated
Management Module User's Guide at http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/
supportsite.wss/ docdisplay?lndocid=MIGR-5079770&brandind=5000008.

v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem
is solved.
v See Chapter 4, “Parts listing, System x3200 M3 Types 7327 and 7328,” on page 133 to determine which
components are customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units
(FRU).
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a
trained service technician.
Message Severity Description Action
Numeric sensor Ambient Temp Error An upper critical sensor Reduce the ambient temperature.
going high (upper critical) has going high has asserted.
asserted.
Numeric sensor Ambient Temp Error An upper nonrecoverable Reduce the ambient temperature.
going high (upper non-recoverable) sensor going high has
has asserted. asserted.
Numeric sensor Planar 3.3V going Error A lower critical sensor going (Trained service technician only)
low (lower critical) has asserted. low has asserted. Replace the system board.
Numeric sensor Planar 3.3V going Error An upper critical sensor (Trained service technician only)
high (upper critical) has asserted. going high has asserted. Replace the system board.
Numeric sensor Planar 5V going Error A lower critical sensor going (Trained service technician only)
low (lower critical) has asserted. low has asserted. Replace the system board.
Numeric sensor Planar 5V going Error An upper critical sensor (Trained service technician only)
high (upper critical) has asserted. going high has asserted. Replace the system board.
Numeric sensor Planar VBAT going Error A lower critical sensor going Replace the 3 V battery.
low (lower critical) has asserted. low has asserted.
Numeric sensor CPU Fan Tach/HDD Error A lower critical sensor going 1. Reseat the failing fan n, which
Fan Tach/SYS Fan Tach going low low has asserted. is indicated by a lit LED on
(lower critical) has the fan.
asserted/deasserted. (n = fan
2. Replace the failing fan.
number)
(n = fan number)
Fan n detected as present/absent. Error A present/absent condition 1. Reseat the failing fan n.
(n = fan number and FAN 6 is the has occurred.
2. Replace the failing fan.
equivalent of SYS FAN)
(n = fan number)

Chapter 3. Diagnostics 35
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem
is solved.
v See Chapter 4, “Parts listing, System x3200 M3 Types 7327 and 7328,” on page 133 to determine which
components are customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units
(FRU).
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a
trained service technician.
The Processor CPU nStatus has Error A processor failed - IERR 1. Make sure that the latest
Failed with IERR. condition has occurred. levels of firmware and device
(n = microprocessor number) drivers are installed for all
adapters and standard
devices, such as Ethernet,
SCSI, and SAS.
Important: Some cluster
solutions require specific code
levels or coordinated code
updates. If the device is part
of a cluster solution, verify that
the latest level of code is
supported for the cluster
solution before you update the
code.
2. Run the DSA program for the
hard disk drives and other I/O
devices.
3. (Trained service technician
only) Replace microprocessor
n.
(n = microprocessor number)
An Over-Temperature Condition has Error An overtemperature condition 1. Make sure that the fans are
been detected on the Processor has occurred for operating, that there are no
CPU nStatus. microprocessor n. obstructions to the airflow, that
(n = microprocessor number) (n = microprocessor number) the air baffle is in place and
correctly installed, and that the
server cover is installed and
completely closed.
2. Make sure that the heat sink
for microprocessor n is
installed correctly.
3. (Trained service technician
only) Replace microprocessor
n.
(n = microprocessor number)

36 System x3200 M3 Types 7327 and 7328: Problem Determination and Service Guide
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem
is solved.
v See Chapter 4, “Parts listing, System x3200 M3 Types 7327 and 7328,” on page 133 to determine which
components are customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units
(FRU).
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a
trained service technician.
The Processor CPU nStatus has Error A processor failed - 1. Check for a serever firmware
Failed with FRB1/BIST condition. FRB1/BIST condition has update.
(n = microprocessor number) occurred. Important: Some cluster
solutions require specific code
levels or coordinated code
updates. If the device is part
of a cluster solution, verify that
the latest level of code is
supported for the cluster
solution before you update the
code.
2. Make sure that the installed
microprocessor is compatible
with each other (see “Installing
a microprocessor and fan
sink” on page 211 for
information about
microprocessor requirements).
3. (Trained service technician
only) Reseat microprocessor
n.
4. (Trained service technician
only) Replace microprocessor
n.
(n = microprocessor number)
The Processor CPU nStatus has a Error A processor configuration 1. Make sure that the installed
Configuration Mismatch. mismatch has occurred. microprocessor is compatible
(n = microprocessor number) with each other (see “Installing
a microprocessor and fan
sink” on page 211 for
information about
microprocessor requirements).
2. (Trained service technician
only) Replace the
incompatible microprocessor.

Chapter 3. Diagnostics 37
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem
is solved.
v See Chapter 4, “Parts listing, System x3200 M3 Types 7327 and 7328,” on page 133 to determine which
components are customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units
(FRU).
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a
trained service technician.
An SM BIOS Uncorrectable CPU Error An SMBIOS uncorrectable 1. Check for a server firmware
complex error for Processor CPU CPU complex error has update.
nStatus has asserted. asserted. Important: Some cluster
(n = microprocessor number) solutions require specific code
levels or coordinated code
updates. If the device is part
of a cluster solution, verify that
the latest level of code is
supported for the cluster
solution before you update the
code.
2. Make sure that the installed
microprocessor is compatible
with each other (see “Installing
a microprocessor and fan
sink” on page 211 for
information about
microprocessor requirements).
3. (Trained service technician
only) Reseat microprocessor
n.
4. (Trained service technician
only) Replace microprocessor
n.
(n = microprocessor number)
Sensor CPU nOverTemp has Error A sensor has changed to 1. Make sure that the fans are
transitioned to critical from a less Critical state from a less operating, that there are no
severe state. severe state. obstructions to the airflow, that
(n = microprocessor number) the air baffle is in place and
correctly installed, and that the
server cover is installed and
completely closed.
2. Make sure that the heat sink
for microprocessor n is
installed correctly.
3. (Trained service technician
only) Replace microprocessor
n.
(n = microprocessor number)

38 System x3200 M3 Types 7327 and 7328: Problem Determination and Service Guide
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem
is solved.
v See Chapter 4, “Parts listing, System x3200 M3 Types 7327 and 7328,” on page 133 to determine which
components are customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units
(FRU).
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a
trained service technician.
Sensor CPU nOverTemp has Error A sensor has changed to 1. Make sure that the fans are
transitioned to non-recoverable from Nonrecoverable state from a operating, that there are no
a less severe state. less severe state. obstructions to the airflow, that
(n = microprocessor number) the air baffle is in place and
correctly installed, and that the
server cover is installed and
completely closed.
2. Make sure that the heat sink
for microprocessor n is
installed correctly.
3. (Trained service technician
only) Replace microprocessor
n.
(n = microprocessor number)
Sensor CPU nOverTemp has Error A sensor has changed to 1. Make sure that the fans are
transitioned to critical from a Critical state from operating, that there are no
non-recoverable state. Nonrecoverable state. obstructions to the airflow, that
(n = microprocessor number) the air baffle is in place and
correctly installed, and that the
server cover is installed and
completely closed.
2. Make sure that the heat sink
for microprocessor n is
installed correctly.
3. (Trained service technician
only) Replace microprocessor
n.
(n = microprocessor number)
Sensor CPU nOverTemp has Error A sensor has changed to 1. Make sure that the fans are
transitioned to non-recoverable. Nonrecoverable state. operating, that there are no
(n = microprocessor number) obstructions to the airflow, that
the air baffle is in place and
correctly installed, and that the
server cover is installed and
completely closed.
2. Make sure that the heat sink
for microprocessor n is
installed correctly.
3. (Trained service technician
only) Replace microprocessor
n.
(n = microprocessor number)

Chapter 3. Diagnostics 39
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem
is solved.
v See Chapter 4, “Parts listing, System x3200 M3 Types 7327 and 7328,” on page 133 to determine which
components are customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units
(FRU).
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a
trained service technician.
A bus timeout has occurred on Error A bus timeout has occurred. 1. Remove the adapter from the
system %1. PCI slot that is indicated by a
(%1 = CIM_ComputerSystem. lit LED.
ElementName)
2. Replace the extender card.
3. Remove all PCI adapters.
4. (Trained service technicians
only) Replace the system
board.
The System %1 encountered a Error A POST error has occurred. 1. Make sure the server meets
POST Error. (Sensor = ABR Status) the minimum configuration to
(%1 = CIM_ComputerSystem. start (see “Power-supply
ElementName) LEDs” on page 71).
2. Recover the server firmware
from the backup page (see
“Recovering the server
firmware” on page 124).
3. Update the server firmware to
the latest level.
Important: Some cluster
solutions require specific code
levels or coordinated code
updates. If the device is part
of a cluster solution, verify that
the latest level of code is
supported for the cluster
solution before you update the
code.
4. Remove components one at a
time, restarting the server
each time, to see if the
problem goes away.
5. If the problem remains,
(trained service technician)
replace the system board.
The System %1 encountered a Error A POST error has occurred. 1. Update the server firmware on
POST Error. (Sensor = Firmware Error) the primary page.
(%1 = CIM_ComputerSystem. Important: Some cluster
ElementName) solutions require specific code
levels or coordinated code
updates. If the device is part
of a cluster solution, verify that
the latest level of code is
supported for the cluster
solution before you update the
code.
2. (Trained service technician
only) Replace the system
board.

40 System x3200 M3 Types 7327 and 7328: Problem Determination and Service Guide
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem
is solved.
v See Chapter 4, “Parts listing, System x3200 M3 Types 7327 and 7328,” on page 133 to determine which
components are customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units
(FRU).
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a
trained service technician.
A Uncorrectable Bus Error has Error A bus uncorrectable error has 1. Check the system-event log.
occurred on system %1. occurred.
2. Check the PCI error LEDs.
(%1 = CIM_ComputerSystem. (Sensor = Critical Int PCI)
ElementName) 3. Remove the adapter from the
indicated PCI slot.
4. Check for a server firmware
update.
Important: Some cluster
solutions require specific code
levels or coordinated code
updates. If the device is part
of a cluster solution, verify that
the latest level of code is
supported for the cluster
solution before you update the
code.
5. (Trained service technician
only) Replace the system
board.
A Uncorrectable Bus Error has Error A bus uncorrectable error has 1. Check the system-event log.
occurred on system %1. occurred.
2. Check the microprocessor
(%1 = CIM_ComputerSystem. (Sensor = Critical Int CPU)
error LEDs.
ElementName)
3. (Trained service technician
only) Replace microprocessor.
4. Check for a server firmware
update.
Important: Some cluster
solutions require specific code
levels or coordinated code
updates. If the device is part
of a cluster solution, verify that
the latest level of code is
supported for the cluster
solution before you update the
code.
5. (Trained service technician
only) Replace the system
board.

Chapter 3. Diagnostics 41
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem
is solved.
v See Chapter 4, “Parts listing, System x3200 M3 Types 7327 and 7328,” on page 133 to determine which
components are customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units
(FRU).
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a
trained service technician.
A Uncorrectable Bus Error has Error A bus uncorrectable error has 1. Check the system-event log.
occurred on system %1. occurred.
2. Check the DIMM error LEDs.
(%1 = CIM_ComputerSystem. (Sensor = Critical Int DIM)
ElementName) 3. Remove the failing DIMM from
the system board.
4. Check for a server firmware
update.
Important: Some cluster
solutions require specific code
levels or coordinated code
updates. If the device is part
of a cluster solution, verify that
the latest level of code is
supported for the cluster
solution before you update the
code.
5. Make sure that the installed
DIMMs are supported and
configured correctly.
6. (Trained service technician
only) Replace the system
board.
Sensor Sys Board Fault has Error A sensor has changed to 1. Check the system-event log.
transitioned to critical from a less Critical state from a less
2. Check for an error LED on the
severe state. severe state.
system board.
3. Replace any failing device.
4. Check for a server firmware
update.
Important: Some cluster
solutions require specific code
levels or coordinated code
updates. If the device is part
of a cluster solution, verify that
the latest level of code is
supported for the cluster
solution before you update the
code.
5. (Trained service technician
only) Replace the system
board.
Sensor RAID Error has transitioned Error A sensor has changed to 1. Check the hard disk drive
to critical from a less severe state. Critical state from a less LEDs.
severe state.
2. Reseat the hard disk drive for
which the status LED is lit.
3. Replace the defective hard
disk drive.

42 System x3200 M3 Types 7327 and 7328: Problem Determination and Service Guide
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem
is solved.
v See Chapter 4, “Parts listing, System x3200 M3 Types 7327 and 7328,” on page 133 to determine which
components are customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units
(FRU).
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a
trained service technician.
The Drive n Status has been Error A drive has been removed. Reseat hard disk drive n.
removed from unit Drive 0 Status. (n = hard disk drive number)
(n = hard disk drive number)
The Drive n Status has been Error A drive has been disabled 1. Run the hard disk drive
disabled due to a detected fault. because of a fault. diagnostic test on drive n.
(n = hard disk drive number)
2. Reseat the following
components:
a. Hard disk drive
b. Cable from the system
board to the backplane
3. Replace the following
components one at a time, in
the order shown, restarting the
server each time:
a. Hard disk drive
b. Cable from the system
board to the backplane
c. Hard disk drive backplane
(n = hard disk drive number)
Array %1 is in critical condition. Error An array is in Critical state. Replace the hard disk drive that is
(%1 = CIM_ComputerSystem. (Sensor = Drive n Status) indicated by a lit status LED.
ElementName) (n = hard disk drive number)
Array %1 has failed. Error An array is in Failed state. Replace the hard disk drive that is
(%1 = CIM_ComputerSystem. (Sensor = Drive n Status) indicated by a lit status LED.
ElementName) (n = hard disk drive number)
Memory uncorrectable error Error A memory uncorrectable 1. If the server failed the POST
detected for DIMM All DIMMs on error has occurred. memory test, reseat the
Memory Subsystem All DIMMs. DIMMs.
2. Replace any DIMM that is
indicated by a lit error LED.
Note: You do not have to
replace DIMMs by pairs.
3. Run the Setup utility to enable
all the DIMMs.
4. Run the DSA memory test.

Chapter 3. Diagnostics 43
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem
is solved.
v See Chapter 4, “Parts listing, System x3200 M3 Types 7327 and 7328,” on page 133 to determine which
components are customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units
(FRU).
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a
trained service technician.
Memory Logging Limit Reached for Error The memory logging limit has 1. Update the server firmware to
DIMM All DIMMs on Memory been reached. the latest level.
Subsystem All DIMMs. Important: Some cluster
solutions require specific code
levels or coordinated code
updates. If the device is part
of a cluster solution, verify that
the latest level of code is
supported for the cluster
solution before you update the
code.
2. Reseat the DIMMs and run
the DSA memory test.
3. Replace any DIMM that is
indicated by a lit error LED.
Memory DIMM Configuration Error Error A DIMM configuration error Make sure that DIMMs are
for All DIMMs on Memory has occurred. installed in the correct sequence
Subsystem All DIMMs. and have the same size, type,
speed, and technology.
Memory uncorrectable error Error A memory uncorrectable 1. If the server failed the POST
detected for DIMM One of the error has occurred. memory test, reseat the
DIMMs on Memory Subsystem One DIMMs.
of the DIMMs.
2. Replace any DIMM that is
indicated by a lit error LED.
Note: You do not have to
replace DIMMs by pairs.
3. Run the Setup utility to enable
all the DIMMs.
4. Run the DSA memory test.
Memory Logging Limit Reached for Error The memory logging limit has 1. Update the UEFI to the latest
DIMM One of the DIMMs on been reached. level.
Memory Subsystem One of the Important: Some cluster
DIMMs. solutions require specific code
levels or coordinated code
updates. If the device is part
of a cluster solution, verify that
the latest level of code is
supported for the cluster
solution before you update the
code.
2. Reseat the DIMMs and run
the DSA memory test.
3. Replace any DIMM that is
indicated by a lit error LED.

44 System x3200 M3 Types 7327 and 7328: Problem Determination and Service Guide
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem
is solved.
v See Chapter 4, “Parts listing, System x3200 M3 Types 7327 and 7328,” on page 133 to determine which
components are customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units
(FRU).
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a
trained service technician.
Memory DIMM Configuration Error Error A DIMM configuration error Make sure that DIMMs are
for One of the DIMMs on Memory has occurred. installed in the correct sequence
Subsystem One of the DIMMs. and have the same size, type,
speed, and technology.
Memory uncorrectable error Error A memory uncorrectable 1. If the server failed the POST
detected for DIMM n Status on error has occurred. memory test, reseat the
Memory Subsystem DIMM n Status. DIMMs.
(n = DIMM number)
2. Replace any DIMM that is
indicated by a lit error LED.
Note: You do not have to
replace DIMMs by pairs.
3. Run the Setup utility to enable
all the DIMMs.
4. Run the DSA memory test.
5. (Trained service technician
only) Replace the system
board.
Memory Logging Limit Reached for Error The memory logging limit has 1. Update the UEFI to the latest
DIMM nStatus on Memory been reached. level.
Subsystem DIMMnStatus. Important: Some cluster
(n = DIMM number) solutions require specific code
levels or coordinated code
updates. If the device is part
of a cluster solution, verify that
the latest level of code is
supported for the cluster
solution before you update the
code.
2. Reseat the DIMMs and run
the DSA memory test.
3. Replace any DIMM that is
indicated by a lit error LED.
Memory DIMM Configuration Error Error A DIMM configuration error Make sure that DIMMs are
for DIMM nStatus on Memory has occurred. installed in the correct sequence
Subsystem DIMM nStatus. and have the same size, type,
(n = DIMM number) speed, and technology.
Sensor DIMM n Temp has Error A sensor has changed to 1. Make sure that the fans are
transitioned to critical from a less Critical state from a less operating, that there are no
severe state. severe state. obstructions to the airflow, that
(n = DIMM number) the air baffles are in place and
correctly installed, and that the
server cover is installed and
completely closed.
2. If a fan has failed, complete
the action for a fan failure.
3. Replace DIMM n.
(n = DIMM number)

Chapter 3. Diagnostics 45
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem
is solved.
v See Chapter 4, “Parts listing, System x3200 M3 Types 7327 and 7328,” on page 133 to determine which
components are customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units
(FRU).
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a
trained service technician.
A PCI PERR has occurred on Error A PCI PERR has occurred. 1. Check the extender-card
system %1. (Sensor = PCI Slot n; n = LEDs.
(%1 = CIM_ComputerSystem. PCI slot number)
2. Reseat the affected adapters
ElementName)
and extender card.
3. Update the server and adapter
firmware (UEFI and IMM).
Important: Some cluster
solutions require specific code
levels or coordinated code
updates. If the device is part
of a cluster solution, verify that
the latest level of code is
supported for the cluster
solution before you update the
code.
4. Remove the adapter from slot
n.
5. Replace the PCIe adapter.
6. Replace extender card n.
(n = PCI slot number)
A PCI SERR has occurred on Error A PCI SERR has occurred. 1. Check the extender-card
system %1. (Sensor = PCI Slot n; n = LEDs.
(%1 = CIM_ComputerSystem. PCI slot number)
2. Reseat the affected adapters
ElementName)
and extender card.
3. Update the server and adapter
firmware (UEFI and IMM).
Important: Some cluster
solutions require specific code
levels or coordinated code
updates. If the device is part
of a cluster solution, verify that
the latest level of code is
supported for the cluster
solution before you update the
code.
4. Remove the adapter from slot
n.
5. Replace the PCIe adapter.
6. Replace extender card n.
(n = PCI slot number)

46 System x3200 M3 Types 7327 and 7328: Problem Determination and Service Guide
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem
is solved.
v See Chapter 4, “Parts listing, System x3200 M3 Types 7327 and 7328,” on page 133 to determine which
components are customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units
(FRU).
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a
trained service technician.
A PCI PERR has occurred on Error A PCI PERR has occurred. 1. Check the extender-card
system %1. (Sensor = One of PCI Err) LEDs.
(%1 = CIM_ComputerSystem.
2. Reseat the affected adapters
ElementName)
and riser card.
3. Update the server and adapter
firmware (UEFI and IMM).
Important: Some cluster
solutions require specific code
levels or coordinated code
updates. If the device is part
of a cluster solution, verify that
the latest level of code is
supported for the cluster
solution before you update the
code.
4. Remove both adapters.
5. Replace the PCIe adapter.
6. Replace the extender card.
7. (Trained service technician
only) Replace the system
board.
A PCI SERR has occurred on Error A PCI SERR has occurred. 1. Check the extender-card
system %1. (Sensor = One of PCI Err) LEDs.
(%1 = CIM_ComputerSystem.
2. Reseat the affected adapters
ElementName)
and extender card.
3. Update the server and adapter
firmware (UEFI and IMM).
Important: Some cluster
solutions require specific code
levels or coordinated code
updates. If the device is part
of a cluster solution, verify that
the latest level of code is
supported for the cluster
solution before you update the
code.
4. Remove both adapters.
5. Replace the PCIe adapter.
6. Replace the extender card.
7. (Trained service technician
only) Replace the system
board.

Chapter 3. Diagnostics 47
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem
is solved.
v See Chapter 4, “Parts listing, System x3200 M3 Types 7327 and 7328,” on page 133 to determine which
components are customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units
(FRU).
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a
trained service technician.
Fault in slot System board on Error 1. Check the extender-card
system %1. LEDs.
(%1 = CIM_ComputerSystem.
2. Reseat the affected adapters
ElementName)
and extender card.
3. Update the server and adapter
firmware (UEFI and IMM).
Important: Some cluster
solutions require specific code
levels or coordinated code
updates. If the device is part
of a cluster solution, verify that
the latest level of code is
supported for the cluster
solution before you update the
code.
4. Remove both adapters.
5. Replace the PCIe adapter.
6. Replace the extender card.
7. (Trained service technician
only) Replace the system
board.
Redundancy Bckup Mem Status has Error Redundancy has been lost 1. Check the system-event log
been reduced. and is insufficient to continue for DIMM failure events
operation. (uncorrectable or PFA) and
correct the failures.
2. Re-enable mirroring in the
Setup utility.
IMM Network Initialization Complete. Info An IMM network has No action; information only.
completed initialization.
Certificate Authority %1 has Error A problem has occurred with 1. Make sure that the certificate
detected a %2 Certificate Error. the SSL Server, SSL Client, that you are importing is
(%1 = IBM_CertificateAuthority. or SSL Trusted CA certificate correct.
CADistinguishedName; that has been imported into
2. Try importing the certificate
%2 = CIM_PublicKeyCertificate. the IMM. The imported
again.
ElementName) certificate must contain a
public key that corresponds
to the key pair that was
previously generated by the
Generate a New Key and
Certificate Signing Request
link.
Ethernet Data Rate modified from Info A user has modified the No action; information only.
%1 to %2 by user %3. Ethernet port data rate.
(%1 = CIM_EthernetPort.Speed;
%2 = CIM_EthernetPort.Speed;
%3 = user ID)

48 System x3200 M3 Types 7327 and 7328: Problem Determination and Service Guide
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem
is solved.
v See Chapter 4, “Parts listing, System x3200 M3 Types 7327 and 7328,” on page 133 to determine which
components are customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units
(FRU).
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a
trained service technician.
Ethernet Duplex setting modified Info A user has modified the No action; information only.
from %1 to %2 by user %3. Ethernet port duplex setting.
(%1 = CIM_EthernetPort.FullDuplex;
%2 = CIM_EthernetPort.FullDuplex;
%3 = user ID)
Ethernet MTU setting modified from Info A user has modified the No action; information only.
%1 to %2 by user %3. Ethernet port MTU setting.
(%1 = CIM_EthernetPort.
ActiveMaximumTransmissionUnit;
%2 = CIM_EthernetPort.
ActiveMaximumTransmissionUnit;
%3 = user ID)
Ethernet Duplex setting modified Info A user has modified the No action; information only.
from %1 to %2 by user %3. Ethernet port MAC address
(%1 = CIM_EthernetPort. setting.
NetworkAddresses;
%2 = CIM_EthernetPort.
NetworkAddresses;
%3 = user ID)
Ethernet interface %1 by user %2. Info A user has enabled or No action; information only.
(%1 = disabled the Ethernet
CIM_EthernetPort.EnabledState; interface.
%2 = user ID)
Hostname set to %1 by user %2. Info A user has modified the host No action; information only.
(%1 = CIM_DNSProtocolEndpoint. name of the IMM.
Hostname;
%2 = user ID)
IP address of network interface Info A user has modified the IP No action; information only.
modified from %1 to %2 by user address of the IMM.
%3.
(%1 = CIM_IPProtocolEndpoint.
IPv4Address;
%2 =
CIM_StaticIPAssignmentSettingData.
IPAddress;
%3 = user ID)
IP subnet mask of network interface Info A user has modified the IP No action; information only.
modified from %1 to %2 by user subnet mask of the IMM.
%3s.
(%1 = CIM_IPProtocolEndpoint.
SubnetMask;
%2 =
CIM_StaticIPAssignmentSettingData.
SubnetMask;
%3 = user ID)

Chapter 3. Diagnostics 49
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem
is solved.
v See Chapter 4, “Parts listing, System x3200 M3 Types 7327 and 7328,” on page 133 to determine which
components are customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units
(FRU).
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a
trained service technician.
IP address of default gateway Info A user has modified the No action; information only.
modified from %1 to %2 by user default gateway IP address
%3s. of the IMM.
(%1 = CIM_IPProtocolEndpoint.
GatewayIPv4Address;
%2 =
CIM_StaticIPAssignmentSettingData.
DefaultGatewayAddress;
%3 = user ID)
OS Watchdog response %1 by %2. Info A user has enabled or No action; information only.
(%1 = Enabled or Disabled; %2 = disabled an OS Watchdog.
user ID)
DHCP[%1] failure, no IP address Info A DHCP server has failed to 1. Make sure that the network
assigned. assign an IP address to the cable is connected.
(%1 = IP address, xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx) IMM.
2. Make sure that there is a
DHCP server on the network
that can assign an IP address
to the IMM.
Remote Login Successful. Login ID: Info A user has successfully No action; information only.
%1 from %2 at IP address %3. logged in to the IMM.
(%1 = user ID; %2 =
ValueMap(CIM_ProtocolEndpoint.
ProtocolIFType; %3 = IP address,
xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx)
Attempting to %1 server %2 by user Info A user has used the IMM to No action; information only.
%3. perform a power function on
(%1 = Power Up, Power Down, the server.
Power Cycle, or Reset; %2 =
IBM_ComputerSystem.
ElementName; %3 = user ID)
Security: Userid: '%1' had %2 login Error A user has exceeded the 1. Make sure that the correct
failures from WEB client at IP maximum number of login ID and password are
address %3. unsuccessful login attempts being used.
(%1 = user ID; %2 = from a Web browser and has
2. Have the system administrator
MaximumSuccessiveLoginFailures been prevented from logging
reset the login ID or
(currently set to 5 in the firmware); in for the lockout period.
password.
%3 = IP address, xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx)
Security: Login ID: '%1' had %2 Error A user has exceeded the 1. Make sure that the correct
login failures from CLI at %3. maximum number of login ID and password are
(%1 = user ID; %2 = unsuccessful login attempts being used.
MaximumSuccessiveLoginFailures from the command-line
2. Have the system administrator
(currently set to 5 in the firmware); interface and has been
reset the login ID or
%3 = IP address, xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx) prevented from logging in for
password.
the lockout period.

50 System x3200 M3 Types 7327 and 7328: Problem Determination and Service Guide
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem
is solved.
v See Chapter 4, “Parts listing, System x3200 M3 Types 7327 and 7328,” on page 133 to determine which
components are customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units
(FRU).
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a
trained service technician.
Remote access attempt failed. Error A user has attempted to log 1. Make sure that the correct
Invalid userid or password received. in from a Web browser by login ID and password are
Userid is '%1' from WEB browser at using an invalid login ID or being used.
IP address %2. password.
2. Have the system administrator
(%1 = user ID; %2 = IP address,
reset the login ID or
xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx)
password.
Remote access attempt failed. Error A user has attempted to log 1. Make sure that the correct
Invalid userid or password received. in from a Telnet session by login ID and password are
Userid is '%1' from TELNET client at using an invalid login ID or being used.
IP address %2. password.
2. Have the system administrator
(%1 = user ID; %2 = IP address,
reset the login ID or
xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx)
password.
The Chassis Event Log (CEL) on Info A user has cleared the IMM No action; information only.
system %1 cleared by user %2. event log.
(%1 = CIM_ComputerSystem.
ElementName; %2 = user ID)
IMM reset was initiated by user %1. Info A user has initiated a reset of No action; information only.
(%1 = user ID) the IMM.
ENET[0] DHCP-HSTN=%1, DN=%2, Info The DHCP server has No action; information only.
IP@=%3, SN=%4, GW@=%5, assigned an IMM IP address
DNS1@=%6. and configuration.
(%1 = CIM_DNSProtocolEndpoint.
Hostname; %2 =
CIM_DNSProtocolEndpoint.
DomainName; %3 =
CIM_IPProtocolEndpoint.
IPv4Address; %4 =
CIM_IPProtocolEndpoint.
SubnetMask; %5 = IP address,
xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx; %6 = IP address,
xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx)
ENET[0] IP-Cfg:HstName=%1, Info An IMM IP address and No action; information only.
IP@%2, NetMsk=%3, GW@=%4. configuration have been
(%1 = CIM_DNSProtocolEndpoint. assigned using client data.
Hostname; %2 =
CIM_StaticIPSettingData.
IPv4Address; %3 =
CIM_StaticIPSettingData.
SubnetMask; %4 =
CIM_StaticIPSettingData.
DefaultGatewayAddress)
LAN: Ethernet[0] interface is no Info The IMM Ethernet interface No action; information only.
longer active. has been disabled.
LAN: Ethernet[0] interface is now Info The IMM Ethernet interface No action; information only.
active. has been enabled.

Chapter 3. Diagnostics 51
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem
is solved.
v See Chapter 4, “Parts listing, System x3200 M3 Types 7327 and 7328,” on page 133 to determine which
components are customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units
(FRU).
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a
trained service technician.
DHCP setting changed to by user Info A user has changed the No action; information only.
%1. DHCP mode.
(%1 = user ID)
IMM: Configuration %1 restored Info A user has restored the IMM No action; information only.
from a configuration file by user %2. configuration by importing a
(%1 = CIM_ConfigurationData. configuration file.
ConfigurationName; %2 = user ID)
Watchdog %1 Screen Capture Error An operating-system error 1. Reconfigure the watchdog
Occurred. has occurred, and the screen timer to a higher value.
(%1 = OS Watchdog or Loader capture was successful.
2. Make sure that the IMM
Watchdog)
Ethernet over USB interface is
enabled.
3. Reinstall the RNDIS or
cdc_ether device driver for the
operating system.
4. Disable the watchdog.
5. Check the integrity of the
installed operating system.
Watchdog %1 Failed to Capture Error An operating-system error 1. Reconfigure the watchdog
Screen. has occurred, and the screen timer to a higher value.
(%1 = OS Watchdog or Loader capture failed.
2. Make sure that the IMM
Watchdog)
Ethernet over USB interface is
enabled.
3. Reinstall the RNDIS or
cdc_ether device driver for the
operating system.
4. Disable the watchdog.
5. Check the integrity of the
installed operating system.
6. Update the IMM firmware.
Important: Some cluster
solutions require specific code
levels or coordinated code
updates. If the device is part
of a cluster solution, verify that
the latest level of code is
supported for the cluster
solution before you update the
code.

52 System x3200 M3 Types 7327 and 7328: Problem Determination and Service Guide
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem
is solved.
v See Chapter 4, “Parts listing, System x3200 M3 Types 7327 and 7328,” on page 133 to determine which
components are customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units
(FRU).
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a
trained service technician.
Running the backup IMM main Error The IMM has resorted to Update the IMM firmware.
application. running the backup main Important: Some cluster
application. solutions require specific code
levels or coordinated code
updates. If the device is part of a
cluster solution, verify that the
latest level of code is supported
for the cluster solution before you
update the code.
Please ensure that the IMM is Error The server does not support Update the IMM firmware to a
flashed with the correct firmware. the installed IMM firmware version that the server supports.
The IMM is unable to match its version. Important: Some cluster
firmware to the server. solutions require specific code
levels or coordinated code
updates. If the device is part of a
cluster solution, verify that the
latest level of code is supported
for the cluster solution before you
update the code.
IMM reset was caused by restoring Info The IMM has been reset No action; information only.
default values. because a user has restored
the configuration to its default
settings.
IMM clock has been set from NTP Info The IMM clock has been set No action; information only.
server %1. to the date and time that is
(%1 = provided by the Network
IBM_NTPService.ElementName) Time Protocol server.
SSL data in the IMM configuration Error There is a problem with the 1. Make sure that the certificate
data is invalid. Clearing certificate that has been that you are importing is
configuration data region and imported into the IMM. The correct.
disabling SSL+H25. imported certificate must
2. Try to import the certificate
contain a public key that
again.
corresponds to the key pair
that was previously
generated through the
Generate a New Key and
Certificate Signing Request
link.
Flash of %1 from %2 succeeded for Info A user has successfully No action; information only.
user %3. updated one of the following
(%1 = CIM_ManagedElement. firmware components:
ElementName; v IMM main application
%2 = Web or LegacyCLI;
v IMM boot ROM
%3 = user ID)
v Server firmware
v Diagnostics
v Integrated service
processor

Chapter 3. Diagnostics 53
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem
is solved.
v See Chapter 4, “Parts listing, System x3200 M3 Types 7327 and 7328,” on page 133 to determine which
components are customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units
(FRU).
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a
trained service technician.
Flash of %1 from %2 failed for user Info An attempt to update a Try to update the firmware again.
%3. firmware component from the
(%1 = CIM_ManagedElement. interface and IP address has
ElementName; failed.
%2 = Web or LegacyCLI;
%3 = user ID)
The Chassis Event Log (CEL) on Info The IMM event log is 75% To avoid losing older log entries,
system %1 is 75% full. full. When the log is full, save the log as a text file and
(%1 = CIM_ComputerSystem. older log entries are replaced clear the log.
ElementName) by newer ones.
The Chassis Event Log (CEL) on Info The IMM event log is full. To avoid losing older log entries,
system %1 is 100% full. When the log is full, older log save the log as a text file and
(%1 = CIM_ComputerSystem. entries are replaced by clear the log.
ElementName) newer ones.
%1 Platform Watchdog Timer Error A Platform Watchdog Timer 1. Reconfigure the watchdog
expired for %2. Expired event has occurred. timer to a higher value.
(%1 = OS Watchdog or Loader
2. Make sure that the IMM
Watchdog; %2 = OS Watchdog or
Ethernet over USB interface is
Loader Watchdog)
enabled.
3. Reinstall the RNDIS or
cdc_ether device driver for the
operating system.
4. Disable the watchdog.
5. Check the integrity of the
installed operating system.
IMM Test Alert Generated by %1. Info A user has generated a test No action; information only.
(%1 = user ID) alert from the IMM.
Security: Userid: '%1' had %2 login Error A user has exceeded the 1. Make sure that the correct
failures from an SSH client at IP maximum number of login ID and password are
address %3. unsuccessful login attempts being used.
(%1 = user ID; %2 = from SSH and has been
2. Have the system administrator
MaximumSuccessiveLoginFailures prevented from logging in for
reset the login ID or
(currently set to 5 in the firmware); the lockout period.
password.
%3 = IP address, xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx)

54 System x3200 M3 Types 7327 and 7328: Problem Determination and Service Guide
Checkout procedure
This section contains a checkout procedure that you should follow to solve
hardware problems in the server.

About the checkout procedure


Before you perform the checkout procedure for diagnosing hardware problems,
review the following information:
v Read the safety information that begins on page vii.
v The diagnostic programs provide the primary methods of testing the major
components of the server, such as the I/O board, Ethernet controller, keyboard,
mouse (pointing device), serial ports, and hard disk drives. You can also use
them to test some external devices. If you are not sure whether a problem is
caused by the hardware or by the software, you can use the diagnostic programs
to confirm that the hardware is working correctly.
v When you run the diagnostic programs, a single problem might cause more than
one error message. When this happens, correct the cause of the first error
message. The other error messages usually will not occur the next time you run
the diagnostic programs.

Exception: If multiple error codes or light path diagnostics LEDs indicate a


microprocessor error, the error might be in a microprocessor or in a
microprocessor socket. See “Microprocessor problems” on page 62 for
information about diagnosing microprocessor problems.
v Before you run the diagnostic programs, you must determine whether the failing
server is part of a shared hard disk drive cluster (two or more servers that share
external storage devices). If it is part of a cluster, you can run all diagnostic
programs except the ones that test the storage unit (that is, a hard disk drive in
the storage unit) or the storage adapter that is attached to the storage unit. The
failing server might be part of a cluster if any of the following conditions is true:
– You have identified the failing server as part of a cluster (two or more servers
that share external storage devices).
– One or more external storage units are attached to the failing server and at
least one of the attached storage units is also attached to another server or
unidentifiable device.
– One or more servers are located near the failing server.

Important: If the server is part of a shared hard disk drive cluster, run one test
at a time. Do not run any suite of tests, such as “quick” or “normal” tests,
because this might enable the hard disk drive diagnostic tests.
v If the server is halted and a POST error code is displayed, see “Event logs” on
page 24. If the server is halted and no error message is displayed, see
“System-board jumpers and switches” on page 20 and “Solving undetermined
problems” on page 130.
v For information about power-supply problems, see “Solving power problems” on
page 128 and “Power-supply LEDs” on page 71.
v For intermittent problems, check the error log; see “Event logs” on page 24 and
“Diagnostic messages” on page 75.

Chapter 3. Diagnostics 55
Performing the checkout procedure
To perform the checkout procedure, complete the following steps:
1. Is the server part of a cluster?
v No: Go to step 2.
v Yes: Shut down all failing servers that are related to the cluster. Go to step 2.
2. Complete the following steps:
a. Turn off the server and all external devices.
b. Check all cables and power cords.
c. Set all display controls to the middle positions.
d. Turn on all external devices.
e. Turn on the server. If the server does not start, see “Troubleshooting tables”
on page 57.
f. Check the system-error LED on the control panel. If it is lit, check the LEDs
on the system board (see “Error LEDs” on page 69).
g. Check for the following results:
v Successful completion of POST, which is indicated by a single beep
v Successful completion of startup, which is indicated by a readable display
of the operating-system desktop
3. Did a single beep sound and are there readable instructions on the main menu,
or was a POST error code displayed?
v Yes: Find the “POST error codes” on page 26; if necessary, see “Solving
undetermined problems” on page 130.
v No: Find the failure symptom in “Troubleshooting tables” on page 57; if
necessary, run the diagnostic programs (see “Running the diagnostic
programs” on page 74).
– If you receive an error, see “Diagnostic messages” on page 75.
– If the diagnostic programs were completed successfully and you still
suspect a problem, see “Solving undetermined problems” on page 130.

56 System x3200 M3 Types 7327 and 7328: Problem Determination and Service Guide
Troubleshooting tables
Use the troubleshooting tables to find solutions to problems that have identifiable
symptoms.

If you cannot find the problem in these tables, see “Running the diagnostic
programs” on page 74 for information about testing the server.

If you have just added new software or a new optional device and the server is not
working, complete the following steps before using the troubleshooting tables:
1. Check the LEDs on the control panel or the system board (see “Error LEDs” on
page 69).
2. Remove the software or device that you just added.
3. Run the diagnostic tests to determine whether the server is running correctly.
4. Reinstall the new software or new device.

DVD drive problems


v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem
is solved.
v See Chapter 4, “Parts listing, System x3200 M3 Types 7327 and 7328,” on page 133 to determine which
components are customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units
(FRU).
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a
trained service technician.
Symptom Action
The DVD-ROM drive is not 1. Make sure that:
recognized.
v The SATA channel to which the DVD drive is attached (primary or
secondary) is enabled in the Setup utility program.
v All cables and jumpers are installed correctly.
v The correct device driver is installed for the DVD drive.
2. Run the DVD drive diagnostic programs.
3. Reseat the DVD drive cable.
4. Replace the following components one at a time, in the order shown, restarting
the server each time:
a. DVD drive cable
b. DVD drive
c. (Trained service technician only) System board
A CD or DVD is not working 1. Clean the CD or DVD.
correctly.
2. Run the DVD drive diagnostic programs.
3. Reseat the DVD drive cable.
4. Reseat the following components one at a time, in the order shown, restarting
the server each time:
a. DVD drive cable
b. DVD drive
c. (Trained service technician only) System board
5. Replace the following components one at a time, in the order shown, restarting
the server each time:
a. Replace the DVD drive cable
b. Replace the DVD drive

Chapter 3. Diagnostics 57
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem
is solved.
v See Chapter 4, “Parts listing, System x3200 M3 Types 7327 and 7328,” on page 133 to determine which
components are customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units
(FRU).
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a
trained service technician.
Symptom Action
The DVD drive tray is not 1. Make sure that the server is turned on.
working.
2. Insert the end of a straightened paper clip into the manual tray-release
opening.
3. Reseat the DVD drive cable.
4. Replace the following components one at a time, in the order shown, restarting
the server each time:
a. DVD drive cable
b. DVD drive

General problems
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem
is solved.
v See Chapter 4, “Parts listing, System x3200 M3 Types 7327 and 7328,” on page 133 to determine which
components are customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units
(FRU).
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a
trained service technician.
Symptom Action
A cover lock is broken, an LED If the part is a CRU, replace it. If the part is a FRU, the part must be replaced by a
is not working, or a similar trained service technician.
problem has occurred.

Hard disk drive problems


v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem
is solved.
v See Chapter 4, “Parts listing, System x3200 M3 Types 7327 and 7328,” on page 133 to determine which
components are customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units
(FRU).
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a
trained service technician.
Symptom Action
Remove the drive that is indicated by the diagnostic tests; then, run the hard disk
Not all drives are recognized by drive diagnostic test again. If the remaining drives are recognized, replace the drive
the hard disk drive diagnostic that you removed with a new one.
test (the Fixed Disk Test).
The server stops responding Remove the hard disk drive that was being tested when the server stopped
during the hard disk drive responding, and run the diagnostic test again. If the hard disk drive diagnostic test
diagnostic test. runs successfully, replace the drive that you removed with a new one.

58 System x3200 M3 Types 7327 and 7328: Problem Determination and Service Guide
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem
is solved.
v See Chapter 4, “Parts listing, System x3200 M3 Types 7327 and 7328,” on page 133 to determine which
components are customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units
(FRU).
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a
trained service technician.
Symptom Action
A hard disk drive was not Reseat all hard disk drives and cables; then, run the hard disk drive diagnostic
detected while the operating tests again.
system was being started.
A hard disk drive passes the Run the diagnostic SCSI Attached Disk Test (see “Running the diagnostic
diagnostic Fixed Disk Test or programs” on page 74).
SCSI Attached Disk Test, but Note: This test is supported on server models with RAID arrays that use the
the problem remains. ServeRAID-BR10il v2, ServeRAID-MR10i, or ServeRAID-MR10is controllers or
servers with SATA hard disk drives that use the onboard SATA/SAS controller to
create RAID arrays. Use the Fixed Disk Test for SATA hard disk drives or servers
that have RAID arrays.

Intermittent problems
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem
is solved.
v See Chapter 4, “Parts listing, System x3200 M3 Types 7327 and 7328,” on page 133 to determine which
components are customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units
(FRU).
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a
trained service technician.
Symptom Action
A problem occurs only 1. Make sure that:
occasionally and is difficult to v All cables and cords are connected securely to the rear of the server and
diagnose. attached devices.
v When the server is turned on, air is flowing from the fan grille. If there is no
airflow, the fan is not working. This can cause the server to overheat and
shut down.
2. Check the system-error log or IMM system event log (see “Event logs” on page
24).

Chapter 3. Diagnostics 59
Keyboard, mouse, or pointing-device problems
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem
is solved.
v See Chapter 4, “Parts listing, System x3200 M3 Types 7327 and 7328,” on page 133 to determine which
components are customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units
(FRU).
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a
trained service technician.
Symptom Action
All or some keys on the 1. Make sure that:
keyboard do not work. v The keyboard cable is securely connected.
v The server and the monitor are turned on.
2. If you are using a USB keyboard and it is connected to a USB hub, disconnect
the keyboard from the hub and connect it directly to the server.
3. Replace the following components one at a time, in the order shown, restarting
the server each time:
a. Keyboard
b. (Trained service technician only) System board
The mouse or pointing device 1. Make sure that:
does not work.
v The mouse or pointing-device cable is securely connected to the server.
v The mouse or pointing-device drivers are installed correctly.
v The server and the monitor are turned on.
v The mouse option is enabled in the Setup utility program.
2. If you are using a USB mouse or pointing device and it is connected to a USB
hub, disconnect the mouse or pointing device from the hub and connect it
directly to the server.
3. Replace the following components one at a time, in the order shown, restarting
the server each time:
a. Mouse or pointing device
b. (Trained service technician only) System board

60 System x3200 M3 Types 7327 and 7328: Problem Determination and Service Guide
Memory problems
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem
is solved.
v See Chapter 4, “Parts listing, System x3200 M3 Types 7327 and 7328,” on page 133 to determine which
components are customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units
(FRU).
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a
trained service technician.
Symptom Action
The amount of system memory 1. Make sure that:
that is displayed is less than the
v No error LEDs are lit on the control-panel assembly or on the system board.
amount of installed physical
memory. v Memory mirroring does not account for the discrepancy.
v The memory modules are seated correctly.
v You have installed the correct type of memory.
v All DIMMs are enabled. The server might have automatically disabled a
DIMM when it detected a problem.
2. Check the POST error log for error message 289:
v If a DIMM was disabled by a system-management interrupt (SMI), replace
the DIMM.
3. Run memory diagnostics (see “Running the diagnostic programs” on page 74).
4. Make sure that there is no memory mismatch when the server is over the
minimum memory configuration (one 1 GB DIMM) and that you have installed
the correct number of DIMMs.
5. Reseat the DIMMs.
6. Replace the following components one at a time, in the order shown, restarting
the server each time:
a. DIMMs
b. (Trained service technician only) System board
Multiple rows of DIMMs in a 1. Reseat the DIMMs; then, restart the server.
branch are identified as failing.
2. Replace the lowest-numbered DIMM pair of those that are identified; then,
restart the server. Repeat as necessary.
3. (Trained service technician only) Replace the system board.

Chapter 3. Diagnostics 61
Microprocessor problems
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem
is solved.
v See Chapter 4, “Parts listing, System x3200 M3 Types 7327 and 7328,” on page 133 to determine which
components are customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units
(FRU).
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a
trained service technician.
Symptom Action
A microprocessor LED is lit 1. Make sure that the server supports the microprocessor.
during POST, indicating that the
2. (Trained service technician only) Make sure that the microprocessor is seated
startup (boot) microprocessor is
correctly.
not working correctly.
3. (Trained service technician only) Reseat the Microprocessor.
4. Replace the following components one at a time, in the order shown, restarting
the server each time:
a. (Trained service technician only) Microprocessor
b. (Trained service technician only) System board

Monitor or video problems


Some IBM monitors have their own self-tests. If you suspect a problem with your
monitor, see the documentation that comes with the monitor for instructions for
testing and adjusting the monitor. If you cannot diagnose the problem, call for
service.

v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem
is solved.
v See Chapter 4, “Parts listing, System x3200 M3 Types 7327 and 7328,” on page 133 to determine which
components are customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units
(FRU).
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a
trained service technician.
Symptom Action
Testing the monitor 1. Make sure that the monitor cables are firmly connected.
2. Try using a different monitor on the server, or try using the monitor that is being
tested on a different server.
3. Run the diagnostic programs. If the monitor passes the diagnostic programs,
the problem might be a video device driver.
4. Replace the following components one at a time, in the order shown, restarting
the server each time:
a. (Trained service technician only) System board

62 System x3200 M3 Types 7327 and 7328: Problem Determination and Service Guide
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem
is solved.
v See Chapter 4, “Parts listing, System x3200 M3 Types 7327 and 7328,” on page 133 to determine which
components are customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units
(FRU).
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a
trained service technician.
Symptom Action
The screen is blank. 1. Make sure that:
v The server is turned on. If there is no power to the server, see “Power
problems” on page 65.
v The monitor cables are connected correctly.
v The monitor is turned on and the brightness and contrast controls are
adjusted correctly.
2. Make sure that the correct server is controlling the monitor, if applicable.
3. Make sure that damaged server firmware is not affecting the video; see
“Recovering the server firmware” on page 124.
4. See “Solving undetermined problems” on page 130.
The monitor works when you 1. Make sure that:
turn on the server, but the
v The application program is not setting a display mode that is higher than the
screen goes blank when you
capability of the monitor.
start some application
programs. v You installed the necessary device drivers for the application.
2. Run video diagnostics (see “Running the diagnostic programs” on page 74).
v If the server passes the video diagnostics, the video is good; see “Solving
undetermined problems” on page 130.
v (Trained service technician only) If the server fails the video diagnostics,
replace the system board.
The monitor has screen jitter, or 1. If the monitor self-tests show the monitor is working correctly, consider the
the screen image is wavy, location of the monitor. Magnetic fields around other devices (such as
unreadable, rolling, or distorted. transformers, appliances, fluorescent lights, and other monitors) can cause
screen jitter or wavy, unreadable, rolling, or distorted screen images. If this
happens, turn off the monitor.
Attention: Moving a color monitor while it is turned on might cause screen
discoloration.
Move the device and the monitor at least 305 mm (12 in.) apart, and turn on
the monitor.
Notes:
a. To prevent diskette drive read/write errors, make sure that the distance
between the monitor and any external diskette drive is at least 76 mm (3
in.).
b. Non-IBM monitor cables might cause unpredictable problems.
2. Reseat the following components:
a. Monitor cable
3. Replace the following components one at a time, in the order shown, restarting
the server each time:
a. Monitor
b. (Trained service technician only) System board

Chapter 3. Diagnostics 63
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem
is solved.
v See Chapter 4, “Parts listing, System x3200 M3 Types 7327 and 7328,” on page 133 to determine which
components are customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units
(FRU).
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a
trained service technician.
Symptom Action
Wrong characters appear on the 1. If the wrong language is displayed, update the server firmware with the correct
screen. language (see “Updating the firmware” on page 221).
2. Reseat the monitor cable.
3. Replace the following components one at a time, in the order shown, restarting
the server each time:
a. Monitor
b. (Trained service technician only) System board

Optional-device problems
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem
is solved.
v See Chapter 4, “Parts listing, System x3200 M3 Types 7327 and 7328,” on page 133 to determine which
components are customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units
(FRU).
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a
trained service technician.
Symptom Action
An IBM optional device that was 1. Make sure that:
just installed does not work. v The device is designed for the server (see http://www.ibm.com/servers/
eserver/serverproven/compat/us/).
v You followed the installation instructions that came with the device and the
device is installed correctly.
v You have not loosened any other installed devices or cables.
v You updated the configuration information in the Setup utility program.
Whenever memory or any other device is changed, you must update the
configuration.
2. Reseat the device that you just installed.
3. Replace the device that you just installed.
An IBM optional device that 1. Make sure that all of the hardware and cable connections for the device are
used to work does not work secure.
now.
2. If the device comes with test instructions, use those instructions to test the
device.
3. Reseat the failing device.
4. Replace the failing device.

64 System x3200 M3 Types 7327 and 7328: Problem Determination and Service Guide
Power problems
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem
is solved.
v See Chapter 4, “Parts listing, System x3200 M3 Types 7327 and 7328,” on page 133 to determine which
components are customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units
(FRU).
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a
trained service technician.
Symptom Action
The power-control button does 1. Make sure that the control-panel assembly power-control button is working
not work (the server does not correctly:
start).
a. Disconnect the server power cords.
Note: The power-control button
will not function until 1 to 3 b. Reconnect the power cords.
minutes after the server has c. Press the power-control button. If the server does not start, check the
been connected to ac power. power-control button for damage.
2. Make sure that:
v The power cords are correctly connected to the server and to a working
electrical outlet.
v The power LEDs (AC, DC) are lit correctly.
v The server power-on LED on the front information panel is flashing after AC
power cord is connected and that it stays on after the power-button is
pressed.
v The server contains the correct type of DIMMs.
v The DIMMs are correctly seated.
v A POST beep code did not sound, indicating a memory initialization error.
v The LEDs on the power supply do not indicate a problem.
v The microprocessor is correctly installed.
3. Reseat the following components:
a. DIMMs
b. Power-supply cables to all internal components
4. Replace the following components one at a time, in the order shown, restarting
the server each time:
a. DIMMs
b. (Trained service technician only) Power supply
5. If you just installed an optional device, remove it, and restart the server. If the
server now starts, you might have installed more devices than the power supply
supports.
6. See “Solving undetermined problems” on page 130.
The server does not turn off. 1. Determine whether you are using an Advanced Configuration and Power
Interface (ACPI) or a non-ACPI operating system. If you are using a non-ACPI
operating system, complete the following steps:
a. Press Ctrl+Alt+Delete.
b. Turn off the server by holding the power-control button for 5 seconds.
c. Restart the server.
d. If the server fails POST and the power-control button does not work,
disconnect the ac power cord for 20 seconds; then, reconnect the ac power
cord and restart the server.
2. (Trained service technician only) If the problem remains or if you are using an
ACPI-aware operating system, suspect the system board.

Chapter 3. Diagnostics 65
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem
is solved.
v See Chapter 4, “Parts listing, System x3200 M3 Types 7327 and 7328,” on page 133 to determine which
components are customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units
(FRU).
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a
trained service technician.
Symptom Action
The server unexpectedly shuts See “Solving undetermined problems” on page 130.
down, and the LEDs on the
control-panel assembly are not
lit.

Serial port problems


v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem
is solved.
v See Chapter 4, “Parts listing, System x3200 M3 Types 7327 and 7328,” on page 133 to determine which
components are customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units
(FRU).
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a
trained service technician.
Symptom Action
The number of serial ports that 1. Make sure that:
are identified by the operating v Each port is assigned a unique address in the Setup utility program and
system is less than the number none of the serial ports is disabled.
of installed serial ports. v The serial port adapter (if one is present) is seated correctly.
2. Reseat the serial port adapter.
3. Replace the serial port adapter.
A serial device does not work. 1. Make sure that:
v The device is compatible with the server.
v The serial port is enabled and is assigned a unique address.
v The device is connected to the correct connector (see “Internal connectors,
LEDs, and switches” on page 16).
2. Reseat the following components:
a. Failing serial device
b. Serial cable
3. Replace the following components one at a time, in the order shown, restarting
the server each time:
a. Failing serial device
b. Serial cable
c. (Trained service technician only) System board

66 System x3200 M3 Types 7327 and 7328: Problem Determination and Service Guide
ServerGuide problems
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem
is solved.
v See Chapter 4, “Parts listing, System x3200 M3 Types 7327 and 7328,” on page 133 to determine which
components are customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units
(FRU).
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a
trained service technician.
Symptom Action
The ServerGuide Setup and v Make sure that the server supports the ServerGuide program and has a
Installation CD will not start. startable (bootable) CD or DVD drive.
v If the startup (boot) sequence settings have been changed, make sure that the
CD or DVD drive is first in the startup sequence.
v If more than one CD or DVD drive is installed, make sure that only one drive is
set as the primary drive. Start the CD from the primary drive.
The ServeRAID program cannot v Make sure that there are no duplicate IRQ assignments.
view all installed drives, or the v Make sure that the hard disk drive is connected correctly.
operating system cannot be
installed.
The operating-system Make more space available on the hard disk.
installation program
continuously loops.
The ServerGuide program will Make sure that the operating-system CD is supported by the ServerGuide program.
not start the operating-system See the ServerGuide Setup and Installation CD label for a list of supported
CD. operating-system versions.
The operating system cannot be Make sure that the operating system is supported on the server. If the operating
installed; the option is not system is supported, no logical drive is defined (RAID servers). Run the
available. ServerGuide program and make sure that setup is complete.

Software problems
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem
is solved.
v See Chapter 4, “Parts listing, System x3200 M3 Types 7327 and 7328,” on page 133 to determine which
components are customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units
(FRU).
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a
trained service technician.
Symptom Action
You suspect a software 1. To determine whether the problem is caused by the software, make sure that:
problem. v The server has the minimum memory that is needed to use the software. For
memory requirements, see the information that comes with the software. If
you have just installed an adapter or memory, the server might have a
memory-address conflict.
v The software is designed to operate on the server.
v Other software works on the server.
v The software works on another server.
2. If you receive any error messages when using the software, see the information
that comes with the software for a description of the messages and suggested
solutions to the problem.
3. Contact your place of purchase of the software.

Chapter 3. Diagnostics 67
Universal Serial Bus (USB) port problems
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem
is solved.
v See Chapter 4, “Parts listing, System x3200 M3 Types 7327 and 7328,” on page 133 to determine which
components are customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units
(FRU).
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a
trained service technician.
Symptom Action
A USB device does not work. 1. Run USB diagnostics (see “Running the diagnostic programs” on page 74).
2. Make sure that:
v The correct USB device driver is installed.
v The operating system supports USB devices.
3. Make sure that the USB configuration options are set correctly in the Setup
utility program.
4. If you are using a USB hub, disconnect the USB device from the hub and
connect it directly to the server.

68 System x3200 M3 Types 7327 and 7328: Problem Determination and Service Guide
Error LEDs
The following is an illustration of the system board LEDs. The system board has
error LEDs that will help to locate the source of the error. Run the diagnostic
programs to find out the cause of the error (see “Running the diagnostic programs”
on page 74).

The server is designed so that LEDs remain lit when the server is connected to an
ac power source but is not turned on, provided that the power supply is operating
correctly. This feature helps you to isolate the problem when the operating system
is shut down.

Many errors are first indicated by a lit system-error LED on the control-panel
assembly of the server. If this LED is lit, one or more LEDs elsewhere in the server
might also be lit and can direct you to the source of the error.

Before working inside the server to view the LEDs, read the safety information that
begins on page vii and “Handling static-sensitive devices” on page 144.

If an error occurs, view the server LEDs in the following order:


1. Check the control-panel assembly on the front of the server. If the system-error
LED is lit, it indicates that an error has occurred.
2. Check the front and rear of the server to determine whether any component
LEDs are lit.
3. Remove the server cover and look inside the server for lit LEDs. Certain
components inside the server have LEDs that will be lit to indicate the location
of a problem. For example, a DIMM error will light the LED next to the failing
DIMM on the system board.
Look at the system service label inside the side cover of the server, which gives
an overview of internal components. This information can often provide enough
information to correct the error.

The following table describes the LEDs on the system board and PCI extender
cards and suggested actions to correct the detected problems.

v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem
is solved.
v See Chapter 4, “Parts listing, System x3200 M3 Types 7327 and 7328,” on page 133 to determine which
components are customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units
(FRU).
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a
trained service technician.
Component LED Description Action
DIMM error LEDs A memory DIMM has failed or is 1. Remove the DIMM that has the lit error LED.
incorrectly installed.
2. Reseat the DIMM.
3. Replace the following components one at a time,
in the order shown, restarting the server each time:
a. DIMM
b. (Trained service technician only) System board
Fan error LEDs A fan has failed, is operating too 1. Reseat the failing fan, which is indicated by a lit
slowly, or has been removed. LED near the fan connector on the system board.
2. Replace the failing fan.

Chapter 3. Diagnostics 69
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem
is solved.
v See Chapter 4, “Parts listing, System x3200 M3 Types 7327 and 7328,” on page 133 to determine which
components are customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units
(FRU).
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a
trained service technician.
Component LED Description Action
CPU error LED Microprocessor has failed, is 1. Check the system-event log to determine the
missing, or has been incorrectly reason for the lit LED.
installed.
2. (Trained service technician) Reseat the failing
Note: (Trained service technician
microprocessor
only) Make sure that the
microprocessor is installed in the 3. Replace the following components one at a time,
correct sequence; see “Installing a in the order shown, restarting the server each time:
microprocessor and fan sink” on a. (Trained service technician only) Failing
page 211. microprocessor
b. (Trained service technician only) System board
System-board error System-board CPU VRD and/or (Trained service technician only) Replace the system
LED power voltage regulators have board.
failed.
Battery failure LED Battery low. 1. Replace the CMOS lithium battery, if necessary.
2. (Trained service technician only) Replace the
system board.
IMM heartbeat LED Indicates the status of the boot If the LED does not begin flashing within 30 seconds
process of the IMM. of when the server is connected to power, complete
the following steps:
When the server is connected to
1. (Trained service technician only) Use the IMM
power this LED flashes quickly to
recovery switch (on the SW6 switch block) to
indicate that the IMM code is
recover the firmware.
loading. When the loading is
complete, the LED stops flashing 2. (Trained service technician only) Replace the
briefly and then flashes slowly to system board.
indicate that the IMM if fully
operational and you can press the
power-control button to start the
server.
PCI slots error LEDs An error has occurred on a PCI bus 1. Check the system-event log for information about
or on the system board. An the error.
additional LED is lit next to a failing
2. If you cannot isolate the failing adapter through the
PCI slot.
LEDs and the information in the system-event log,
remove one adapter at a time, and restart the
server after each adapter is removed.
3. If the failure remains, go to http://www.ibm.com/
systems/support/supportsite.wss/
docdisplay?brandind=5000008&lndocid=SERV-
CALL for additional troubleshooting information.
H8 heartbeat LED power-on and power-off sequencing. 1. If the LED blinks at 1Hz, it is functioning properly
and no action is necessary.
2. If the LED is not blinking, (trained service
technician only) replace the system board.

70 System x3200 M3 Types 7327 and 7328: Problem Determination and Service Guide
Power-supply LEDs
The following minimum configuration is required for the server to start:
v One microprocessor
v One 1 GB DIMM
v Power supply
v Power cord
v ServeRAID SAS/SATA adapter
v System board assembly

The following illustration shows the location of the power supply LEDs:
AC power LED
DC power LED
Fault LED

Fault LED

Power LED

The following table describes the problems that are indicated by various
combinations of the power-supply LEDs and the power-on LED on the front
information panel and suggested actions to correct the detected problems.

Chapter 3. Diagnostics 71
Table 4. Power-supply LEDs
Power-supply LEDs
AC DC Error Description Action Notes
Off Off Off No ac power to 1. Check the ac power to the server. This is a normal
the server or a condition when no
2. Make sure that the power cord is
problem with the ac power is present.
connected to a functioning power
ac power source
source.
3. Turn the server off and then turn the
server back on.
4. If the problem remains, replace the
power supply.
Off Off On No ac power to 1. Replace the power supply. This happens only
the server or a when a second
2. Make sure that the power cord is
problem with the power supply is
connected to a functioning power
ac power source providing power to
source.
and the power the server.
supply had
detected an
internal problem
Off On Off Faulty power Replace the power supply.
supply
Off On On Faulty power Replace the power supply.
supply
On Off Off Power supply not 1. Reseat the power supply. Typically indicates
fully seated, that a power supply
2. If the system board error (fault) LED is
faulty system is not fully seated.
not lit, replace the power supply.
board, or faulty
power supply 3. If the system board error (fault) LED is
lit, (Trained service technician only)
replace the system board.
On Off or On Faulty power Replace the power supply.
Flashing supply
On On Off Normal operation
On On On Power supply is Replace the power supply.
faulty but still
operational

72 System x3200 M3 Types 7327 and 7328: Problem Determination and Service Guide
Diagnostic programs and messages
The diagnostic programs are the primary method of testing the major components
of the server. As you run the diagnostic programs, text messages are displayed on
the screen and are saved in the test log. A diagnostic text message indicates that a
problem has been detected and provides the action you should take as a result of
the text message.

Make sure that the server has the latest version of the diagnostic programs. To
download the latest version, complete the following steps.

Note: Changes are made periodically to the IBM Web site. The actual procedure
might vary slightly from what is described in this document.
1. Go to http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/.
2. Under Product support, click System x.
3. Under Popular links, click Software and device drivers.
4. Click IBM System x3200 M3 to display the matrix of downloadable files for the
server.

Utilities are available to reset and update the diagnostics code on the integrated
USB flash device, if the diagnostic partition becomes damaged and does not start
the diagnostic programs. For more information and to download the utilities, go to
http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/supportsite.wss/docdisplay?lndocid=MIGR-
5072294&brandind=5000008.

The DSA diagnostic programs collect information about the following aspects of the
system:
v System configuration
v Network interfaces and settings
v Hardware inventory, including PCI and USB information
v Drive health information
v SAS/SATA RAID and controller configuration
v Event logs for ServeRAID controllers and service processors

The DSA diagnostic programs can also provide diagnostics for the following system
components, if they are installed in the system:
v Intel Dual Gigabit Ethernet
v Optical drives
v Hard disk drives
v SAS/SATA RAID controller
v Integrated management module (IMM)
v Trusted Platform Module chip
v Memory
v Microprocessor

For additional information about tools for updating, managing, and deploying
firmware, see the System x and BladeCenter Tools Center at http://
publib.boulder.ibm.com/infocenter/toolsctr/v1r0/index.jsp.

Chapter 3. Diagnostics 73
Running the diagnostic programs
To run the DSA Preboot diagnostic programs, complete the following steps:
1. If the server is running, turn off the server and all attached devices.
2. Turn on all attached devices; then, turn on the server.
3. When the prompt <F2> Diagnostics is displayed, press F2.

Note: The DSA Preboot diagnostic program might appear to be unresponsive


for an unusual length of time when you start the program. This is normal
operation while the program loads.
4. Optionally, select Quit to DSA to exit from the stand-alone memory diagnostic
program.

Note: After you exit from the stand-alone memory diagnostic environment, you
must restart the server to access the stand-alone memory diagnostic
environment again.
5. Select gui to display the graphical user interface, or select cmd to display the
DSA interactive menu.
6. Follow the instructions on the screen to select the diagnostic test to run.

If the diagnostic programs do not detect any hardware errors but the problem
remains during normal server operations, a software error might be the cause. If
you suspect a software problem, see the information that comes with your software.

A single problem might cause more than one error message. When this happens,
correct the cause of the first error message. The other error messages usually will
not occur the next time you run the diagnostic programs.

Exception: If multiple error codes or LEDs indicate a microprocessor error, the


error might be in a microprocessor or in a microprocessor socket. See
“Microprocessor problems” on page 62 for information about diagnosing
microprocessor problems.

If the server stops during testing and you cannot continue, restart the server and try
to run the diagnostic programs again. If the problem remains, replace the
component that was being tested when the server stopped.

Diagnostic text messages


Diagnostic text messages are displayed while the tests are running. A diagnostic
text message contains one of the following results:

Passed: The test was completed without any errors.

Failed: The test detected an error.

Aborted: The test could not proceed because of the server configuration.

Viewing the test log


To view the test log when the tests are completed, type the view command in the
DSA interactive menu, or select Diagnostic Event Log in the graphical user
interface. To transfer DSA Preboot collections to an external USB device, type the
copy command in the DSA interactive menu.

74 System x3200 M3 Types 7327 and 7328: Problem Determination and Service Guide
Diagnostic messages
The following table describes the messages that the diagnostic programs might
generate and suggested actions to correct the detected problems. Follow the
suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the action column.
Table 5. DSA Preboot messages
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is solved.
v See Chapter 4, “Parts listing, System x3200 M3 Types 7327 and 7328,” on page 133 to determine which components are
customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a Trained
service technician.
v Go to the IBM support Web site at http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/ to check for technical information, hints, tips,
and new device drivers or to submit a request for information.
Message
number Component Test State Description Action
089-801-xxx CPU CPU Stress Test Aborted Internal program 1. Turn off and restart the system.
error.
2. Make sure that the DSA code is at
the latest level. For the latest level of
DSA code, go to
http://www.ibm.com/support/
docview.wss?uid=psg1SERV-DSA.
3. Run the test again.
4. Make sure that the system firmware is
at the latest level. The installed
firmware level is shown in the DSA
event log in the Firmware/VPD
section for this component. For more
information, see “Updating the
firmware” on page 221.
5. Run the test again.
6. Turn off and restart the system if
necessary to recover from a hung
state.
7. Run the test again.
8. Replace the following components
one at a time, in the order shown,
and run this test again to determine
whether the problem has been
solved:
a. (Trained service technician only)
Microprocessor board
b. (Trained service technician only)
Microprocessor
9. If the failure remains, go to the IBM
Web site for more troubleshooting
information at http://www.ibm.com/
systems/support/supportsite.wss/
docdisplay?brandind=5000008
&lndocid=SERV-CALL.

Chapter 3. Diagnostics 75
Table 5. DSA Preboot messages (continued)
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is solved.
v See Chapter 4, “Parts listing, System x3200 M3 Types 7327 and 7328,” on page 133 to determine which components are
customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a Trained
service technician.
v Go to the IBM support Web site at http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/ to check for technical information, hints, tips,
and new device drivers or to submit a request for information.
Message
number Component Test State Description Action
089-802-xxx CPU CPU Stress Test Aborted System resource 1. Turn off and restart the system.
availability error.
2. Make sure that the DSA code is at
the latest level. For the latest level of
DSA code, go to
http://www.ibm.com/support/
docview.wss?uid=psg1SERV-DSA.
3. Run the test again.
4. Make sure that the system firmware is
at the latest level. The installed
firmware level is shown in the DSA
event log in the Firmware/VPD
section for this component. For the
latest level of firmware, go to
http://www.ibm.com/support/
docview.wss?uid=psg1 MIGR-4JTS2T
and select your system to display a
matrix of available firmware.
5. Run the test again.
6. Turn off and restart the system if
necessary to recover from a hung
state.
7. Run the test again.
8. Make sure that the system firmware is
at the latest level. The installed
firmware level is shown in the DSA
event log in the Firmware/VPD
section for this component. For more
information, see “Updating the
firmware” on page 221.
9. Run the test again.
089-802-xxx CPU CPU Stress Test Aborted System resource 1. Replace the following components
availability error. one at a time, in the order shown,
and run this test again to determine
whether the problem has been
solved:
a. (Trained service technician only)
Microprocessor board
b. (Trained service technician only)
Microprocessor
2. If the failure remains, go to the IBM
Web site for more troubleshooting
information at http://www.ibm.com/
systems/support/supportsite.wss/
docdisplay?brandind=5000008
&lndocid=SERV-CALL.

76 System x3200 M3 Types 7327 and 7328: Problem Determination and Service Guide
Table 5. DSA Preboot messages (continued)
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is solved.
v See Chapter 4, “Parts listing, System x3200 M3 Types 7327 and 7328,” on page 133 to determine which components are
customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a Trained
service technician.
v Go to the IBM support Web site at http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/ to check for technical information, hints, tips,
and new device drivers or to submit a request for information.
Message
number Component Test State Description Action
089-901-xxx CPU CPU Stress Test Failed Test failure. 1. Turn off and restart the system if
necessary to recover from a hung
state.
2. Make sure that the DSA code is at
the latest level. For the latest level of
DSA code, go to
http://www.ibm.com/support/
docview.wss?uid=psg1SERV-DSA.
3. Run the test again.
4. Make sure that the system firmware is
at the latest level. The installed
firmware level is shown in the DSA
event log in the Firmware/VPD
section for this component. For more
information, see “Updating the
firmware” on page 221.
5. Run the test again.
6. Turn off and restart the system if
necessary to recover from a hung
state.
7. Run the test again.
8. Replace the following components
one at a time, in the order shown,
and run this test again to determine
whether the problem has been
solved:
a. (Trained service technician only)
Microprocessor board
b. (Trained service technician only)
Microprocessor
9. If the failure remains, go to the IBM
Web site for more troubleshooting
information at http://www.ibm.com/
systems/support/supportsite.wss/
docdisplay?brandind=5000008
&lndocid=SERV-CALL.

Chapter 3. Diagnostics 77
Table 5. DSA Preboot messages (continued)
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is solved.
v See Chapter 4, “Parts listing, System x3200 M3 Types 7327 and 7328,” on page 133 to determine which components are
customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a Trained
service technician.
v Go to the IBM support Web site at http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/ to check for technical information, hints, tips,
and new device drivers or to submit a request for information.
Message
number Component Test State Description Action
166-801-xxx IMM IMM I2C Test Aborted IMM I2C test 1. Turn off the system and disconnect it
stopped: the IMM from the power source. You must
returned an disconnect the system from ac power
incorrect response to reset the IMM.
length.
2. After 45 seconds, reconnect the
system to the power source and turn
on the system.
3. Run the test again.
4. Make sure that the DSA code is at
the latest level. For the latest level of
DSA code, go to
http://www.ibm.com/support/
docview.wss?uid=psg1SERV-DSA.
5. Make sure that the IMM firmware is at
the latest level. The installed firmware
level is shown in the DSA event log in
the Firmware/VPD section for this
component. For more information, see
“Updating the firmware” on page 221.
6. Run the test again.
7. If the failure remains, go to the IBM
Web site for more troubleshooting
information at http://www.ibm.com/
systems/support/supportsite.wss/
docdisplay?brandind=5000008
&lndocid=SERV-CALL.

78 System x3200 M3 Types 7327 and 7328: Problem Determination and Service Guide
Table 5. DSA Preboot messages (continued)
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is solved.
v See Chapter 4, “Parts listing, System x3200 M3 Types 7327 and 7328,” on page 133 to determine which components are
customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a Trained
service technician.
v Go to the IBM support Web site at http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/ to check for technical information, hints, tips,
and new device drivers or to submit a request for information.
Message
number Component Test State Description Action
166-802-xxx IMM IMM I2C Test Aborted IMM I2C test 1. Turn off the system and disconnect it
stopped: the test from the power source. You must
cannot be disconnect the system from ac power
completed for an to reset the IMM.
unknown reason.
2. After 45 seconds, reconnect the
system to the power source and turn
on the system.
3. Run the test again.
4. Make sure that the DSA code is at
the latest level. For the latest level of
DSA code, go to
http://www.ibm.com/support/
docview.wss?uid=psg1SERV-DSA.
5. Make sure that the IMM firmware is at
the latest level. The installed firmware
level is shown in the DSA event log in
the Firmware/VPD section for this
component. For more information, see
“Updating the firmware” on page 221.
6. Run the test again.
7. If the failure remains, go to the IBM
Web site for more troubleshooting
information at http://www.ibm.com/
systems/support/supportsite.wss/
docdisplay?brandind=5000008
&lndocid=SERV-CALL.

Chapter 3. Diagnostics 79
Table 5. DSA Preboot messages (continued)
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is solved.
v See Chapter 4, “Parts listing, System x3200 M3 Types 7327 and 7328,” on page 133 to determine which components are
customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a Trained
service technician.
v Go to the IBM support Web site at http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/ to check for technical information, hints, tips,
and new device drivers or to submit a request for information.
Message
number Component Test State Description Action
166-803-xxx IMM IMM I2C Test Aborted IMM I2C test 1. Turn off the system and disconnect it
stopped: the node from the power source. You must
is busy; try later. disconnect the system from ac power
to reset the IMM.
2. After 45 seconds, reconnect the
system to the power source and turn
on the system.
3. Run the test again.
4. Make sure that the DSA code is at
the latest level. For the latest level of
DSA code, go to
http://www.ibm.com/support/
docview.wss?uid=psg1SERV-DSA.
5. Make sure that the IMM firmware is at
the latest level. The installed firmware
level is shown in the DSA event log in
the Firmware/VPD section for this
component. For more information, see
“Updating the firmware” on page 221.
6. Run the test again.
7. If the failure remains, go to the IBM
Web site for more troubleshooting
information at http://www.ibm.com/
systems/support/supportsite.wss/
docdisplay?brandind=5000008
&lndocid=SERV-CALL.

80 System x3200 M3 Types 7327 and 7328: Problem Determination and Service Guide
Table 5. DSA Preboot messages (continued)
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is solved.
v See Chapter 4, “Parts listing, System x3200 M3 Types 7327 and 7328,” on page 133 to determine which components are
customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a Trained
service technician.
v Go to the IBM support Web site at http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/ to check for technical information, hints, tips,
and new device drivers or to submit a request for information.
Message
number Component Test State Description Action
166-804-xxx IMM IMM I2C Test Aborted IMM I2C test 1. Turn off the system and disconnect it
stopped: invalid from the power source. You must
command. disconnect the system from ac power
to reset the IMM.
2. After 45 seconds, reconnect the
system to the power source and turn
on the system.
3. Run the test again.
4. Make sure that the DSA code is at
the latest level. For the latest level of
DSA code, go to
http://www.ibm.com/support/
docview.wss?uid=psg1SERV-DSA.
5. Make sure that the IMM firmware is at
the latest level. The installed firmware
level is shown in the DSA event log in
the Firmware/VPD section for this
component. For more information, see
“Updating the firmware” on page 221.
6. Run the test again.
7. If the failure remains, go to the IBM
Web site for more troubleshooting
information at http://www.ibm.com/
systems/support/supportsite.wss/
docdisplay?brandind=5000008
&lndocid=SERV-CALL.

Chapter 3. Diagnostics 81
Table 5. DSA Preboot messages (continued)
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is solved.
v See Chapter 4, “Parts listing, System x3200 M3 Types 7327 and 7328,” on page 133 to determine which components are
customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a Trained
service technician.
v Go to the IBM support Web site at http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/ to check for technical information, hints, tips,
and new device drivers or to submit a request for information.
Message
number Component Test State Description Action
166-805-xxx IMM IMM I2C Test Aborted IMM I2C test 1. Turn off the system and disconnect it
stopped: invalid from the power source. You must
command for the disconnect the system from ac power
given LUN. to reset the IMM.
2. After 45 seconds, reconnect the
system to the power source and turn
on the system.
3. Run the test again.
4. Make sure that the DSA code is at
the latest level. For the latest level of
DSA code, go to
http://www.ibm.com/support/
docview.wss?uid=psg1SERV-DSA.
5. Make sure that the IMM firmware is at
the latest level. The installed firmware
level is shown in the DSA event log in
the Firmware/VPD section for this
component. For more information, see
“Updating the firmware” on page 221.
6. Run the test again.
7. If the failure remains, go to the IBM
Web site for more troubleshooting
information at http://www.ibm.com/
systems/support/supportsite.wss/
docdisplay?brandind=5000008
&lndocid=SERV-CALL.

82 System x3200 M3 Types 7327 and 7328: Problem Determination and Service Guide
Table 5. DSA Preboot messages (continued)
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is solved.
v See Chapter 4, “Parts listing, System x3200 M3 Types 7327 and 7328,” on page 133 to determine which components are
customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a Trained
service technician.
v Go to the IBM support Web site at http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/ to check for technical information, hints, tips,
and new device drivers or to submit a request for information.
Message
number Component Test State Description Action
166-806-xxx IMM IMM I2C Test Aborted IMM I2C test 1. Turn off the system and disconnect it
stopped: timeout from the power source. You must
while processing disconnect the system from ac power
the command. to reset the IMM.
2. After 45 seconds, reconnect the
system to the power source and turn
on the system.
3. Run the test again.
4. Make sure that the DSA code is at
the latest level. For the latest level of
DSA code, go to
http://www.ibm.com/support/
docview.wss?uid=psg1SERV-DSA.
5. Make sure that the IMM firmware is at
the latest level. The installed firmware
level is shown in the DSA event log in
the Firmware/VPD section for this
component. For more information, see
“Updating the firmware” on page 221.
6. Run the test again.
7. If the failure remains, go to the IBM
Web site for more troubleshooting
information at http://www.ibm.com/
systems/support/supportsite.wss/
docdisplay?brandind=5000008
&lndocid=SERV-CALL.

Chapter 3. Diagnostics 83
Table 5. DSA Preboot messages (continued)
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is solved.
v See Chapter 4, “Parts listing, System x3200 M3 Types 7327 and 7328,” on page 133 to determine which components are
customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a Trained
service technician.
v Go to the IBM support Web site at http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/ to check for technical information, hints, tips,
and new device drivers or to submit a request for information.
Message
number Component Test State Description Action
166-807-xxx IMM IMM I2C Test Aborted IMM I2C test 1. Turn off the system and disconnect it
stopped: out of from the power source. You must
space. disconnect the system from ac power
to reset the IMM.
2. After 45 seconds, reconnect the
system to the power source and turn
on the system.
3. Run the test again.
4. Make sure that the DSA code is at
the latest level. For the latest level of
DSA code, go to
http://www.ibm.com/support/
docview.wss?uid=psg1SERV-DSA.
5. Make sure that the IMM firmware is at
the latest level. The installed firmware
level is shown in the DSA event log in
the Firmware/VPD section for this
component. For more information, see
“Updating the firmware” on page 221.
6. Run the test again.
7. If the failure remains, go to the IBM
Web site for more troubleshooting
information at http://www.ibm.com/
systems/support/supportsite.wss/
docdisplay?brandind=5000008
&lndocid=SERV-CALL.

84 System x3200 M3 Types 7327 and 7328: Problem Determination and Service Guide
Table 5. DSA Preboot messages (continued)
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is solved.
v See Chapter 4, “Parts listing, System x3200 M3 Types 7327 and 7328,” on page 133 to determine which components are
customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a Trained
service technician.
v Go to the IBM support Web site at http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/ to check for technical information, hints, tips,
and new device drivers or to submit a request for information.
Message
number Component Test State Description Action
166-808-xxx IMM IMM I2C Test Aborted IMM I2C test 1. Turn off the system and disconnect it
stopped: from the power source. You must
reservation disconnect the system from ac power
canceled or invalid to reset the IMM.
reservation ID.
2. After 45 seconds, reconnect the
system to the power source and turn
on the system.
3. Run the test again.
4. Make sure that the DSA code is at
the latest level. For the latest level of
DSA code, go to
http://www.ibm.com/support/
docview.wss?uid=psg1SERV-DSA.
5. Make sure that the IMM firmware is at
the latest level. The installed firmware
level is shown in the DSA event log in
the Firmware/VPD section for this
component. For more information, see
“Updating the firmware” on page 221.
6. Run the test again.
7. If the failure remains, go to the IBM
Web site for more troubleshooting
information at http://www.ibm.com/
systems/support/supportsite.wss/
docdisplay?brandind=5000008
&lndocid=SERV-CALL.

Chapter 3. Diagnostics 85
Table 5. DSA Preboot messages (continued)
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is solved.
v See Chapter 4, “Parts listing, System x3200 M3 Types 7327 and 7328,” on page 133 to determine which components are
customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a Trained
service technician.
v Go to the IBM support Web site at http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/ to check for technical information, hints, tips,
and new device drivers or to submit a request for information.
Message
number Component Test State Description Action
166-809-xxx IMM IMM I2C Test Aborted IMM I2C test 1. Turn off the system and disconnect it
stopped: request from the power source. You must
data was truncated. disconnect the system from ac power
to reset the IMM.
2. After 45 seconds, reconnect the
system to the power source and turn
on the system.
3. Run the test again.
4. Make sure that the DSA code is at
the latest level. For the latest level of
DSA code, go to
http://www.ibm.com/support/
docview.wss?uid=psg1SERV-DSA.
5. Make sure that the IMM firmware is at
the latest level. The installed firmware
level is shown in the DSA event log in
the Firmware/VPD section for this
component. For more information, see
“Updating the firmware” on page 221.
6. Run the test again.
7. If the failure remains, go to the IBM
Web site for more troubleshooting
information at http://www.ibm.com/
systems/support/supportsite.wss/
docdisplay?brandind=5000008
&lndocid=SERV-CALL.

86 System x3200 M3 Types 7327 and 7328: Problem Determination and Service Guide
Table 5. DSA Preboot messages (continued)
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is solved.
v See Chapter 4, “Parts listing, System x3200 M3 Types 7327 and 7328,” on page 133 to determine which components are
customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a Trained
service technician.
v Go to the IBM support Web site at http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/ to check for technical information, hints, tips,
and new device drivers or to submit a request for information.
Message
number Component Test State Description Action
166-810-xxx IMM IMM I2C Test Aborted IMM I2C test 1. Turn off the system and disconnect it
stopped: request from the power source. You must
data length is disconnect the system from ac power
invalid. to reset the IMM.
2. After 45 seconds, reconnect the
system to the power source and turn
on the system.
3. Run the test again.
4. Make sure that the DSA code is at
the latest level. For the latest level of
DSA code, go to
http://www.ibm.com/support/
docview.wss?uid=psg1SERV-DSA.
5. Make sure that the IMM firmware is at
the latest level. The installed firmware
level is shown in the DSA event log in
the Firmware/VPD section for this
component. For more information, see
“Updating the firmware” on page 221.
6. Run the test again.
7. If the failure remains, go to the IBM
Web site for more troubleshooting
information at http://www.ibm.com/
systems/support/supportsite.wss/
docdisplay?brandind=5000008
&lndocid=SERV-CALL.

Chapter 3. Diagnostics 87
Table 5. DSA Preboot messages (continued)
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is solved.
v See Chapter 4, “Parts listing, System x3200 M3 Types 7327 and 7328,” on page 133 to determine which components are
customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a Trained
service technician.
v Go to the IBM support Web site at http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/ to check for technical information, hints, tips,
and new device drivers or to submit a request for information.
Message
number Component Test State Description Action
166-811-xxx IMM IMM I2C Test Aborted IMM I2C test 1. Turn off the system and disconnect it
stopped: request from the power source. You must
data field length disconnect the system from ac power
limit is exceeded. to reset the IMM.
2. After 45 seconds, reconnect the
system to the power source and turn
on the system.
3. Run the test again.
4. Make sure that the DSA code is at
the latest level. For the latest level of
DSA code, go to
http://www.ibm.com/support/
docview.wss?uid=psg1SERV-DSA.
5. Make sure that the IMM firmware is at
the latest level. The installed firmware
level is shown in the DSA event log in
the Firmware/VPD section for this
component. For more information, see
“Updating the firmware” on page 221.
6. Run the test again.
7. If the failure remains, go to the IBM
Web site for more troubleshooting
information at http://www.ibm.com/
systems/support/supportsite.wss/
docdisplay?brandind=5000008
&lndocid=SERV-CALL.

88 System x3200 M3 Types 7327 and 7328: Problem Determination and Service Guide
Table 5. DSA Preboot messages (continued)
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is solved.
v See Chapter 4, “Parts listing, System x3200 M3 Types 7327 and 7328,” on page 133 to determine which components are
customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a Trained
service technician.
v Go to the IBM support Web site at http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/ to check for technical information, hints, tips,
and new device drivers or to submit a request for information.
Message
number Component Test State Description Action
166-812-xxx IMM IMM I2C Test Aborted IMM I2C Test 1. Turn off the system and disconnect it
stopped a from the power source. You must
parameter is out of disconnect the system from ac power
range. to reset the IMM.
2. After 45 seconds, reconnect the
system to the power source and turn
on the system.
3. Run the test again.
4. Make sure that the DSA code is at
the latest level. For the latest level of
DSA code, go to
http://www.ibm.com/support/
docview.wss?uid=psg1SERV-DSA.
5. Make sure that the IMM firmware is at
the latest level. The installed firmware
level is shown in the DSA event log in
the Firmware/VPD section for this
component. For more information, see
“Updating the firmware” on page 221.
6. Run the test again.
7. If the failure remains, go to the IBM
Web site for more troubleshooting
information at http://www.ibm.com/
systems/support/supportsite.wss/
docdisplay?brandind=5000008
&lndocid=SERV-CALL.

Chapter 3. Diagnostics 89
Table 5. DSA Preboot messages (continued)
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is solved.
v See Chapter 4, “Parts listing, System x3200 M3 Types 7327 and 7328,” on page 133 to determine which components are
customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a Trained
service technician.
v Go to the IBM support Web site at http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/ to check for technical information, hints, tips,
and new device drivers or to submit a request for information.
Message
number Component Test State Description Action
166-813-xxx IMM IMM I2C Test Aborted IMM I2C test 1. Turn off the system and disconnect it
stopped: cannot from the power source. You must
return the number disconnect the system from ac power
of requested data to reset the IMM.
bytes.
2. After 45 seconds, reconnect the
system to the power source and turn
on the system.
3. Run the test again.
4. Make sure that the DSA code is at
the latest level. For the latest level of
DSA code, go to
http://www.ibm.com/support/
docview.wss?uid=psg1SERV-DSA.
5. Make sure that the IMM firmware is at
the latest level. The installed firmware
level is shown in the DSA event log in
the Firmware/VPD section for this
component. For more information, see
“Updating the firmware” on page 221.
6. Run the test again.
7. If the failure remains, go to the IBM
Web site for more troubleshooting
information at http://www.ibm.com/
systems/support/supportsite.wss/
docdisplay?brandind=5000008
&lndocid=SERV-CALL.

90 System x3200 M3 Types 7327 and 7328: Problem Determination and Service Guide
Table 5. DSA Preboot messages (continued)
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is solved.
v See Chapter 4, “Parts listing, System x3200 M3 Types 7327 and 7328,” on page 133 to determine which components are
customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a Trained
service technician.
v Go to the IBM support Web site at http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/ to check for technical information, hints, tips,
and new device drivers or to submit a request for information.
Message
number Component Test State Description Action
166-814-xxx IMM IMM I2C Test Aborted IMM I2C test 1. Turn off the system and disconnect it
stopped: requested from the power source. You must
sensor, data, or disconnect the system from ac power
record is not to reset the IMM.
present.
2. After 45 seconds, reconnect the
system to the power source and turn
on the system.
3. Run the test again.
4. Make sure that the DSA code is at
the latest level. For the latest level of
DSA code, go to
http://www.ibm.com/support/
docview.wss?uid=psg1SERV-DSA.
5. Make sure that the IMM firmware is at
the latest level. The installed firmware
level is shown in the DSA event log in
the Firmware/VPD section for this
component. For more information, see
“Updating the firmware” on page 221.
6. Run the test again.
7. If the failure remains, go to the IBM
Web site for more troubleshooting
information at http://www.ibm.com/
systems/support/supportsite.wss/
docdisplay?brandind=5000008
&lndocid=SERV-CALL.

Chapter 3. Diagnostics 91
Table 5. DSA Preboot messages (continued)
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is solved.
v See Chapter 4, “Parts listing, System x3200 M3 Types 7327 and 7328,” on page 133 to determine which components are
customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a Trained
service technician.
v Go to the IBM support Web site at http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/ to check for technical information, hints, tips,
and new device drivers or to submit a request for information.
Message
number Component Test State Description Action
166-815-xxx IMM IMM I2C Test Aborted IMM I2C test 1. Turn off the system and disconnect it
stopped: invalid from the power source. You must
data field in the disconnect the system from ac power
request. to reset the IMM.
2. After 45 seconds, reconnect the
system to the power source and turn
on the system.
3. Run the test again.
4. Make sure that the DSA code is at
the latest level. For the latest level of
DSA code, go to
http://www.ibm.com/support/
docview.wss?uid=psg1SERV-DSA.
5. Make sure that the IMM firmware is at
the latest level. The installed firmware
level is shown in the DSA event log in
the Firmware/VPD section for this
component. For more information, see
“Updating the firmware” on page 221.
6. Run the test again.
7. If the failure remains, go to the IBM
Web site for more troubleshooting
information at http://www.ibm.com/
systems/support/supportsite.wss/
docdisplay?brandind=5000008
&lndocid=SERV-CALL.

92 System x3200 M3 Types 7327 and 7328: Problem Determination and Service Guide
Table 5. DSA Preboot messages (continued)
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is solved.
v See Chapter 4, “Parts listing, System x3200 M3 Types 7327 and 7328,” on page 133 to determine which components are
customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a Trained
service technician.
v Go to the IBM support Web site at http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/ to check for technical information, hints, tips,
and new device drivers or to submit a request for information.
Message
number Component Test State Description Action
166-816-xxx IMM IMM I2C Test Aborted IMM I2C test 1. Turn off the system and disconnect it
stopped: the from the power source. You must
command is illegal disconnect the system from ac power
for the specified to reset the IMM.
sensor or record
type. 2. After 45 seconds, reconnect the
system to the power source and turn
on the system.
3. Run the test again.
4. Make sure that the DSA code is at
the latest level. For the latest level of
DSA code, go to
http://www.ibm.com/support/
docview.wss?uid=psg1SERV-DSA.
5. Make sure that the IMM firmware is at
the latest level. The installed firmware
level is shown in the DSA event log in
the Firmware/VPD section for this
component. For more information, see
“Updating the firmware” on page 221.
6. Run the test again.
7. If the failure remains, go to the IBM
Web site for more troubleshooting
information at http://www.ibm.com/
systems/support/supportsite.wss/
docdisplay?brandind=5000008
&lndocid=SERV-CALL.

Chapter 3. Diagnostics 93
Table 5. DSA Preboot messages (continued)
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is solved.
v See Chapter 4, “Parts listing, System x3200 M3 Types 7327 and 7328,” on page 133 to determine which components are
customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a Trained
service technician.
v Go to the IBM support Web site at http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/ to check for technical information, hints, tips,
and new device drivers or to submit a request for information.
Message
number Component Test State Description Action
166-817-xxx IMM IMM I2C Test Aborted IMM I2C test 1. Turn off the system and disconnect it
stopped: a from the power source. You must
command response disconnect the system from ac power
could not be to reset the IMM.
provided.
2. After 45 seconds, reconnect the
system to the power source and turn
on the system.
3. Run the test again.
4. Make sure that the DSA code is at
the latest level. For the latest level of
DSA code, go to
http://www.ibm.com/support/
docview.wss?uid=psg1SERV-DSA.
5. Make sure that the IMM firmware is at
the latest level. The installed firmware
level is shown in the DSA event log in
the Firmware/VPD section for this
component. For more information, see
“Updating the firmware” on page 221.
6. Run the test again.
7. If the failure remains, go to the IBM
Web site for more troubleshooting
information at http://www.ibm.com/
systems/support/supportsite.wss/
docdisplay?brandind=5000008
&lndocid=SERV-CALL.

94 System x3200 M3 Types 7327 and 7328: Problem Determination and Service Guide
Table 5. DSA Preboot messages (continued)
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is solved.
v See Chapter 4, “Parts listing, System x3200 M3 Types 7327 and 7328,” on page 133 to determine which components are
customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a Trained
service technician.
v Go to the IBM support Web site at http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/ to check for technical information, hints, tips,
and new device drivers or to submit a request for information.
Message
number Component Test State Description Action
166-818-xxx IMM IMM I2C Test Aborted IMM I2C test 1. Turn off the system and disconnect it
stopped: cannot from the power source. You must
execute a disconnect the system from ac power
duplicated request. to reset the IMM.
2. After 45 seconds, reconnect the
system to the power source and turn
on the system.
3. Run the test again.
4. Make sure that the DSA code is at
the latest level. For the latest level of
DSA code, go to
http://www.ibm.com/support/
docview.wss?uid=psg1SERV-DSA.
5. Make sure that the IMM firmware is at
the latest level. The installed firmware
level is shown in the DSA event log in
the Firmware/VPD section for this
component. For more information, see
“Updating the firmware” on page 221.
6. Run the test again.
7. If the failure remains, go to the IBM
Web site for more troubleshooting
information at http://www.ibm.com/
systems/support/supportsite.wss/
docdisplay?brandind=5000008
&lndocid=SERV-CALL.

Chapter 3. Diagnostics 95
Table 5. DSA Preboot messages (continued)
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is solved.
v See Chapter 4, “Parts listing, System x3200 M3 Types 7327 and 7328,” on page 133 to determine which components are
customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a Trained
service technician.
v Go to the IBM support Web site at http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/ to check for technical information, hints, tips,
and new device drivers or to submit a request for information.
Message
number Component Test State Description Action
166-819-xxx IMM IMM I2C Test Aborted IMM I2C test 1. Turn off the system and disconnect it
stopped: a from the power source. You must
command response disconnect the system from ac power
could not be to reset the IMM.
provided; the SDR
repository is in 2. After 45 seconds, reconnect the
update mode. system to the power source and turn
on the system.
3. Run the test again.
4. Make sure that the DSA code is at
the latest level. For the latest level of
DSA code, go to
http://www.ibm.com/support/
docview.wss?uid=psg1SERV-DSA.
5. Make sure that the IMM firmware is at
the latest level. The installed firmware
level is shown in the DSA event log in
the Firmware/VPD section for this
component. For more information, see
“Updating the firmware” on page 221.
6. Run the test again.
7. If the failure remains, go to the IBM
Web site for more troubleshooting
information at http://www.ibm.com/
systems/support/supportsite.wss/
docdisplay?brandind=5000008
&lndocid=SERV-CALL.
166-820-xxx IMM IMM I2C Test Aborted IMM I2C test 1. Turn off the system and disconnect it
stopped: a from the power source. You must
command response disconnect the system from ac power
could not be to reset the IMM.
provided; the
device is in 2. After 45 seconds, reconnect the
firmware update system to the power source and turn
mode. on the system.
3. Run the test again.
4. Make sure that the DSA code and
IMM firmware are at the latest level.
5. Make sure that the IMM firmware is at
the latest level. The installed firmware
level is shown in the DSA event log in
the Firmware/VPD section for this
component. For more information, see
“Updating the firmware” on page 221.
6. Run the test again.
7. If the failure remains, go to the IBM
Web site for more troubleshooting
information at http://www.ibm.com/
systems/support/supportsite.wss/
docdisplay?brandind=5000008
&lndocid=SERV-CALL.

96 System x3200 M3 Types 7327 and 7328: Problem Determination and Service Guide
Table 5. DSA Preboot messages (continued)
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is solved.
v See Chapter 4, “Parts listing, System x3200 M3 Types 7327 and 7328,” on page 133 to determine which components are
customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a Trained
service technician.
v Go to the IBM support Web site at http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/ to check for technical information, hints, tips,
and new device drivers or to submit a request for information.
Message
number Component Test State Description Action
166-821-xxx IMM IMM I2C Test Aborted IMM I2C test 1. Turn off the system and disconnect it
stopped: a from the power source. You must
command response disconnect the system from ac power
could not be to reset the IMM.
provided; IMM
initialization is in 2. After 45 seconds, reconnect the
progress. system to the power source and turn
on the system.
3. Run the test again.
4. Make sure that the DSA code is at
the latest level. For the latest level of
DSA code, go to
http://www.ibm.com/support/
docview.wss?uid=psg1SERV-DSA.
5. Make sure that the IMM firmware is at
the latest level. The installed firmware
level is shown in the DSA event log in
the Firmware/VPD section for this
component. For more information, see
“Updating the firmware” on page 221.
6. Run the test again.
7. If the failure remains, go to the IBM
Web site for more troubleshooting
information at http://www.ibm.com/
systems/support/supportsite.wss/
docdisplay?brandind=5000008
&lndocid=SERV-CALL.

Chapter 3. Diagnostics 97
Table 5. DSA Preboot messages (continued)
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is solved.
v See Chapter 4, “Parts listing, System x3200 M3 Types 7327 and 7328,” on page 133 to determine which components are
customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a Trained
service technician.
v Go to the IBM support Web site at http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/ to check for technical information, hints, tips,
and new device drivers or to submit a request for information.
Message
number Component Test State Description Action
166-822-xxx IMM IMM I2C Test Aborted IMM I2C test 1. Turn off the system and disconnect it
stopped: the from the power source. You must
destination is disconnect the system from ac power
unavailable. to reset the IMM.
2. After 45 seconds, reconnect the
system to the power source and turn
on the system.
3. Run the test again.
4. Make sure that the DSA code is at
the latest level. For the latest level of
DSA code, go to
http://www.ibm.com/support/
docview.wss?uid=psg1SERV-DSA.
5. Make sure that the IMM firmware is at
the latest level. The installed firmware
level is shown in the DSA event log in
the Firmware/VPD section for this
component. For more information, see
“Updating the firmware” on page 221.
6. Run the test again.
7. If the failure remains, go to the IBM
Web site for more troubleshooting
information at http://www.ibm.com/
systems/support/supportsite.wss/
docdisplay?brandind=5000008
&lndocid=SERV-CALL.

98 System x3200 M3 Types 7327 and 7328: Problem Determination and Service Guide
Table 5. DSA Preboot messages (continued)
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is solved.
v See Chapter 4, “Parts listing, System x3200 M3 Types 7327 and 7328,” on page 133 to determine which components are
customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a Trained
service technician.
v Go to the IBM support Web site at http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/ to check for technical information, hints, tips,
and new device drivers or to submit a request for information.
Message
number Component Test State Description Action
166-823-xxx IMM IMM I2C Test Aborted IMM I2C test 1. Turn off the system and disconnect it
stopped: cannot from the power source. You must
execute the disconnect the system from ac power
command; to reset the IMM.
insufficient privilege
level. 2. After 45 seconds, reconnect the
system to the power source and turn
on the system.
3. Run the test again.
4. Make sure that the DSA code is at
the latest level. For the latest level of
DSA code, go to
http://www.ibm.com/support/
docview.wss?uid=psg1SERV-DSA.
5. Make sure that the IMM firmware is at
the latest level. The installed firmware
level is shown in the DSA event log in
the Firmware/VPD section for this
component. For more information, see
“Updating the firmware” on page 221.
6. Run the test again.
7. If the failure remains, go to the IBM
Web site for more troubleshooting
information at http://www.ibm.com/
systems/support/supportsite.wss/
docdisplay?brandind=5000008
&lndocid=SERV-CALL.

Chapter 3. Diagnostics 99
Table 5. DSA Preboot messages (continued)
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is solved.
v See Chapter 4, “Parts listing, System x3200 M3 Types 7327 and 7328,” on page 133 to determine which components are
customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a Trained
service technician.
v Go to the IBM support Web site at http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/ to check for technical information, hints, tips,
and new device drivers or to submit a request for information.
Message
number Component Test State Description Action
166-824-xxx IMM IMM I2C Test Aborted IMM I2C test 1. Turn off the system and disconnect it
stopped: cannot from the power source. You must
execute the disconnect the system from ac power
command. to reset the IMM.
2. After 45 seconds, reconnect the
system to the power source and turn
on the system.
3. Run the test again.
4. Make sure that the DSA code is at
the latest level. For the latest level of
DSA code, go to
http://www.ibm.com/support/
docview.wss?uid=psg1SERV-DSA.
5. Make sure that the IMM firmware is at
the latest level. The installed firmware
level is shown in the DSA event log in
the Firmware/VPD section for this
component. For more information, see
“Updating the firmware” on page 221.
6. Run the test again.
7. If the failure remains, go to the IBM
Web site for more troubleshooting
information at http://www.ibm.com/
systems/support/supportsite.wss/
docdisplay?brandind=5000008
&lndocid=SERV-CALL.

100 System x3200 M3 Types 7327 and 7328: Problem Determination and Service Guide
Table 5. DSA Preboot messages (continued)
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is solved.
v See Chapter 4, “Parts listing, System x3200 M3 Types 7327 and 7328,” on page 133 to determine which components are
customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a Trained
service technician.
v Go to the IBM support Web site at http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/ to check for technical information, hints, tips,
and new device drivers or to submit a request for information.
Message
number Component Test State Description Action
166-901-xxx IMM IMM I2C Test Failed The IMM indicates 1. Turn off the system and disconnect it
a failure in the H8 from the power source. You must
bus (Bus 0) disconnect the system from ac
power to reset the IMM.
2. After 45 seconds, reconnect the
system to the power source and turn
on the system.
3. Run the test again.
4. Make sure that the DSA code is at
the latest level. For the latest level of
DSA code, go to
http://www.ibm.com/support/
docview.wss?uid=psg1SERV-DSA.
5. Make sure that the IMM firmware is
at the latest level. The installed
firmware level is shown in the DSA
event log in the Firmware/VPD
section for this component. For more
information, see “Updating the
firmware” on page 221.
6. Run the test again.
7. Remove power from the system.
8. (Trained service technician only)
Replace the system board.
9. Reconnect the system to power and
turn on the system.
10. Run the test again.
11. If the failure remains, go to the IBM
Web site for more troubleshooting
information at http://www.ibm.com/
systems/support/supportsite.wss/
docdisplay?brandind=5000008
&lndocid=SERV-CALL.

Chapter 3. Diagnostics 101


Table 5. DSA Preboot messages (continued)
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is solved.
v See Chapter 4, “Parts listing, System x3200 M3 Types 7327 and 7328,” on page 133 to determine which components are
customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a Trained
service technician.
v Go to the IBM support Web site at http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/ to check for technical information, hints, tips,
and new device drivers or to submit a request for information.
Message
number Component Test State Description Action
166-902-xxx IMM IMM I2C Test Failed The IMM indicates 1. Turn off the system and disconnect it
a failure in the SAS from the power source. You must
backplane 1 (Bus disconnect the system from ac
1). power to reset the IMM.
2. After 45 seconds, reconnect the
system to the power source and turn
on the system.
3. Run the test again.
4. Make sure that the DSA code is at
the latest level. For the latest level of
DSA code, go to
http://www.ibm.com/support/
docview.wss?uid=psg1SERV-DSA.
5. Make sure that the IMM firmware is
at the latest level. The installed
firmware level is shown in the DSA
event log in the Firmware/VPD
section for this component. For more
information, see “Updating the
firmware” on page 221.
6. Run the test again.
7. Turn off the system and disconnect it
from the power source.
8. Reseat the SAS backplane.
9. Reconnect the system to the power
source and turn on the system.
10. Run the test again.
11. Turn off the system and disconnect it
from the power source.
12. (Trained service technician only)
Replace the system board.
13. Reconnect the system to the power
source and turn on the system.
14. Run the test again.
166-902-xxx IMM IMM I2C Test Failed The IMM indicates 1. If the failure remains, go to the IBM
a failure in the Web site for more troubleshooting
memory bus. information at http://www.ibm.com/
systems/support/supportsite.wss/
docdisplay?brandind=5000008
&lndocid=SERV-CALL.

102 System x3200 M3 Types 7327 and 7328: Problem Determination and Service Guide
Table 5. DSA Preboot messages (continued)
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is solved.
v See Chapter 4, “Parts listing, System x3200 M3 Types 7327 and 7328,” on page 133 to determine which components are
customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a Trained
service technician.
v Go to the IBM support Web site at http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/ to check for technical information, hints, tips,
and new device drivers or to submit a request for information.
Message
number Component Test State Description Action
166-903-xxx IMM IMM I2C Test Failed The IMM indicates 1. Turn off the system and disconnect it
a failure in the from the power source. You must
DIMM bus (Bus 2). disconnect the system from ac
power to reset the IMM.
2. After 45 seconds, reconnect the
system to the power source and turn
on the system.
3. Run the test again.
4. Make sure that the DSA code is at
the latest level. For the latest level of
DSA code, go to
http://www.ibm.com/support/
docview.wss?uid=psg1SERV-DSA.
5. Make sure that the IMM firmware is
at the latest level. The installed
firmware level is shown in the DSA
event log in the Firmware/VPD
section for this component. For more
information, see “Updating the
firmware” on page 221.
6. Run the test again.
7. Disconnect the system from the
power source.
8. Replace the DIMMs one at a time,
and run the test again after replacing
each DIMM.
9. Reconnect the system to the power
source and turn on the system.
10. Run the test again.
11. Turn off the system and disconnect it
from the power source.
12. Reseat all of the DIMMs.
13. Reconnect the system to the power
source and turn on the system.
14. Run the test again.
15. Turn off the system and disconnect it
from the power source.
16. (Trained service technician only)
Replace the system board.
17. Reconnect the system to the power
source and turn on the system.
18. Run the test again.
19. If the failure remains, go to the IBM
Web site for more troubleshooting
information at http://www.ibm.com/
systems/support/supportsite.wss/
docdisplay?brandind=5000008
&lndocid=SERV-CALL.

Chapter 3. Diagnostics 103


Table 5. DSA Preboot messages (continued)
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is solved.
v See Chapter 4, “Parts listing, System x3200 M3 Types 7327 and 7328,” on page 133 to determine which components are
customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a Trained
service technician.
v Go to the IBM support Web site at http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/ to check for technical information, hints, tips,
and new device drivers or to submit a request for information.
Message
number Component Test State Description Action
166-904-xxx IMM IMM I2C Test Failed The IMM indicates 1. Turn off the system and disconnect it
a failure in the from the power source. You must
power supply bus disconnect the system from ac
(Bus 3). power to reset the IMM.
2. After 45 seconds, reconnect the
system to the power source and turn
on the system.
3. Run the test again.
4. Make sure that the DSA code is at
the latest level. For the latest level of
DSA code, go to
http://www.ibm.com/support/
docview.wss?uid=psg1SERV-DSA.
5. Make sure that the IMM firmware is
at the latest level. The installed
firmware level is shown in the DSA
event log in the Firmware/VPD
section for this component. For more
information, see “Updating the
firmware” on page 221.
6. Run the test again.
7. Reseat the power supply.
8. Run the test again.
9. Turn off the system and disconnect it
from the power source.
10. Trained service technician only)
Replace the system board.
11. Reconnect the system to the power
source and turn on the system.
12. Run the test again.
13. If the failure remains, go to the IBM
Web site for more troubleshooting
information at http://www.ibm.com/
systems/support/supportsite.wss/
docdisplay?brandind=5000008
&lndocid=SERV-CALL.

104 System x3200 M3 Types 7327 and 7328: Problem Determination and Service Guide
Table 5. DSA Preboot messages (continued)
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is solved.
v See Chapter 4, “Parts listing, System x3200 M3 Types 7327 and 7328,” on page 133 to determine which components are
customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a Trained
service technician.
v Go to the IBM support Web site at http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/ to check for technical information, hints, tips,
and new device drivers or to submit a request for information.
Message
number Component Test State Description Action
166-905-xxx IMM IMM I2C Test Failed The IMM indicates 1. Turn off the system and disconnect it
a failure in the SAS from the power source. You must
backplane 2 & disconnect the system from ac
sensor bus (Bus 4). power to reset the IMM.
2. After 45 seconds, reconnect the
system to the power source and turn
on the system.
3. Run the test again.
4. Make sure that the DSA code is at
the latest level. For the latest level of
DSA code, go to
http://www.ibm.com/support/
docview.wss?uid=psg1SERV-DSA.
5. Make sure that the IMM firmware is
at the latest level. The installed
firmware level is shown in the DSA
event log in the Firmware/VPD
section for this component. For more
information, see “Updating the
firmware” on page 221.
6. Run the test again.
7. Turn off the system and disconnect it
from the power source.
8. Reseat the hard disk drive
backplane.
9. Reconnect the system to the power
source and turn on the system.
10. Run the test again.
11. Turn off the system and disconnect it
from the power source.
12. Trained service technician only)
Replace the system board.
13. Reconnect the system to the power
source and turn on the system.
14. Run the test again.
15. If the failure remains, go to the IBM
Web site for more troubleshooting
information at http://www.ibm.com/
systems/support/supportsite.wss/
docdisplay?brandind=5000008
&lndocid=SERV-CALL.

Chapter 3. Diagnostics 105


Table 5. DSA Preboot messages (continued)
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is solved.
v See Chapter 4, “Parts listing, System x3200 M3 Types 7327 and 7328,” on page 133 to determine which components are
customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a Trained
service technician.
v Go to the IBM support Web site at http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/ to check for technical information, hints, tips,
and new device drivers or to submit a request for information.
Message
number Component Test State Description Action
166-906-xxx IMM IMM I2C Test Failed The IMM indicates 1. Turn off the system and disconnect it
a failure in the PCI from the power source. You must
bus (Bus 5). disconnect the system from ac
power to reset the IMM.
2. After 45 seconds, reconnect the
system to the power source and turn
on the system.
3. Run the test again.
4. Make sure that the DSA code is at
the latest level. For the latest level of
DSA code, go to
http://www.ibm.com/support/
docview.wss?uid=psg1SERV-DSA.
5. Make sure that the IMM firmware is
at the latest level. The installed
firmware level is shown in the DSA
event log in the Firmware/VPD
section for this component. For more
information, see “Updating the
firmware” on page 221.
6. Run the test again.
7. Turn off the system and disconnect it
from the power source.
8. Trained service technician only)
Replace the system board.
9. Reconnect the system to the power
source and turn on the system.
10. Run the test again.
11. If the failure remains, go to the IBM
Web site for more troubleshooting
information at http://www.ibm.com/
systems/support/supportsite.wss/
docdisplay?brandind=5000008
&lndocid=SERV-CALL.

106 System x3200 M3 Types 7327 and 7328: Problem Determination and Service Guide
Table 5. DSA Preboot messages (continued)
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is solved.
v See Chapter 4, “Parts listing, System x3200 M3 Types 7327 and 7328,” on page 133 to determine which components are
customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a Trained
service technician.
v Go to the IBM support Web site at http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/ to check for technical information, hints, tips,
and new device drivers or to submit a request for information.
Message
number Component Test State Description Action
201-801-xxx Memory Memory Test Aborted Test canceled: the 1. Turn off and restart the system.
system UEFI
programmed the 2. Run the test again.
memory controller 3. Make sure that the server firmware is
with an invalid at the latest level. The installed
CBAR address firmware level is shown in the DSA
event log in the Firmware/VPD
section for this component. For more
information, see “Updating the
firmware” on page 221.
4. Run the test again.
5. If the failure remains, go to the IBM
Web site for more troubleshooting
information at http://www.ibm.com/
systems/support/supportsite.wss/
docdisplay?brandind=5000008
&lndocid=SERV-CALL.
201-802-xxx Memory Memory Test Aborted Test canceled: the 1. Turn off and restart the system.
end address in the
E820 function is 2. Run the test again.
less than 16 MB. 3. Make sure that all DIMMs are
enabled in the Setup utility.
4. Make sure that the server firmware is
at the latest level. The installed
firmware level is shown in the DSA
event log in the Firmware/VPD
section for this component. For more
information, see “Updating the
firmware” on page 221.
5. Run the test again.
6. If the failure remains, go to the IBM
Web site for more troubleshooting
information at http://www.ibm.com/
systems/support/supportsite.wss/
docdisplay?brandind=5000008
&lndocid=SERV-CALL.

Chapter 3. Diagnostics 107


Table 5. DSA Preboot messages (continued)
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is solved.
v See Chapter 4, “Parts listing, System x3200 M3 Types 7327 and 7328,” on page 133 to determine which components are
customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a Trained
service technician.
v Go to the IBM support Web site at http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/ to check for technical information, hints, tips,
and new device drivers or to submit a request for information.
Message
number Component Test State Description Action
201-803-xxx Memory Memory Test Aborted Test canceled: 1. Turn off and restart the system.
could not enable
the processor 2. Run the test again.
cache. 3. Make sure that the server firmware is
at the latest level. The installed
firmware level is shown in the DSA
event log in the Firmware/VPD
section for this component. For more
information, see “Updating the
firmware” on page 221.
4. Run the test again.
5. If the failure remains, go to the IBM
Web site for more troubleshooting
information at http://www.ibm.com/
systems/support/supportsite.wss/
docdisplay?brandind=5000008
&lndocid=SERV-CALL.
201-804-xxx Memory Memory Test Aborted Test canceled: the 1. Turn off and restart the system.
memory controller
buffer request 2. Run the test again.
failed. 3. Make sure that the server firmware is
at the latest level. The installed
firmware level is shown in the DSA
event log in the Firmware/VPD
section for this component. For more
information, see “Updating the
firmware” on page 221.
4. Run the test again.
5. If the failure remains, go to the IBM
Web site for more troubleshooting
information at http://www.ibm.com/
systems/support/supportsite.wss/
docdisplay?brandind=5000008
&lndocid=SERV-CALL.
201-805-xxx Memory Memory Test Aborted Test canceled: the 1. Turn off and restart the system.
memory controller
display/alter write 2. Run the test again.
operation was not 3. Make sure that the server firmware is
completed. at the latest level. The installed
firmware level is shown in the DSA
event log in the Firmware/VPD
section for this component. For more
information, see “Updating the
firmware” on page 221.
4. Run the test again.
5. If the failure remains, go to the IBM
Web site for more troubleshooting
information at http://www.ibm.com/
systems/support/supportsite.wss/
docdisplay?brandind=5000008
&lndocid=SERV-CALL.

108 System x3200 M3 Types 7327 and 7328: Problem Determination and Service Guide
Table 5. DSA Preboot messages (continued)
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is solved.
v See Chapter 4, “Parts listing, System x3200 M3 Types 7327 and 7328,” on page 133 to determine which components are
customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a Trained
service technician.
v Go to the IBM support Web site at http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/ to check for technical information, hints, tips,
and new device drivers or to submit a request for information.
Message
number Component Test State Description Action
201-806-xxx Memory Memory Test Aborted Test canceled: the 1. Turn off and restart the system.
memory controller
fast scrub operation 2. Run the test again.
was not completed. 3. Make sure that the server firmware is
at the latest level. The installed
firmware level is shown in the DSA
event log in the Firmware/VPD
section for this component. For more
information, see “Updating the
firmware” on page 221.
4. Run the test again.
5. If the failure remains, go to the IBM
Web site for more troubleshooting
information at http://www.ibm.com/
systems/support/supportsite.wss/
docdisplay?brandind=5000008
&lndocid=SERV-CALL.
201-807-xxx Memory Memory Test Aborted Test canceled: the 1. Turn off and restart the system.
memory controller
buffer free request 2. Run the test again.
failed. 3. Make sure that the server firmware is
at the latest level. The installed
firmware level is shown in the DSA
event log in the Firmware/VPD
section for this component. For more
information, see “Updating the
firmware” on page 221.
4. Run the test again.
5. If the failure remains, go to the IBM
Web site for more troubleshooting
information at http://www.ibm.com/
systems/support/supportsite.wss/
docdisplay?brandind=5000008
&lndocid=SERV-CALL.
201-808-xxx Memory Memory Test Aborted Test canceled: 1. Turn off and restart the system.
memory controller
display/alter buffer 2. Run the test again.
execute error. 3. Make sure that the server firmware is
at the latest level. The installed
firmware level is shown in the DSA
event log in the Firmware/VPD
section for this component. For more
information, see “Updating the
firmware” on page 221.
4. Run the test again.
5. If the failure remains, go to the IBM
Web site for more troubleshooting
information at http://www.ibm.com/
systems/support/supportsite.wss/
docdisplay?brandind=5000008
&lndocid=SERV-CALL.

Chapter 3. Diagnostics 109


Table 5. DSA Preboot messages (continued)
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is solved.
v See Chapter 4, “Parts listing, System x3200 M3 Types 7327 and 7328,” on page 133 to determine which components are
customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a Trained
service technician.
v Go to the IBM support Web site at http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/ to check for technical information, hints, tips,
and new device drivers or to submit a request for information.
Message
number Component Test State Description Action
201-809-xxx Memory Memory Test Aborted Test canceled 1. Turn off and restart the system.
program error:
operation running 2. Run the test again.
fast scrub. 3. Make sure that the DSA code is at
the latest level. For the latest level of
DSA code, go to
http://www.ibm.com/support/
docview.wss?uid=psg1SERV-DSA.
4. Make sure that the server firmware is
at the latest level. The installed
firmware level is shown in the DSA
event log in the Firmware/VPD
section for this component. For more
information, see “Updating the
firmware” on page 221.
5. Run the test again.
6. If the failure remains, go to the IBM
Web site for more troubleshooting
information at http://www.ibm.com/
systems/support/supportsite.wss/
docdisplay?brandind=5000008
&lndocid=SERV-CALL.
201-810-xxx Memory Memory Test Aborted Test stopped: 1. Turn off and restart the system.
unknown error
code xxx received 2. Run the test again.
in COMMONEXIT 3. Make sure that the DSA code is at
procedure. the latest level. For the latest level of
DSA code, go to
http://www.ibm.com/support/
docview.wss?uid=psg1SERV-DSA.
4. Make sure that the server firmware is
at the latest level. The installed
firmware level is shown in the DSA
event log in the Firmware/VPD
section for this component. For more
information, see “Updating the
firmware” on page 221.
5. Run the test again.
6. If the failure remains, go to the IBM
Web site for more troubleshooting
information at http://www.ibm.com/
systems/support/supportsite.wss/
docdisplay?brandind=5000008
&lndocid=SERV-CALL.

110 System x3200 M3 Types 7327 and 7328: Problem Determination and Service Guide
Table 5. DSA Preboot messages (continued)
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is solved.
v See Chapter 4, “Parts listing, System x3200 M3 Types 7327 and 7328,” on page 133 to determine which components are
customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a Trained
service technician.
v Go to the IBM support Web site at http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/ to check for technical information, hints, tips,
and new device drivers or to submit a request for information.
Message
number Component Test State Description Action
201-901-xxx Memory Memory Test Failed Test failure: 1. Turn off the system and disconnect it
single-bit error, from the power source.
failing DIMM z.
2. Reseat DIMM z.
3. Reconnect the system to power and
turn on the system.
4. Make sure that the DSA code is at
the latest level. For the latest level of
DSA code, go to
http://www.ibm.com/support/
docview.wss?uid=psg1SERV-DSA.
5. Make sure that the server firmware
is at the latest level. The installed
firmware level is shown in the DSA
event log in the Firmware/VPD
section for this component. For more
information, see “Updating the
firmware” on page 221.
6. Run the test again.
7. Replace the failing DIMMs.
8. Re-enable all memory in the Setup
utility (see “Using the Setup utility”
on page 225).
9. Run the test again.
10. Replace the failing DIMM.
11. If the failure remains, go to the IBM
Web site for more troubleshooting
information at http://www.ibm.com/
systems/support/supportsite.wss/
docdisplay?brandind=5000008
&lndocid=SERV-CALL.

Chapter 3. Diagnostics 111


Table 5. DSA Preboot messages (continued)
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is solved.
v See Chapter 4, “Parts listing, System x3200 M3 Types 7327 and 7328,” on page 133 to determine which components are
customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a Trained
service technician.
v Go to the IBM support Web site at http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/ to check for technical information, hints, tips,
and new device drivers or to submit a request for information.
Message
number Component Test State Description Action
201-902-xxx Memory Memory Test Failed Test failure: 1. Turn off the system and disconnect it
single-bit and from the power source.
multi-bit error,
failing DIMM z 2. Reseat DIMM z.
3. Reconnect the system to power and
turn on the system.
4. Make sure that the DSA code is at
the latest level. For the latest level of
DSA code, go to
http://www.ibm.com/support/
docview.wss?uid=psg1SERV-DSA.
5. Make sure that the server firmware
is at the latest level. The installed
firmware level is shown in the DSA
event log in the Firmware/VPD
section for this component. For more
information, see “Updating the
firmware” on page 221.
6. Run the test again.
7. Replace the failing DIMMs.
8. Re-enable all memory in the Setup
utility see “Using the Setup utility” on
page 225).
9. Run the test again.
10. If the failure remains, go to the IBM
Web site for more troubleshooting
information at http://www.ibm.com/
systems/support/supportsite.wss/
docdisplay?brandind=5000008
&lndocid=SERV-CALL.

112 System x3200 M3 Types 7327 and 7328: Problem Determination and Service Guide
Table 5. DSA Preboot messages (continued)
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is solved.
v See Chapter 4, “Parts listing, System x3200 M3 Types 7327 and 7328,” on page 133 to determine which components are
customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a Trained
service technician.
v Go to the IBM support Web site at http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/ to check for technical information, hints, tips,
and new device drivers or to submit a request for information.
Message
number Component Test State Description Action
202-801-xxx Memory Memory Stress Aborted Internal program 1. Turn off and restart the system.
Test error.
2. Make sure that the DSA code is at
the latest level. For the latest level of
DSA code, go to
http://www.ibm.com/support/
docview.wss?uid=psg1SERV-DSA.
3. Make sure that the server firmware is
at the latest level. The installed
firmware level is shown in the DSA
event log in the Firmware/VPD
section for this component. For more
information, see “Updating the
firmware” on page 221.
4. Run the test again.
5. Turn off and restart the system if
necessary to recover from a hung
state.
6. Run the memory diagnostics to
identify the specific failing DIMM.
7. If the failure remains, go to the IBM
Web site for more troubleshooting
information at http://www.ibm.com/
systems/support/supportsite.wss/
docdisplay?brandind=5000008
&lndocid=SERV-CALL.
202-802-xxx Memory Memory Stress Failed General error: 1. Make sure that all memory is enabled
Test memory size is by checking the Available System
insufficient to run Memory in the Resource Utilization
the test. section of the DSA event log. If
necessary, enable all memory in the
Setup utility (see “Using the Setup
utility” on page 225).
2. Make sure that the DSA code is at
the latest level. For the latest level of
DSA code, go to
http://www.ibm.com/support/
docview.wss?uid=psg1SERV-DSA.
3. Run the test again.
4. Run the standard memory test to
validate all memory.
5. If the failure remains, go to the IBM
Web site for more troubleshooting
information at http://www.ibm.com/
systems/support/supportsite.wss/
docdisplay?brandind=5000008
&lndocid=SERV-CALL.

Chapter 3. Diagnostics 113


Table 5. DSA Preboot messages (continued)
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is solved.
v See Chapter 4, “Parts listing, System x3200 M3 Types 7327 and 7328,” on page 133 to determine which components are
customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a Trained
service technician.
v Go to the IBM support Web site at http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/ to check for technical information, hints, tips,
and new device drivers or to submit a request for information.
Message
number Component Test State Description Action
202-901-xxx Memory Memory Stress Failed Test failure. 1. Run the standard memory test to
Test validate all memory.
2. Make sure that the DSA code is at
the latest level. For the latest level of
DSA code, go to
http://www.ibm.com/support/
docview.wss?uid=psg1SERV-DSA.
3. Turn off the system and disconnect it
from power.
4. Reseat the DIMMs.
5. Reconnect the system to power and
turn on the system.
6. Run the test again.
7. If the failure remains, go to the IBM
Web site for more troubleshooting
information at http://www.ibm.com/
systems/support/supportsite.wss/
docdisplay?brandind=5000008
&lndocid=SERV-CALL.

114 System x3200 M3 Types 7327 and 7328: Problem Determination and Service Guide
Table 5. DSA Preboot messages (continued)
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is solved.
v See Chapter 4, “Parts listing, System x3200 M3 Types 7327 and 7328,” on page 133 to determine which components are
customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a Trained
service technician.
v Go to the IBM support Web site at http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/ to check for technical information, hints, tips,
and new device drivers or to submit a request for information.
Message
number Component Test State Description Action
215-801-xxx Optical Drive v Verify Media Aborted Unable to 1. Make sure that the DSA code is at
Installed communicate with the latest level. For the latest level of
the device driver. DSA code, go to
v Read/ Write
Test http://www.ibm.com/support/
docview.wss?uid=psg1SERV-DSA.
v Self-Test
2. Run the test again.
Messages and 3. Check the drive cabling at both ends
actions apply to for loose or broken connections or
all three tests. damage to the cable. Replace the
cable if it is damaged.
4. Run the test again.
5. For additional troubleshooting
information, go to
http://www.ibm.com/support/
docview.wss?uid=psg1MIGR-41559.
6. Run the test again.
7. Make sure that the system firmware
is at the latest level. The installed
firmware level is shown in the DSA
event log in the Firmware/VPD
section for this component. For more
information, see “Updating the
firmware” on page 221.
8. Run the test again.
9. Replace the CD/DVD drive.
10. If the failure remains, go to the IBM
Web site for more troubleshooting
information at http://www.ibm.com/
systems/support/supportsite.wss/
docdisplay?brandind=5000008
&lndocid=SERV-CALL.

Chapter 3. Diagnostics 115


Table 5. DSA Preboot messages (continued)
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is solved.
v See Chapter 4, “Parts listing, System x3200 M3 Types 7327 and 7328,” on page 133 to determine which components are
customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a Trained
service technician.
v Go to the IBM support Web site at http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/ to check for technical information, hints, tips,
and new device drivers or to submit a request for information.
Message
number Component Test State Description Action
215-802-xxx Optical Drive v Verify Media Aborted The media tray is 1. Close the media tray and wait 15
Installed open. seconds.
v Read/ Write 2. Run the test again.
Test 3. Insert a new CD/DVD into the drive
v Self-Test and wait for 15 seconds for the
media to be recognized.
Messages and
4. Run the test again.
actions apply to
all three tests. 5. Check the drive cabling at both ends
for loose or broken connections or
damage to the cable. Replace the
cable if it is damaged.
6. Run the test again.
7. Make sure that the DSA code is at
the latest level. For the latest level of
DSA code, go to
http://www.ibm.com/support/
docview.wss?uid=psg1SERV-DSA.
8. Run the test again.
9. For additional troubleshooting
information, go to
http://www.ibm.com/support/
docview.wss?uid=psg1MIGR-41559.
10. Run the test again.
11. Replace the CD/DVD drive.
12. If the failure remains, go to the IBM
Web site for more troubleshooting
information at http://www.ibm.com/
systems/support/supportsite.wss/
docdisplay?brandind=5000008
&lndocid=SERV-CALL.
215-803-xxx Optical Drive v Verify Media Failed The disc might be 1. Wait for the system activity to stop.
Installed in use by the
system. 2. Run the test again
v Read/ Write 3. Turn off and restart the system.
Test
4. Run the test again.
v Self-Test
5. Replace the CD/DVD drive.
Messages and 6. If the failure remains, go to the IBM
actions apply to Web site for more troubleshooting
all three tests. information at http://www.ibm.com/
systems/support/supportsite.wss/
docdisplay?brandind=5000008
&lndocid=SERV-CALL.

116 System x3200 M3 Types 7327 and 7328: Problem Determination and Service Guide
Table 5. DSA Preboot messages (continued)
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is solved.
v See Chapter 4, “Parts listing, System x3200 M3 Types 7327 and 7328,” on page 133 to determine which components are
customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a Trained
service technician.
v Go to the IBM support Web site at http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/ to check for technical information, hints, tips,
and new device drivers or to submit a request for information.
Message
number Component Test State Description Action
215-901-xxx Optical Drive v Verify Media Aborted Drive media is not 1. Insert a CD/DVD into the drive or try
Installed detected. a new media, and wait for 15
v Read/ Write seconds.
Test 2. Run the test again.
v Self-Test 3. Check the drive cabling at both ends
for loose or broken connections or
Messages and damage to the cable. Replace the
actions apply to cable if it is damaged.
all three tests.
4. Run the test again.
5. For additional troubleshooting
information, go to
http://www.ibm.com/support/
docview.wss?uid=psg1MIGR-41559.
6. Run the test again.
7. Replace the CD/DVD drive.
8. If the failure remains, go to the IBM
Web site for more troubleshooting
information at http://www.ibm.com/
systems/support/supportsite.wss/
docdisplay?brandind=5000008
&lndocid=SERV-CALL.
215-902-xxx Optical Drive v Verify Media Failed Read miscompare. 1. Insert a CD/DVD into the drive or try
Installed a new media, and wait for 15
v Read/ Write seconds.
Test 2. Run the test again.
v Self-Test 3. Check the drive cabling at both ends
for loose or broken connections or
Messages and damage to the cable. Replace the
actions apply to cable if it is damaged.
all three tests.
4. Run the test again.
5. For additional troubleshooting
information, go to
http://www.ibm.com/support/
docview.wss?uid=psg1MIGR-41559.
6. Run the test again.
7. Replace the CD/DVD drive.
8. If the failure remains, go to the IBM
Web site for more troubleshooting
information at http://www.ibm.com/
systems/support/supportsite.wss/
docdisplay?brandind=5000008
&lndocid=SERV-CALL.

Chapter 3. Diagnostics 117


Table 5. DSA Preboot messages (continued)
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is solved.
v See Chapter 4, “Parts listing, System x3200 M3 Types 7327 and 7328,” on page 133 to determine which components are
customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a Trained
service technician.
v Go to the IBM support Web site at http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/ to check for technical information, hints, tips,
and new device drivers or to submit a request for information.
Message
number Component Test State Description Action
215-903-xxx Optical Drive v Verify Media Aborted Could not access 1. Insert a CD/DVD into the drive or try
Installed the drive. a new media, and wait for 15
v Read/ Write seconds.
Test 2. Run the test again.
v Self-Test 3. Check the drive cabling at both ends
for loose or broken connections or
Messages and damage to the cable. Replace the
actions apply to cable if it is damaged.
all three tests.
4. Run the test again.
5. Make sure that the DSA code is at
the latest level. For the latest level of
DSA code, go to
http://www.ibm.com/support/
docview.wss?uid=psg1SERV-DSA.
6. Run the test again.
7. For additional troubleshooting
information, go to
http://www.ibm.com/support/
docview.wss?uid=psg1MIGR-41559.
8. Run the test again.
9. Replace the CD/DVD drive.
10. If the failure remains, go to the IBM
Web site for more troubleshooting
information at http://www.ibm.com/
systems/support/supportsite.wss/
docdisplay?brandind=5000008
&lndocid=SERV-CALL.
215-904-xxx Optical Drive v Verify Media Failed A read error 1. Insert a CD/DVD into the drive or try
Installed occurred. a new media, and wait for 15
v Read/ Write seconds.
Test 2. Run the test again.
v Self-Test 3. Check the drive cabling at both ends
for loose or broken connections or
Messages and damage to the cable. Replace the
actions apply to cable if it is damaged.
all three tests.
4. Run the test again.
5. For additional troubleshooting
information, go to
http://www.ibm.com/support/
docview.wss?uid=psg1MIGR-41559.
6. Run the test again.
7. Replace the CD/DVD drive.
8. If the failure remains, go to the IBM
Web site for more troubleshooting
information at http://www.ibm.com/
systems/support/supportsite.wss/
docdisplay?brandind=5000008
&lndocid=SERV-CALL.

118 System x3200 M3 Types 7327 and 7328: Problem Determination and Service Guide
Table 5. DSA Preboot messages (continued)
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is solved.
v See Chapter 4, “Parts listing, System x3200 M3 Types 7327 and 7328,” on page 133 to determine which components are
customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a Trained
service technician.
v Go to the IBM support Web site at http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/ to check for technical information, hints, tips,
and new device drivers or to submit a request for information.
Message
number Component Test State Description Action
217-901-xxx SAS/SATA Disk Drive Test Failed 1. Reseat all hard disk drive backplane
Hard Drive connections at both ends.
2. Reseat the all drives.
3. Run the test again.
4. Make sure that the firmware is at the
latest level.
5. Run the test again.
6. If the failure remains, go to the IBM
Web site for more troubleshooting
information at http://www.ibm.com/
systems/support/supportsite.wss/
docdisplay?brandind=5000008
&lndocid=SERV-CALL.
405-901-xxx Intel Ethernet Test Control Failed 1. Make sure that the component
Device Registers firmware is at the latest level. The
installed firmware level is shown in
the DSA event log in the
Firmware/VPD section for this
component. For more information, see
“Updating the firmware” on page 221.
2. Run the test again.
3. Replace the component that is
causing the error. If the error is
caused by an adapter, replace the
adapter. Check the PCI Information
and Network Settings information in
the DSA event log to determine the
physical location of the failing
component.
4. If the failure remains, go to the IBM
Web site for more troubleshooting
information at http://www.ibm.com/
systems/support/supportsite.wss/
docdisplay?brandind=5000008
&lndocid=SERV-CALL.

Chapter 3. Diagnostics 119


Table 5. DSA Preboot messages (continued)
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is solved.
v See Chapter 4, “Parts listing, System x3200 M3 Types 7327 and 7328,” on page 133 to determine which components are
customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a Trained
service technician.
v Go to the IBM support Web site at http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/ to check for technical information, hints, tips,
and new device drivers or to submit a request for information.
Message
number Component Test State Description Action
405-901-xxx Intel Ethernet Test MII Registers Failed 1. Make sure that the component
Device firmware is at the latest level. The
installed firmware level is shown in
the DSA event log in the
Firmware/VPD section for this
component. For more information, see
“Updating the firmware” on page 221.
2. Run the test again.
3. Replace the component that is
causing the error. If the error is
caused by an adapter, replace the
adapter. Check the PCI Information
and Network Settings information in
the DSA event log to determine the
physical location of the failing
component.
4. If the failure remains, go to the IBM
Web site for more troubleshooting
information at http://www.ibm.com/
systems/support/supportsite.wss/
docdisplay?brandind=5000008
&lndocid=SERV-CALL.
405-902-xxx Intel Ethernet Test EEPROM Failed 1. Make sure that the component
Device firmware is at the latest level. The
installed firmware level is shown in
the DSA event log in the
Firmware/VPD section for this
component. For more information, see
“Updating the firmware” on page 221.
2. Run the test again.
3. Replace the component that is
causing the error. If the error is
caused by an adapter, replace the
adapter. Check the PCI Information
and Network Settings information in
the DSA event log to determine the
physical location of the failing
component.
4. If the failure remains, go to the IBM
Web site for more troubleshooting
information at http://www.ibm.com/
systems/support/supportsite.wss/
docdisplay?brandind=5000008
&lndocid=SERV-CALL.

120 System x3200 M3 Types 7327 and 7328: Problem Determination and Service Guide
Table 5. DSA Preboot messages (continued)
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is solved.
v See Chapter 4, “Parts listing, System x3200 M3 Types 7327 and 7328,” on page 133 to determine which components are
customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a Trained
service technician.
v Go to the IBM support Web site at http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/ to check for technical information, hints, tips,
and new device drivers or to submit a request for information.
Message
number Component Test State Description Action
405-903-xxx Intel Ethernet Test Internal Failed 1. Make sure that the component
Device Memory firmware is at the latest level. The
installed firmware level is shown in
the DSA event log in the
Firmware/VPD section for this
component. For more information, see
“Updating the firmware” on page 221.
2. Run the test again.
3. Check the interrupt assignments in
the PCI Hardware section of the DSA
event log. If the Ethernet device is
sharing interrupts, if possible, use the
Setup utility see “Using the Setup
utility” on page 225) to assign a
unique interrupt to the device.
4. Replace the component that is
causing the error. If the error is
caused by an adapter, replace the
adapter. Check the PCI Information
and Network Settings information in
the DSA event log to determine the
physical location of the failing
component.
5. If the failure remains, go to the IBM
Web site for more troubleshooting
information at http://www.ibm.com/
systems/support/supportsite.wss/
docdisplay?brandind=5000008
&lndocid=SERV-CALL.

Chapter 3. Diagnostics 121


Table 5. DSA Preboot messages (continued)
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is solved.
v See Chapter 4, “Parts listing, System x3200 M3 Types 7327 and 7328,” on page 133 to determine which components are
customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a Trained
service technician.
v Go to the IBM support Web site at http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/ to check for technical information, hints, tips,
and new device drivers or to submit a request for information.
Message
number Component Test State Description Action
405-904-xxx Intel Ethernet Test Interrupt Failed 1. Make sure that the component
Device firmware is at the latest level. The
installed firmware level is shown in
the DSA event log in the
Firmware/VPD section for this
component. For more information, see
“Updating the firmware” on page 221.
2. Run the test again.
3. Check the interrupt assignments in
the PCI Hardware section of the DSA
event log. If the Ethernet device is
sharing interrupts, if possible, use the
Setup utility see “Using the Setup
utility” on page 225) to assign a
unique interrupt to the device.
4. Replace the component that is
causing the error. If the error is
caused by an adapter, replace the
adapter. Check the PCI Information
and Network Settings information in
the DSA event log to determine the
physical location of the failing
component.
5. If the failure remains, go to the IBM
Web site for more troubleshooting
information at http://www.ibm.com/
systems/support/supportsite.wss/
docdisplay?brandind=5000008
&lndocid=SERV-CALL.

122 System x3200 M3 Types 7327 and 7328: Problem Determination and Service Guide
Table 5. DSA Preboot messages (continued)
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is solved.
v See Chapter 4, “Parts listing, System x3200 M3 Types 7327 and 7328,” on page 133 to determine which components are
customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a Trained
service technician.
v Go to the IBM support Web site at http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/ to check for technical information, hints, tips,
and new device drivers or to submit a request for information.
Message
number Component Test State Description Action
405-906-xxx Intel Ethernet Test Loop back at Failed 1. Check the Ethernet cable for damage
Device Physical Layer and make sure that the cable type
and connection are correct.
2. Make sure that the component
firmware is at the latest level. The
installed firmware level is shown in
the DSA event log in the
Firmware/VPD section for this
component. For more information, see
“Updating the firmware” on page 221.
3. Run the test again.
4. Replace the component that is
causing the error. If the error is
caused by an adapter, replace the
adapter. Check the PCI Information
and Network Settings information in
the DSA event log to determine the
physical location of the failing
component.
5. If the failure remains, go to the IBM
Web site for more troubleshooting
information at http://www.ibm.com/
systems/support/supportsite.wss/
docdisplay?brandind=5000008
&lndocid=SERV-CALL.
405-907-xxx Intel Ethernet Test Loop back at Failed 1. Make sure that the component
Device MAC-Layer firmware is at the latest level. The
installed firmware level is shown in
the DSA event log in the
Firmware/VPD section for this
component. For more information, see
“Updating the firmware” on page 221.
2. Run the test again.
3. Replace the component that is
causing the error. If the error is
caused by an adapter, replace the
adapter. Check the PCI Information
and Network Settings information in
the DSA event log to determine the
physical location of the failing
component.
4. If the failure remains, go to the IBM
Web site for more troubleshooting
information at http://www.ibm.com/
systems/support/supportsite.wss/
docdisplay?brandind=5000008
&lndocid=SERV-CALL.

Chapter 3. Diagnostics 123


Table 5. DSA Preboot messages (continued)
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is solved.
v See Chapter 4, “Parts listing, System x3200 M3 Types 7327 and 7328,” on page 133 to determine which components are
customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a Trained
service technician.
v Go to the IBM support Web site at http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/ to check for technical information, hints, tips,
and new device drivers or to submit a request for information.
Message
number Component Test State Description Action
405-908-xxx Intel Ethernet Test LEDs Failed 1. Make sure that the component
Device firmware is at the latest level. The
installed firmware level is shown in
the DSA event log in the
Firmware/VPD section for this
component. For more information, see
“Updating the firmware” on page 221.
2. Run the test again.
3. Replace the component that is
causing the error. If the error is
caused by an adapter, replace the
adapter. Check the PCI Information
and Network Settings information in
the DSA event log to determine the
physical location of the failing
component.
4. If the failure remains, go to the IBM
Web site for more troubleshooting
information at http://www.ibm.com/
systems/support/supportsite.wss/
docdisplay?brandind=5000008
&lndocid=SERV-CALL.

Recovering the server firmware


Important: Some cluster solutions require specific code levels or coordinated code
updates. If the device is part of a cluster solution, verify that the latest level of code
is supported for the cluster solution before you update the code.

If the server firmware has become corrupted, such as from a power failure during
an update, you can recover the server firmware in one of two ways:
v In-band method: Recover server firmware, using either the boot block jumper
(Automated Boot Recovery) and a server Firmware Update Package Service
Pack.
v Out-of-band method: Use the IMM Web Interface to update the firmware, using
the latest server firmware update package.

Note: You can obtain a server update package from one of the following sources:
v Download the server firmware update from the World Wide Web.
v Contact your IBM service representative.

To download the server firmware update package from the World Wide Web,
complete the following steps.

Note: Changes are made periodically to the IBM Web site. The actual procedure
might vary slightly from what is described in this document.

124 System x3200 M3 Types 7327 and 7328: Problem Determination and Service Guide
1. Go to http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/.
2. Under Product support, click System x.
3. Under Popular links, click Software and device drivers.
4. Click System x3200 M3 to display the matrix of downloadable files for the
server.
5. Download the latest server firmware update.

The flash memory of the server consists of a primary bank and a backup bank. It is
essential that you maintain the backup bank with a bootable firmware image. If the
primary bank becomes corrupted, you can either manually boot the backup bank
with the boot block jumper, or in the case of image corruption, this will occur
automatically with the Automated Boot Recovery function.

In-band manual recovery method

To recover the server firmware and restore the server operation to the primary
bank, complete the following steps:
1. Read the safety information that begins on page vii and “Handling
static-sensitive devices” on page 144.
2. Turn off the server, and disconnect all power cords and external cables.
3. Unlock and remove the server cover. See “Removing the side cover” on page
145 for more information.
4. Locate the boot block jumper (JP6) on the system board.

Trusted Platform Module (TPM) Boot block Clear CMOS


jumper (J31) jumper (JP6) jumper (JP1)

5. Move the jumper from pins 1 and 2 to pins 2 and 3 to enable the UEFI
recovery mode.
6. Reinstall the server cover (see “Installing the side cover” on page 146); then,
reconnect all power cords.

Chapter 3. Diagnostics 125


7. Restart the server. The power-on self-test (POST) starts.
8. Boot the server to an operating system that is supported by the firmware
update package that you downloaded.
9. Perform the firmware update by following the instructions that are in the
firmware update package readme file.
10. Copy the downloaded firmware update package into a directory.
11. From a command line, type filename-s, where filename is the name of the
executable file that you downloaded with the firmware update package.
12. Turn off the server and disconnect all power cords and external cables, and
then remove the server cover.
13. Move the UEFI boot recovery jumper back to the primary position (pins 1 and
2).
14. Reinstall the server cover, and then reconnect all the power cables.
15. Restart the server.

See “System-board jumpers and switches” on page 20 for a description of the


jumpers and switches.

In-band automated boot recovery method

Note: Use this method if the System board error LED is lit and there is a log entry
or Booting Backup Image is displayed on the firmware splash screen; otherwise,
use the in-band manual recovery method.
1. Boot the server to an operating system that is supported by the firmware update
package that you downloaded.
2. Perform the firmware update by following the instructions that are in the
firmware update package readme file.
3. Restart the server.
4. At the firmware splash screen, press F3 when prompted to restore to the
primary bank. The server boots from the primary bank.

Out-of-band method: See the IMM documentation.

Automated boot recovery (ABR)


If the server is booting up and the IMM detect problems with the server firmware in
the primary bank, it will automatically switch to the backup firmware bank and give
you the opportunity to recover the primary bank. To recover to the server firmware
primary bank, complete the following steps.
1. Restart the server.
2. When the prompt press F3 to restore to primary is displayed, press F3 to
recover the primary bank. Pressing F3 will restart the server.

Three boot failure


Configuration changes, such as added devices or adapter firmware updates can
cause the server to fail POST (power-on self-test). If this occurs on three
consecutive boot attempts, the server will temporarily use the default configuration
values and automatically goes to F1 Setup. To solve the problem, complete the
following steps:
1. Undo any configuration changes that you made recently and restart the server.
2. Remove any devices that you added recently and restart the server.

126 System x3200 M3 Types 7327 and 7328: Problem Determination and Service Guide
3. If the problem remains, go to Setup and select Load Default Settings, and
then click Save to restore the server factory settings.

Chapter 3. Diagnostics 127


Solving SCSI problems
Note: This information also applies to Serial Attached SCSI (SAS) problems.

For any SCSI error message, one or more of the following devices might be
causing the problem:
v A failing SCSI device (adapter, drive, or controller)
v An incorrect SCSI termination jumper setting
v A missing or incorrectly installed SCSI terminator
v A defective SCSI terminator
v An incorrectly installed cable
v A defective cable

For any SCSI error message, follow these suggested actions in the order in which
they are listed until the problem is solved:
1. Make sure that external SCSI devices are turned on before you turn on the
server.
2. Make sure that the cables for all external SCSI devices are connected correctly.
3. If an external SCSI device is attached, make sure that the external SCSI
termination is set to automatic.
4. Make sure that the last device in each SCSI chain is terminated correctly.
5. Make sure that the SCSI devices are configured correctly.

Solving power problems


Power problems can be difficult to solve. For example, a short circuit can exist
anywhere on any of the power distribution buses. Usually, a short circuit will cause
the power subsystem to shut down because of an overcurrent condition. To
diagnose a power problem, use the following general procedure:
1. Turn off the server and disconnect all ac power cords.
2. Check for loose cables in the power subsystem. Also check for short circuits, for
example, if a loose screw is causing a short circuit on a circuit board.
3. Remove the adapters and disconnect the cables and power cords to all internal
and external devices until the server is at the minimum configuration that is
required for the server to start (see “Solving undetermined problems” on page
130 for the minimum configuration).
4. Reconnect all ac power cords and turn on the server. If the server starts
successfully, replace the adapters and devices one at a time until the problem is
isolated.

If the server does not start from the minimum configuration, replace the components
in the minimum configuration one at a time until the problem is isolated.

128 System x3200 M3 Types 7327 and 7328: Problem Determination and Service Guide
Solving Ethernet controller problems
The method that you use to test the Ethernet controller depends on which operating
system you are using. See the operating-system documentation for information
about Ethernet controllers, and see the Ethernet controller device-driver readme file.

Note: The Ethernet controller can be installed only in its dedicated connector, PCI
slot 3.

Try the following procedures:


v Make sure that the correct device drivers, which come with the server, are
installed and that they are at the latest level.
v Make sure that the Ethernet cable is installed correctly.
– The cable must be securely attached at all connections. If the cable is
attached but the problem remains, try a different cable.
– If you set the Ethernet controller to operate at 100 Mbps, you must use
Category 5 cabling.
– If you directly connect two servers (without a hub), or if you are not using a
hub with X ports, use a crossover cable. To determine whether a hub has an
X port, check the port label. If the label contains an X, the hub has an X port.
v Determine whether the hub supports auto-negotiation. If it does not, try
configuring the integrated Ethernet controller manually to match the speed and
duplex mode of the hub.
v Check the Ethernet controller LEDs on the rear panel of the server. These LEDs
indicate whether there is a problem with the connector, cable, or hub.
– The Ethernet link status LED is lit when the Ethernet controller receives a link
pulse from the hub. If the LED is off, there might be a defective connector or
cable or a problem with the hub.
– The Ethernet transmit/receive activity LED is lit when the Ethernet controller
sends or receives data over the Ethernet network. If the Ethernet
transmit/receive activity light is off, make sure that the hub and network are
operating and that the correct device drivers are installed.
v Check the LAN activity LED on the rear of the server. The LAN activity LED is lit
when data is active on the Ethernet network. If the LAN activity LED is off, make
sure that the hub and network are operating and that the correct device drivers
are installed.
v Check for operating-system-specific causes of the problem.
v Make sure that the device drivers on the client and server are using the same
protocol.

If the Ethernet controller still cannot connect to the network but the hardware
appears to be working, the network administrator must investigate other possible
causes of the error.

Chapter 3. Diagnostics 129


Solving undetermined problems
If the diagnostic tests did not diagnose the failure or if the server is inoperative, use
the information in this section.

If you suspect that a software problem is causing failures (continuous or


intermittent), see “Software problems” on page 67.

Damaged data in CMOS memory or damaged server firmware can cause


undetermined problems. To reset the CMOS data, use the clear CMOS jumber to
clear the CMOS memory; see “System-board jumpers and switches” on page 20. If
you suspect that the server firmware is damaged, see “Recovering the server
firmware” on page 124.

Check the LEDs on all the power supplies. If the LEDs indicate that the power
supplies are working correctly, complete the following steps:
1. Turn off the server.
2. Make sure that the server is cabled correctly.
3. Remove or disconnect the following devices, one at a time, until you find the
failure. Turn on the server and reconfigure it each time.
v Any external devices.
v Surge-suppressor device (on the server).
v Modem, printer, mouse, and non-IBM devices.
v Each adapter.
v Hard disk drives.
v Memory modules. The minimum configuration requirement is one 1 GB DIMM
on the system board.

The following minimum configuration is required for the server to start:


v One microprocessor
v One 1 GB DIMM on the system board
v One power supply
v Power cord
v ServeRAID SAS/SATA adapter
v System board
4. Turn on the server. If the problem remains, suspect the following components in
the following order:
a. Memory module
b. Microprocessor
c. System board

If the problem is solved when you remove an adapter from the server but the
problem recurs when you reinstall the same adapter, suspect the adapter; if the
problem recurs when you replace the adapter with a different one, suspect the
system board.

If you suspect a networking problem and the server passes all the system tests,
suspect a network cabling problem that is external to the server.

130 System x3200 M3 Types 7327 and 7328: Problem Determination and Service Guide
Problem determination tips
Because of the variety of hardware and software combinations that can encounter,
use the following information to assist you in problem determination. If possible,
have this information available when requesting assistance from IBM.

The model number and serial number of the server are located on the bottom on
the right side of the bezel, as shown in the following illustration.

Model number
and serial number

v Machine type and model


v Microprocessor or hard disk drive upgrades
v Failure symptom
– Does the server fail the diagnostic tests?
– What occurs? When? Where?
– Does the failure occur on a single server or on multiple servers?
– Is the failure repeatable?
– Has this configuration ever worked?
– What changes, if any, were made before the configuration failed?
– Is this the original reported failure?
v Diagnostic program type and version level
v Hardware configuration (print screen of the system summary)
v IMM firmware level
v Operating system software

You can solve some problems by comparing the configuration and software setups
between working and nonworking servers. When you compare servers to each
other for diagnostic purposes, consider them identical only if all the following factors
are exactly the same in all the servers:
v Machine type and model
v IMM firmware level

Chapter 3. Diagnostics 131


v Adapters and attachments, in the same locations
v Address jumpers, terminators, and cabling
v Software versions and levels
v Diagnostic program type and version level
v Configuration option settings
v Operating-system control-file setup

See Appendix A, “Getting help and technical assistance,” on page 245 for
information about calling IBM for service.

132 System x3200 M3 Types 7327 and 7328: Problem Determination and Service Guide
Chapter 4. Parts listing, System x3200 M3 Types 7327 and
7328
The following replaceable components are available for all models of the System
x3200 M3 Types 7327 and 7328 server, except as specified otherwise in Table 6 on
page 134. For an updated parts listing on the Web, complete the following steps.

Note: Changes are made periodically to the IBM Web site. The actual procedure
might vary slightly from what is described in this document.
1. Go to http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/.
2. Under Product support, click System x.
3. Under Popular links, click Parts documents lookup.
4. From the Product family menu, select System x3200 M3, and click Continue.

Replaceable server components


The four types of replaceable components are:
v Consumables: Purchase and replacement of consumables (components, such
as batteries and printer cartridges, that have depleting life) is your responsibility.
If IBM acquires or installs a consumable component at your request, you will be
charged for the service.
v Tier 1 customer replaceable unit (CRU): Replacement of Tier 1 CRUs is your
responsibility. If IBM installs a Tier 1 CRU at your request, you will be charged for
the installation.
v Tier 2 customer replaceable unit: You may install a Tier 2 CRU yourself or
request IBM to install it, at no additional charge, under the type of warranty
service that is designated for your server.
v Field replaceable unit (FRU): FRUs must be installed only by trained service
technicians.

For information about the terms of the warranty and getting service and assistance,
see the Warranty Information document that comes with the server.

The following illustration shows the major components in the server. The
illustrations in this document might differ slightly from your hardware.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2011 133


1

2
21
3

20
18
4
19

5
6

12 11 10
14 13 8
15 9
16
17

Table 6. Parts listing, Types 7327 and 7328


CRU part CRU part
number number FRU part
Index Description (Tier 1) (Tier 2) number
1 Chassis assembly 49Y8457
2 Operator Information Panel Assembly 49Y8456
3 Front USB connector assembly 49Y8449
4 DVD-RAM Drive, SATA (half high) 43W8467
4 DVD-ROM Drive, SATA 43W8466
5 Bezel Kit 13N2450
6 Bezel, upper 49Y8453
7 Bezel, lower 49Y8454
8 Hard disk drive, SATA, 3.5- inch 250 GB, 39M4511
fixed/simple-swap, with tray (optional)
8 Hard disk drive, SATA, 3.5-inch 500 GB, 39M4517
fixed/simple-swap, with tray (optional)
8 Hard disk drive, 160 GB (optional) 39M4525
8 Hard disk drive, 250 GB SATA (optional) 39M4529
8 Hard disk drive, SATA, 3.5- inch 750 GB, 43W7575
fixed/simple-swap, with tray (optional)
8 Hard disk drive, SATA, 3.5-inch 500 GB, 10K, hot-swap, 39M4533
with tray (optional)
8 Hard disk drive, SATA, 3.5-inch 750 GB, 10K, hot-swap, 43W7579
with tray (optional)
8 Hard disk drive, SAS, 3.5-inch 146 GB, 15K, hot-swap, 39R7350
with tray (optional)
9 Retention bracket (front), adapter 13N2993
10 Hard disk drive cage, 3.5-inch drives 49Y8451
10 Hard disk drive cage, 2.5-inch drives 49Y8460

134 System x3200 M3 Types 7327 and 7328: Problem Determination and Service Guide
Table 6. Parts listing, Types 7327 and 7328 (continued)
CRU part CRU part
number number FRU part
Index Description (Tier 1) (Tier 2) number
11 SAS/SATA hard disk drive backplane (for 3.5-inch drive 49Y4462
cage)
11 SATA backplate, simple-swap 25R8842
12 Hard disk drive fan assembly (for 3.5-inch drive cage) 39Y9860
13 System board assembly 81Y6747
14 ServeRAID-BR10il v2 SAS/SATA controller 49Y4737
15 Microprocessor, Celeron 2.26 GHz, 1066 MHz-2MB 49Y4645
15 Microprocessor, Xeon L3406 2.26 GHz, 1066 MHz-4MB, 69Y5220
2C
15 Microprocessor, Xeon 2.67 GHz, 1066MHz-3MB 59Y3175
15 Microprocessor, Xeon 2.8 GHz, 1333MHz-4MB 49Y4646
15 Microprocessor, Xeon X3480 3.06 GHz, 1333 MHz-8MB, 69Y5222
4C
15 Microprocessor, Xeon 2.93 GHz, 1333Mhz-4MB 59Y3176
15 Microprocessor, Xeon 2.93 GHz, 1333 MHz-9MB 46C6775
Processor
15 Microprocessor, Xeon 2.4 GHz, 1333 MHz-8MB, 4C, 49Y4647
(models C2x and C2Y)
15 Microprocessor, Xeon 2.53 GHz, 1333 MHz-8MB, 4C, 49Y4648
(models 42x and 42Y)
15 Microprocessor, Xeon 2.67 GHz, 1333 MHz-8MB, 4C, 49Y4649
(models 52x and 52Y)
15 Microprocessor, Xeon 2.8 GHz, 1333 MHz-8MB, 4C, 49Y4668
(models 62x and 62Y)
15 Microprocessor, Core-i3 550 3.2 GHz, 1066 MHz-4MB, 2C 69Y5221
16 Fan sink 49Y8390
17 Side cover with lock 49Y8447
18 Retention bracket (rear), adapter 49Y8450
19 Power supply, non-redundant 401 watt 46M6678
19 Power supply, redundant, 430 watt 46M6679
20 Memory, 1 GB single-rank PC3-10600R-999 DDR3 ECC 44T1490
RDIMM
20 Memory, 1 GB 1Rx8 1Gbit UDIMM 44T1572
20 Memory, 2 GB dual-rank PC3-10600R-999 DDR3 ECC 44T1491
RDIMM
20 Memory, 4 GB dual-rank PC3-10600R-999 DDR3 ECC 44T1598
RDIMM
20 Memory, 8 GB 4Rx8 2Gbit RDIMM 46C7488
20 Memory, 2 GB dual-rank PC3-10600R-999 DDR3 ECC 44T1573
UDIMM
20 Memory, 4 GB 2Rx8 2Gbit UDIMM 44T1575
20 Memory, 4 GB quad-rank 1 Gbit DDR3-1066 RDIMM 46C7452

Chapter 4. Parts listing, System x3200 M3 Types 7327 and 7328 135
Table 6. Parts listing, Types 7327 and 7328 (continued)
CRU part CRU part
number number FRU part
Index Description (Tier 1) (Tier 2) number
21 System fan, rear 49Y8445
Adapter, 3U SCSI (without battery) 43W4297
Adapter, QLogic 10 Gb Dual-Port CNA 42C1802
Adapter, Pro/1K PF Server 42C1752
Backplane, P3 43V7070
Battery, 3.0 volt 33F8354
Bezel, accent 39R9373
Bezel, filler 39R9372
Bezel, filler 42C8942
Bezel, rack assembly 42C8943
Bracket, EIA 39Y9758
Ethernet Adapter, NetXtreme II 1000 Express Dual Port 49Y4205
Ethernet Adapter, NetXtreme II 1000 Express Quad Port 49Y4222
Ethernet Adapter, NetXtreme II 1000 Express 39Y6070
Ethernet Adapter, PRO/1K PT DP Srv 39Y6128
Ethernet Adapter, PRO/1K PT QP 39Y6138
ServeRAID-MR10i adapter 43W4296
ServeRAID-MR10is VAULT adapter 44E8695
ServerRAID-M1015 SAS/SATA adapter 46M0861
Cable, backplane configuration (3.5-inch hot-swap hard 49Y8448
disk drive)
Cable, backplane Configuration, 650mm 49Y7273
Cable, interposer 49Y7275
Cable, SAS signal (3.5-inch hot-swap hard disk drive) 46M6498
Cable, SATA signal (3.5-inch simple-swap hard disk drive) 49Y8444
Cable 1Mx4 SAS-Mini 39R6530
Cable 3Mx4 SAS-Mini 39R6532
Cable, optical disk drive/tape drive 25R5635
Cable, USB FRU 81Y3643
Cable management arm 39Y9761
Chassis, rack 39Y9760
Cover, bottom 39R9363
Cover, side/top cover 49Y8446
DASD duck 39Y9860
EMC shield 49Y8455
EMC shield kit, optical disk drive/tape drive 13N2997
Fan duck assembly, 8x2.5-inch 49Y8461
Feet, chassis 13N2985
Filler, SAS 3.5-inch 39M4375

136 System x3200 M3 Types 7327 and 7328: Problem Determination and Service Guide
Table 6. Parts listing, Types 7327 and 7328 (continued)
CRU part CRU part
number number FRU part
Index Description (Tier 1) (Tier 2) number
Hard disk drive carrier, 3.5-inch simple-swap 42C7495
Hard disk drive shield 44X0388
Hardware, misc. 39Y9837
Keyboard, US 42C0060
Keylock, keyed-alike 26K7363
Keylock, keyed-random 26K7364
Kit, Retainer (for optical and diskette drives) 39R9369
Power supply unit adapter 42C7509
Miscellaneous parts kit 39Y9773
Mouse, 2-button 39Y9875
Mouse, optical, 3-button (optional) 40K9203
Power supply cage, 430 watt 49Y8459
Retention module (for fan sink) 49Y8458
System service label 49Y8452
Tape drive, IBM half-high LTO Gen 4 SAS (optional) 45E1125
Tray assembly, 1 TB hot-swap hard disk 43W7629
USB hypervisor key 44M2234
Virtual media key 46C7532

Chapter 4. Parts listing, System x3200 M3 Types 7327 and 7328 137
Power cords
For your safety, IBM provides a power cord with a grounded attachment plug to use
with this IBM product. To avoid electrical shock, always use the power cord and
plug with a properly grounded outlet.

IBM power cords used in the United States and Canada are listed by Underwriter's
Laboratories (UL) and certified by the Canadian Standards Association (CSA).

For units intended to be operated at 115 volts: Use a UL-listed and CSA-certified
cord set consisting of a minimum 18 AWG, Type SVT or SJT, three-conductor cord,
a maximum of 15 feet in length and a parallel blade, grounding-type attachment
plug rated 15 amperes, 125 volts.

For units intended to be operated at 230 volts (U.S.): Use a UL-listed and
CSA-certified cord set consisting of a minimum 18 AWG, Type SVT or SJT,
three-conductor cord, a maximum of 15 feet in length and a tandem blade,
grounding-type attachment plug rated 15 amperes, 250 volts.

For units intended to be operated at 230 volts (outside the U.S.): Use a cord set
with a grounding-type attachment plug. The cord set should have the appropriate
safety approvals for the country in which the equipment will be installed.

IBM power cords for a specific country or region are usually available only in that
country or region.

IBM power cord part


number Used in these countries and regions
39M5206 China
39M5102 Australia, Fiji, Kiribati, Nauru, New Zealand, Papua New Guinea
39M5123 Afghanistan, Albania, Algeria, Andorra, Angola, Armenia, Austria,
Azerbaijan, Belarus, Belgium, Benin, Bosnia and Herzegovina,
Bulgaria, Burkina Faso, Burundi, Cambodia, Cameroon, Cape
Verde, Central African Republic, Chad, Comoros, Congo
(Democratic Republic of), Congo (Republic of), Cote D’Ivoire
(Ivory Coast), Croatia (Republic of), Czech Republic, Dahomey,
Djibouti, Egypt, Equatorial Guinea, Eritrea, Estonia, Ethiopia,
Finland, France, French Guyana, French Polynesia, Germany,
Greece, Guadeloupe, Guinea, Guinea Bissau, Hungary, Iceland,
Indonesia, Iran, Kazakhstan, Kyrgyzstan, Laos (People’s
Democratic Republic of), Latvia, Lebanon, Lithuania, Luxembourg,
Macedonia (former Yugoslav Republic of), Madagascar, Mali,
Martinique, Mauritania, Mauritius, Mayotte, Moldova (Republic of),
Monaco, Mongolia, Morocco, Mozambique, Netherlands, New
Caledonia, Niger, Norway, Poland, Portugal, Reunion, Romania,
Russian Federation, Rwanda, Sao Tome and Principe, Saudi
Arabia, Senegal, Serbia, Slovakia, Slovenia (Republic of),
Somalia, Spain, Suriname, Sweden, Syrian Arab Republic,
Tajikistan, Tahiti, Togo, Tunisia, Turkey, Turkmenistan, Ukraine,
Upper Volta, Uzbekistan, Vanuatu, Vietnam, Wallis and Futuna,
Yugoslavia (Federal Republic of), Zaire
39M5130 Denmark
39M5144 Bangladesh, Lesotho, Macao, Maldives, Namibia, Nepal,
Pakistan, Samoa, South Africa, Sri Lanka, Swaziland, Uganda

138 System x3200 M3 Types 7327 and 7328: Problem Determination and Service Guide
IBM power cord part
number Used in these countries and regions
39M5151 Abu Dhabi, Bahrain, Botswana, Brunei Darussalam, Channel
Islands, China (Hong Kong S.A.R.), Cyprus, Dominica, Gambia,
Ghana, Grenada, Iraq, Ireland, Jordan, Kenya, Kuwait, Liberia,
Malawi, Malaysia, Malta, Myanmar (Burma), Nigeria, Oman,
Polynesia, Qatar, Saint Kitts and Nevis, Saint Lucia, Saint Vincent
and the Grenadines, Seychelles, Sierra Leone, Singapore, Sudan,
Tanzania (United Republic of), Trinidad and Tobago, United Arab
Emirates (Dubai), United Kingdom, Yemen, Zambia, Zimbabwe
39M5158 Liechtenstein, Switzerland
39M5165 Chile, Italy, Libyan Arab Jamahiriya
39M5172 Israel
39M5095 220 - 240 V Antigua and Barbuda, Aruba, Bahamas, Barbados, Belize,
Bermuda, Bolivia, Brazil, Caicos Islands, Canada, Cayman
Islands, Costa Rica, Colombia, Cuba, Dominican Republic,
Ecuador, El Salvador, Guam, Guatemala, Haiti, Honduras,
Jamaica, Japan, Mexico, Micronesia (Federal States of),
Netherlands Antilles, Nicaragua, Panama, Peru, Philippines,
Taiwan, United States of America, Venezuela
39M5081 110 - 120 V Antigua and Barbuda, Aruba, Bahamas, Barbados, Belize,
Bermuda, Bolivia, Brazil, Caicos Islands, Canada, Cayman
Islands, Costa Rica, Colombia, Cuba, Dominican Republic,
Ecuador, El Salvador, Guam, Guatemala, Haiti, Honduras,
Jamaica, Japan, Mexico, Micronesia (Federal States of),
Netherlands Antilles, Nicaragua, Panama, Peru, Philippines,
Taiwan, United States of America, Venezuela
39M5219 Korea (Democratic People’s Republic of), Korea (Republic of)
39M5199 Japan
39M5068 Argentina, Paraguay, Uruguay
39M5226 India
39M5233 Brazil

Chapter 4. Parts listing, System x3200 M3 Types 7327 and 7328 139
140 System x3200 M3 Types 7327 and 7328: Problem Determination and Service Guide
Chapter 5. Removing and replacing server components
Replaceable components are of three types:
v Tier 1 customer replaceable unit (CRU): Replacement of Tier 1 CRUs is your
responsibility. If IBM installs a Tier 1 CRU at your request, you will be charged for
the installation.
v Tier 2 customer replaceable unit: You may install a Tier 2 CRU yourself or
request IBM to install it, at no additional charge, under the type of warranty
service that is designated for your server.
v Field replaceable unit (FRU): FRUs must be installed only by trained service
technicians.

See Chapter 4, “Parts listing, System x3200 M3 Types 7327 and 7328,” on page
133 to determine whether a component is a Tier 1 CRU, Tier 2 CRU, or FRU.

For information about the terms of the warranty and getting service and assistance,
see the Warranty Information document that comes with the server.

Installation guidelines
Attention:
v Static electricity that is released to internal server components when the server is
powered-on might cause the system to halt, which might result in the loss of
data. To avoid this potential problem, always use an electrostatic-discharge wrist
strap or other grounding system when removing or installing a hot-swap device.
v This product is not intended to be connected directly or indirectly by any means
whatsoever to interfaces of public telecommunications networks, neither to be
used in Public Services Network.

Before you remove or replace a component, read the following information:


v Read the safety information that begins on page vii and the guidelines in
“Handling static-sensitive devices” on page 144. This information will help you
work safely.
v When you install your new server, take the opportunity to download and apply
the most recent firmware updates. This step will help to ensure that any known
issues are addressed and that your server is ready to function at maximum levels
of performance. To download firmware updates for your server, complete the
following steps.

Note: Changes are made periodically to the IBM Web site. The actual procedure
might vary slightly from what is described in this document.
1. Go to http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/.
2. Under Product support, click System x.
3. Under Popular links, click Software and device drivers.
4. Click IBM System x3200 M3 to display the matrix of downloadable files for
the server.
For additional information about tools for updating, managing, and deploying
firmware, see the System x and BladeCenter Tools Center at
http://publib.boulder.ibm.com/infocenter/toolsctr/v1r0/index.jsp
v Before you install optional devices, make sure that the server is working
correctly. Start the server, and make sure that the operating system starts, if an

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2011 141


operating system is installed, or that a 19990305 error code is displayed,
indicating that an operating system was not found but the server is otherwise
working correctly. If the server is not working correctly, see Chapter 1, “Start
here,” on page 1 and Chapter 3, “Diagnostics,” on page 23 for diagnostic
information.
v Observe good housekeeping in the area where you are working. Place removed
covers and other parts in a safe place.
v If you must start the server while the cover is removed, make sure that no one is
near the server and that no other objects have been left inside the server.
v Do not attempt to lift an object that you think is too heavy for you. If you have to
lift a heavy object, observe the following precautions:
– Make sure that you stand safely without slipping.
– Distribute the weight of the object equally between your feet.
– Use a slow lifting force. Never move suddenly or twist when you lift a heavy
object.
– To avoid straining the muscles in your back, lift by standing or by pushing up
with your leg muscles
v Make sure that you have an adequate number of properly grounded electrical
outlets for the server, monitor, and other devices.
v Back up all important data before you make changes to disk drives.
v Have a small flat-blade screwdriver, a small Phillips screwdriver, and a T8 torx
screwdriver available.
v You do not have to turn off the server to install or replace hot-swap fans,
hot-swap hard disk drives, hot-plug adapters, or hot-plug Universal Serial Bus
(USB) devices. However, you must turn off the server before performing any
steps that involve removing or installing adapter cables.
v Blue on a component indicates touch points, where you can grip the component
to remove it from or install it in the server, open or close a latch, and so on.
v Orange on a component or an orange label on or near a component indicates
that the component can be hot-swapped, which means that if the server and
operating system support hot-swap capability, you can remove or install the
component while the server is running. (Orange can also indicate touch points on
hot-swap components.) See the instructions for removing or installing a specific
hot-swap component for any additional procedures that you might have to
perform before you remove or install the component.
v When you are finished working on the server, reinstall all safety shields, guards,
labels, and ground wires.
v For a list of supported optional devices for the server, see http://www.ibm.com/
servers/eserver/serverproven/compat/us/.

System reliability guidelines


To help ensure proper cooling and system reliability, make sure that the following
requirements are met:
v Each of the drive bays has a drive or a filler panel and electromagnetic
compatibility (EMC) shield installed in it.
v There is adequate space around the server to allow the server cooling system to
work properly. Leave approximately 50 mm (2 in.) of open space around the front
and rear of the server. Do not place objects in front of the fans. For proper
cooling and airflow, replace the server cover before turning on the server.
Operating the server for extended periods of time (more than 30 minutes) with
the server cover removed might damage server components.

142 System x3200 M3 Types 7327 and 7328: Problem Determination and Service Guide
v You have followed the cabling instructions that come with optional adapters.
v You have replaced a failed fan within 48 hours.
v You have replaced a hot-swap fan within 30 seconds of removal.
v You have replaced a hot-swap drive within 10 minutes of removal.
v You do not run the server without the air baffle installed. Operating the server
without the air baffle might cause the microprocessor or the DIMMs to overheat.
v The microprocessor socket always contains a microprocessor and heat sink.

Chapter 5. Removing and replacing server components 143


Working inside the server with the power on
Attention: Static electricity that is released to internal server components when
the server is powered-on might cause the server to halt, which might result in the
loss of data. To avoid this potential problem, always use an electrostatic-discharge
wrist strap or other grounding system when working inside the server with the
power on.

You might have to have the server turned on while the cover is off, to look at LEDs
or replace hot swap components. Follow these guidelines when you work inside a
server that is turned on:
v Avoid wearing loose-fitting clothing on your forearms. Button long-sleeved shirts
before you work inside the server; do not wear cuff links while you are working
inside the server.
v Do not allow your necktie or scarf to hang inside the server.
v Remove jewelry, such as bracelets, necklaces, rings, and loose-fitting wrist
watches.
v Remove items from your shirt pocket, such as pens and pencils, that might fall
into the server as you lean over it.
v Avoid dropping any metallic objects, such as paper clips, hairpins, and screws,
into the server.

Handling static-sensitive devices


Attention: Static electricity can damage the server and other electronic devices.
To avoid damage, keep static-sensitive devices in their static-protective packages
until you are ready to install them.

To reduce the possibility of damage from electrostatic discharge, observe the


following precautions:
v Limit your movement. Movement can cause static electricity to build up around
you.
v The use of a grounding system is recommended. For example, wear an
electrostatic-discharge wrist strap, if one is available. Always use an
electrostatic-discharge wrist strap or other grounding system when working inside
the server with the power on.
v Handle the device carefully, holding it by its edges or its frame.
v Do not touch solder joints, pins, or exposed circuitry.
v Do not leave the device where others can handle and damage it.
v While the device is still in its static-protective package, touch it to an unpainted
metal part on the outside of the server for at least 2 seconds. This drains static
electricity from the package and from your body.
v Remove the device from its package and install it directly into the server without
setting down the device. If it is necessary to set down the device, put it back into
its static-protective package. Do not place the device on the server cover or on a
metal surface.
v Take additional care when handling devices during cold weather. Heating reduces
indoor humidity and increases static electricity.

Returning a device or component


If you are instructed to return a device or component, follow all packaging
instructions, and use any packaging materials for shipping that are supplied to you.

144 System x3200 M3 Types 7327 and 7328: Problem Determination and Service Guide
Removing and replacing consumable parts and Tier 1 CRUs
Replacement of consumable parts and Tier 1 CRUs is your responsibility. If IBM
installs a consumable part or a Tier 1 CRU at your request, you will be charged for
the installation.

The illustrations in this document might differ slightly from your hardware.

Removing the side cover


Attention: Operating the server for more than 30 minutes with the side cover
removed might damage server components. For proper cooling and airflow, replace
the side cover before you turn on the server.

To remove the side cover, complete the following steps:


1. Read the safety information that begins on page vii and “Installation guidelines”
on page 141.
2. Turn off the server and all attached devices; then, disconnect all power cords
and external cables.
3. Unlock the side cover; then, press the cover-release latch down (as shown in
the illustration); then, remove the cover and set it aside.

Cover-release
latch

Key lock

4. If you are instructed to return the side cover, follow all packaging instructions,
and use any packaging materials for shipping that are supplied to you.

Chapter 5. Removing and replacing server components 145


Installing the side cover
Attention: For proper cooling and airflow, replace the side cover before turning on
the server. Operating the server for extended periods of time (more than 30
minutes) with the side cover removed might damage server components.

To install the side cover, complete the following steps:


1. Make sure that all cables, adapters, and other components are installed and
seated correctly and that you have not left loose tools or parts inside the server.
Also, make sure that all internal cables are correctly routed.
2. If you removed the upper and lower bezels, reinstall them before you replace
the side cover (see “Installing the upper bezel” on page 150 and “Installing the
lower bezel” on page 148).

Important: The cover lock must be in the unlocked (opened) position before
you install the side cover.
3. Position the lip on the bottom edge of the side cover on the ledge on the bottom
of the chassis; then, rotate the cover up to the chassis. Press down on the
cover release latch and push the cover completely closed until it latches
securely into place.

Cover-release
latch

Key lock

4. Lock the side cover.


5. Reconnect the external cables and power cords; then, turn on the attached
devices and turn on the server.

146 System x3200 M3 Types 7327 and 7328: Problem Determination and Service Guide
Removing the lower bezel
When you work with some devices, such as the drives in bays 4 through 7 (or bays
4 through 11 for some 2.5 inch hard disk drive models), you must first remove the
lower bezel to access the devices.

To remove the lower bezel, complete the following steps:


1. Read the safety information that begins on page vii and “Installation guidelines”
on page 141.
2. If you are replacing a non-hot-swap component, turn off the server and all
attached devices; then, disconnect all power cords and external cables.
3. Press the round blue release button on the right side of the lower bezel and
rotate the lower bezel downward to disengage and remove it from the chassis.

4. If you are instructed to return the lower bezel, follow all packaging instructions,
and use any packaging materials for shipping that are supplied to you.

Chapter 5. Removing and replacing server components 147


Installing the lower bezel
To install the lower bezel, complete the following steps:
1. Insert the two bottom tabs on the lower bezel into the corresponding holes in
the front of the chassis.

2. Rotate the top of the lower bezel up to the chassis; then, press the blue release
tab on the right side of the lower bezel and completely close the lower bezel
until it locks securely into place.
3. Reconnect the external cables and power cords; then, turn on the attached
devices and turn on the server.

148 System x3200 M3 Types 7327 and 7328: Problem Determination and Service Guide
Removing the upper bezel
When you work with some devices, such as the drives in bays 1 through 3, you
must first remove the upper bezel to access the devices.

To remove the upper bezel, complete the following steps:


1. Read the safety information that begins on page vii and “Installation guidelines”
on page 141.
2. If you are replacing a non-hot-swap component, turn off the server and all
attached devices; then, disconnect all power cords and external cables.
3. Unlock and remove the side cover (see “Removing the side cover” on page
145).
4. Remove the lower bezel (see “Removing the lower bezel” on page 147).
5. Carefully pull the two bezel clips on the left side of the upper bezel; then, rotate
the upper bezel to the right side of the server to disengage the two right-side
tabs from the chassis.

6. If you are instructed to return the upper bezel, follow all packaging instructions,
and use any packaging materials for shipping that are supplied to you.

Chapter 5. Removing and replacing server components 149


Installing the upper bezel
To install the upper bezel, complete the following steps:
1. Insert the two tabs on the right-side of the upper bezel into the corresponding
holes on the right side of the chassis.

2. Rotate the upper bezel to the left side of the chassis until the bezel clips are
aligned with the corresponding indentations on the left side of the chassis and it
snaps into place.
3. Install the lower bezel (see “Installing the lower bezel” on page 148).
4. Install the side cover (see “Installing the side cover” on page 146).
5. Lock the side cover.
6. Reconnect the external cables and power cords; then, turn on the attached
devices and turn on the server.

150 System x3200 M3 Types 7327 and 7328: Problem Determination and Service Guide
Removing an adapter
To remove an adapter, complete the following steps:
1. Read the safety information that begins on page vii and “Installation guidelines”
on page 141.
2. Turn off the server and all attached devices; then, disconnect all power cords
and external cables.
3. Unlock and remove the side cover (see “Removing the side cover” on page
145).
4. Disconnect any cables from the adapter or any cables that impede access to
the adapter.
5. Open the rear retention bracket.
6. If you are removing a full-length adapter, press on the retaining tab (two blue
pull points) on the left side of the front adapter-retention bracket until the
release lever on the right side of the bracket clicks into place.
7. Remove the expansion-slot screw at the rear of the adapter if any.
8. Carefully grasp the adapter by its top edge or upper corners. And pull the
adapter from the server.
Attention: Expansion-slot covers must be installed in all empty slots. This
maintains the electronic emissions standards of the computer and ensures
proper ventilation of computer components.

Retention
clip

Rear adapter
retention
bracket

Expansion-slot
screw
(Optional) Adapter

Left side
Right side
Front adapter
retention bracket

Chapter 5. Removing and replacing server components 151


9. If you are not replacing the adapter, install an expansion-slot cover in the
expansion-slot opening.
10. If you are instructed to return the adapter, follow all packaging instructions, and
use any packaging materials for shipping that are supplied to you.

Installing an adapter
For information about the types of adapters that the server supports and other
information that you might consider when you install an adapter, see the Installation
and User’s Guide. For the locations of the expansion slots and optional-device
connectors see “System-board optional-devices connectors” on page 18.

Note: If you are installing Intel Ethernet Quad Port Server Adapter I340-T4 (part
number 49Y4240), you can only install the adaptor in slot 1 or slot 2.

To install a replacement adapter, complete the following steps:


1. Check the instructions that come with the adapter for any requirements,
restrictions, or cabling instructions. It might be easier to route cables before
you install the adapter.
2. Follow the instructions that come with the adapter to set jumpers or switches, if
any.
3. Touch the static-protective package that contains the adapter to any unpainted
metal surface on the server. Then, remove the adapter from the
static-protective package. Avoid touching the components and gold-edge
connectors on the adapter.
4. If you are installing a full-length adapter, remove the blue adapter guide (if any)
from the end of the adapter.

Adapter guide

5. Open the rear retention bracket.


6. Carefully grasp the adapter by the top edge or upper corner, and move the
adapter directly from the static-protective package to the expansion slot. Align
the adapter with the expansion slot guides; then, press the adapter firmly into
the expansion slot. For a full-length adapter, make sure that the front edge of
the adapter is correctly seated in the correct slot in the front adapter-retention

152 System x3200 M3 Types 7327 and 7328: Problem Determination and Service Guide
bracket.

Retention
clip

Rear adapter
retention
bracket

Expansion-slot
screw
(Optional) Adapter

Left side
Right side
Front adapter
retention bracket

7. (Optional) Install an expansion-slot screw at the rear of the adapter.


8. If you are installing a full-length adapter, press on the release lever on the right
side of the front adapter-retention bracket to release the retaining tab on the
left side of the bracket.
9. Connect required cables to the adapter. Route cables so that they do not block
the flow of air from the fans.
10. Close the rear retention bracket.
11. Install and lock the side cover (see “Installing the side cover” on page 146).
12. Reconnect the external cables and power cords; then, turn on the attached
devices and turn on the server.

Chapter 5. Removing and replacing server components 153


Removing and installing internal drives
See the Installation and User’s Guide for information about the types of drives that
the server supports and other important information. The following illustrations show
the locations of the drive bays. Some models have seven drive bays, and some
models have eleven drive bays.
Table 7. Drive bays on the server models
Seven drive bay model Eleven drive bay model

Bay 1

Bay 2

Bay 1 Bay 3

Bay 2 Bay 4
Bay 8
Bay 3 Bay 5
Bay 9
Bay 4 Bay 6
Bay 10
Bay 5 Bay 7
Bay 11
Bay 6

Bay 7

154 System x3200 M3 Types 7327 and 7328: Problem Determination and Service Guide
The following notes describe the types of drives that the server supports and other
information that you must consider when installing a drive:
v Make sure that you have all the cables and other equipment that is specified in
the documentation that comes with the drive.
v Check the instructions that come with the drive to see whether you have to set
any switches or jumpers on the drive. If you are installing a SAS or SATA device,
be sure to set the SAS or SATA ID for that device.
v Optional external tape drives, DVD-ROM drive are examples of removable-media
drives. You can install removable-media drives only in bays 1, 2, and 3.
v To install a 3.5-inch drive in a 5.25-inch bay, you must use a 5.25-inch
conversion kit.
v The electromagnetic interference (EMI) integrity and cooling of the server are
protected by having all bays and PCI slots covered or occupied. When you install
a drive or PCI adapter, save the EMC shield and filler panel from the bay or the
PCI adapter slot cover in the event that you later remove the drive or adapter.
v For a complete list of supported options for the server, see http://www.ibm.com/
servers/eserver/serverproven/compat/us/.

Removing a DVD drive


To remove a DVD drive, complete the following steps:
1. Read the safety information that begins on page vii and “Installation guidelines”
on page 141.
2. Turn off the server and all attached devices; then, disconnect all power cords
and external cables.
3. Unlock and remove the side cover (see “Removing the side cover” on page
145).
4. Remove the lower bezel (see “Removing the lower bezel” on page 147).
5. Remove the upper bezel (see “Removing the upper bezel” on page 149).
6. Disconnect the power and signal cables from the drive that is to be removed.
7. Press and hold the blue release button on the side of the bay to release the
drive; then, pull the drive out of the front of the server.

Release Drive retainer


clip
buttons

Chapter 5. Removing and replacing server components 155


8. Remove the drive retainer clip from the side of the drive. Save the clip to use
when you install the replacement drive.
9. If you are instructed to return the drive, follow all packaging instructions, and
use any packaging materials for shipping that are supplied to you.

Installing a DVD drive


To install a DVD drive, complete the following steps:
1. If you are replacing a removed drive with a new drive, make sure that:
v You have all the cables and other equipment that is specified in the
documentation that comes with the new drive.
v You have checked the instructions that come with the new drive to
determine whether you must set any switches or jumpers in the drive.
v You have removed the blue optical drive rails from the side of the old drive
and have them available for installation on the new drive.

Note: If you are installing a drive that contains a laser, observe the following
safety precaution.

156 System x3200 M3 Types 7327 and 7328: Problem Determination and Service Guide
Statement 3:

CAUTION:
When laser products (such as CD-ROMs, DVD drives, fiber optic devices,
or transmitters) are installed, note the following:
v Do not remove the covers. Removing the covers of the laser product
could result in exposure to hazardous laser radiation. There are no
serviceable parts inside the device.
v Use of controls or adjustments or performance of procedures other
than those specified herein might result in hazardous radiation
exposure.

DANGER
Some laser products contain an embedded Class 3A or Class 3B laser
diode. Note the following.

Laser radiation when open. Do not stare into the beam, do not view
directly with optical instruments, and avoid direct exposure to the
beam.

Class 1 Laser Product


Laser Klasse 1
Laser Klass 1
Luokan 1 Laserlaite
Appareil A` Laser de Classe 1

2. Touch the static-protective package that contains the new DVD drive to any
unpainted metal surface on the server; then, remove the DVD drive from the
package and place it on a static-protective surface.
3. Follow the instructions that come with the drive to set jumpers or switches, if
there are any.

Note: You might find it easier to install the new drive from the front and then
attach the cables.
4. If you are installing a 3.5-inch drive in bay 2, attach a 5.25-inch conversion kit
to the 3.5-inch drive. Remove the drive retainer clip from the side of the drive
cage of bay 1 or bay 2. Slide the drive retainer clip to the front to remove it
from the drive cage; then, snap the drive retainer clip into the screw holes on
the side of the drive.

Chapter 5. Removing and replacing server components 157


Release Drive retainer
clip
buttons

5. Push the drive into the bay.


6. Connect the power and signal cables to the drive.

Note: Route the signal cable so that it does not block the airflow to the rear of
the drives or over the microprocessor and dual inline memory modules
(DIMMs).
7. Install the upper bezel (see “Installing the upper bezel” on page 150).
8. Install the lower bezel (see “Installing the lower bezel” on page 148).
9. Install and lock the side cover (see “Installing the side cover” on page 146).
10. Reconnect the external cables and power cords; then, turn on the attached
devices and turn on the server.

Removing a tape drive


To remove a tape drive, complete the following steps:
1. Read the safety information that begins on page vii and “Installation guidelines”
on page 141.
2. Turn off the server and peripheral devices, and disconnect the power cords and
all external cables.
3. Unlock and remove the side cover (see “Installing the side cover” on page 146).
4. Remove the lower bezel (see “Installing the lower bezel” on page 148).
5. Remove the upper bezel (see “Installing the upper bezel” on page 150).
6. Disconnect the power and signal cables from the drive that is to be removed.
7. Press and hold the blue release button on the side of the bay to release the
drive; then, pull the drive out of the front of the server.
8. Remove the drive retainer clip from the side of the drive. Save the clip to use
when you install the replacement drive.

158 System x3200 M3 Types 7327 and 7328: Problem Determination and Service Guide
EMC shield

Tape drive

Drive retainer clip

9. If you are instructed to return the drive, follow all packaging instructions, and
use any packaging materials for shipping that are supplied to you.

Installing a tape drive


To install a tape drive, complete the following steps:
1. If you are replacing a removed drive with a new drive, make sure that:
v You have all the cables and other equipment that is specified in the
documentation that comes with the new drive.
v You check the instructions that come with the new drive to determine
whether you must set any switches or jumpers on the drive.
v You have removed the drive retainer clip on the side of the old drive and
have it available for installation on the new drive.
2. Read the safety information that begins on page vii and “Installation guidelines”
on page 141.
3. Turn off the server and peripheral devices, and disconnect the power cords
and all external cables.
4. Unlock and remove the side cover (see “Installing the side cover” on page
146).
5. Remove the lower bezel (see “Installing the lower bezel” on page 148).
6. Remove the upper bezel (see “Installing the upper bezel” on page 150).
7. Touch the static-protective package that contains the drive to any unpainted
metal surface on the server; then, remove the drive from the package and
place it on a static-protective surface.
8. Set any jumpers or switches on the drive according to the documentation that
comes with the drive.
9. Remove the drive retainer clip from the side of the drive cage of bay 1 or bay
2. Slide the drive retainer clip to the front to remove it from the drive cage;
then, snap the drive retainer clip into the screw holes on the side of the drive.

Chapter 5. Removing and replacing server components 159


EMC shield

Tape drive

Drive retainer clip

10. Remove the EMC filler.


11. Push the drive into the bay.

Note: A tape drive can be installed in bay 1 or bay 2


12. Connect one end of the applicable signal cable into the rear of the drive and
make sure that the other end of this cable is connected into the applicable
connector on the system board.
13. Route the signal cable so that it does not block the airflow to the rear of the
drives or over the microprocessor and dual inline memory modules (DIMMs).
14. If you have another drive to install or remove, do so now.
15. Connect the power cable to the rear of the drive. The connectors are keyed
and can be inserted only one way.

Removing a hot-swap hard disk drive


This procedure applies only to server models that have hot-swap hard disk drives.

Attention: To maintain proper system cooling, do not operate the server for more
than 10 minutes without either a drive or a filler panel installed in each drive bay.

To remove a hot-swap hard disk drive, complete the following steps:


1. Read the safety information that begins on page vii and “Installation guidelines”
on page 141.

Note: You do not have to turn off the server to remove hot-swap drives from
the hot-swap drive bays.
2. Remove the lower bezel (see “Removing the lower bezel” on page 147).
3. Rotate the drive tray handle of the drive assembly that is to be removed to the
open position (based on your model).

160 System x3200 M3 Types 7327 and 7328: Problem Determination and Service Guide
Server model with four hot-swap drive Server model with eight hot-swap drive
bays bays

Drive-tray
assembly
Drive-tray
assembly

Drive tray handle Drive tray handle


(in open position) (in open position)

Bezel

4. Grasp the handle of the drive assembly that is to be replaced and pull the
assembly out of the bay.
5. If you are instructed to return the drive assembly, follow all packaging
instructions, and use any packaging materials for shipping that are supplied to
you.

Installing a hot-swap hard disk drive


This procedure applies only to server models that have hot-swap hard disk drives.
Before you install a hot-swap hard disk drive, read the following information:
v The hot-swap drives must be either all SAS hard disk drives or all SATA hard
disk drives; the two types cannot be combined.
v Inspect the drive tray for signs of damage.
v To maintain proper system cooling, do not operate the server for more than 10
minutes without either a drive or a filler panel installed in each drive bay.
v You do not have to turn off the server to install hot-swap drives in the hot-swap
drive bays.
v See the Installation and User's Guide for additional information.

To install a hot-swap hard disk drive (based on your model), complete the following
steps.

Chapter 5. Removing and replacing server components 161


Server model with four hot-swap drive Server model with eight hot-swap drive
bays bays

Drive-tray
assembly

Drive-tray
assembly

Drive tray handle


(in open position) Drive tray handle
(in open position)

Bezel Bezel

1. Touch the static-protective package that contains the drive to any unpainted
metal surface on the server; then, remove the drive from the package and place
it on a static-protective surface.
2. Make sure that the drive tray handle is in the open position.
3. Align the drive assembly with the guide rails in the bay; then, carefully slide the
drive assembly into the drive bay until the drive stops.
4. Rotate the drive tray handle to the closed position.
5. Check the hard disk drive status indicator to make sure that the hard disk drive
is operating correctly. (You might have to restart the server for the drive to be
recognized.) If the amber hard disk drive status LED for a drive is lit
continuously, it indicates that the drive is faulty and must be replaced. If the
green hard disk drive activity LED is flashing, this indicates that the drive is
being accessed.

Note: If the server is configured for RAID operation using a ServeRAID


controller, you might have to reconfigure the disk arrays after you replace hard
disk drives. See the ServeRAID documentation for additional information about
RAID operation and complete instructions for using ServeRAID Manager.
6. Install the lower bezel (see “Installing the lower bezel” on page 148).
7. Lock the side cover.

162 System x3200 M3 Types 7327 and 7328: Problem Determination and Service Guide
Removing a simple-swap hard disk drive
This procedure applies only to server models that have simple-swap SATA hard disk
drives.

Attention: Simple-swap hard disk drives are not hot-swappable. Disconnect all
power from the server before you remove or install a simple-swap hard disk drive.

To remove a simple-swap hard disk drive, complete the following steps:


1. Read the safety information that begins on page vii and “Installation guidelines”
on page 141.
2. Turn off the server and all attached devices; then, disconnect all power cords
and external cables.
3. Remove the lower bezel (see “Removing the lower bezel” on page 147).
4. Pull the loops of the drive assembly that is to be removed toward each other;
then, pull the assembly out of the bay.

Bezel

5. If you are instructed to return the drive assembly, follow all packaging
instructions, and use any packaging materials for shipping that are supplied to
you.

Chapter 5. Removing and replacing server components 163


Installing a simple-swap hard disk drive
This procedure applies only to server models that have simple-swap SATA hard disk
drives. See the Installation and User's Guide for information about the installation
sequence and other important information.

Attention: Simple-swap hard disk drives are not hot-swappable. Disconnect all
power from the server you remove or install a simple-swap hard disk drive.

To install a simple-swap hard disk drive, complete the following steps:


1. Touch the static-protective package that contains the drive to any unpainted
metal surface on the server; then, remove the drive from the package and place
it on a static-protective surface.
2. Align the drive assembly with the guide rails in the bay.

Bezel

3. Pull the loops of the drive assembly toward each other; then, carefully slide the
drive assembly into the drive bay until it clicks into place, and release the loops.

Note: Do not release the loops on the drive assembly until it is completely
seated.
4. Install the lower bezel (see “Installing the lower bezel” on page 148).
5. Lock the side cover.
6. Reconnect the external cables and power cords; then, turn on the attached
devices and turn on the server.

164 System x3200 M3 Types 7327 and 7328: Problem Determination and Service Guide
Removing a hot-swap power supply
This procedure applies only to server models that have hot-swap power supplies.
See “Removing a non-hot-swap power supply” on page 206 for information about
the removal of a non-hot-swap power supply.

When you remove or install a hot-swap power supply, observe the following
precautions.

Statement 8:

CAUTION:
Never remove the cover on a power supply or any part that has the following
label attached.

Hazardous voltage, current, and energy levels are present inside any
component that has this label attached. There are no serviceable parts inside
these components. If you suspect a problem with one of these parts, contact
a service technician.

Chapter 5. Removing and replacing server components 165


To remove a hot-swap power supply, complete the following steps:
1. Read the safety information that begins on page vii and “Installation guidelines”
on page 141.
2. Disconnect the power cord from the power supply that is to be removed.
3. Press down on the orange release lever and pull the power supply out of the
bay, using the handle.

Release lever

Hot-swap power
supply

4. If you are instructed to return the power supply, follow all packaging instructions,
and use any packaging materials for shipping that are supplied to you.

166 System x3200 M3 Types 7327 and 7328: Problem Determination and Service Guide
Installing a hot-swap power supply
This procedure applies only to server models that have hot-swap power supplies.
See “Installing a non-hot-swap power supply” on page 208 for information about the
installation of a non-hot-swap power supply.

To install a hot-swap power supply, complete the following steps:


1. Place the power supply into the bay guides.

Release lever

Hot-swap power
supply

2. Using the handle, push the power supply toward the front of the chassis until it
locks into place.
3. Connect one end of the power cord into the connector on the back of the power
supply and connect the other end of the power cord into a properly grounded
electrical outlet.
4. Make sure that both the ac and dc power LEDs on the rear of the power supply
are lit, indicating that the power supply is operating correctly.

Chapter 5. Removing and replacing server components 167


Removing a memory module
To remove a dual inline memory module (DIMM), complete the following steps:
1. Read the safety information that begins on page vii and “Installation guidelines”
on page 141.
2. Turn off the server and all attached devices; then, disconnect all power cords.
3. Unlock and remove the side cover (see “Removing the side cover” on page
145).
4. Locate the DIMM connector that contains the DIMM that is to be replaced (see
“System-board optional-devices connectors” on page 18 for DIMM slot
locations).
Attention: To avoid breaking the DIMM retaining clips or damaging the DIMM
connectors, open and close the clips gently.
5. Carefully open the retaining clips on each end of the DIMM connector and
remove the DIMM.

6. If you are instructed to return the DIMM, follow all packaging instructions, and
use any packaging materials for shipping that are supplied to you.

168 System x3200 M3 Types 7327 and 7328: Problem Determination and Service Guide
Installing a memory module
The following notes describe the types of dual inline memory modules (DIMMs) that
the server supports and other information that you must consider when you install
DIMMs (see “System-board optional-devices connectors” on page 18 for the
location of the DIMM connectors):
v The server supports industry-standard, 1066 or 1333 MHz, PC3-10600R-999
(single-rank or dual-rank) double-data-rate 3 (DDR3), registered or unbuffered,
synchronous dynamic random-access memory (SDRAM) dual inline memory
modules (DIMMs) with error correcting code (ECC). For a list of supported
options for the server, see http://www.ibm.com/servers/eserver/serverproven/
compat/us/; then, select your country and navigate to the list of options for the
server.
v The maximum amount of memory that the server supports is dependent on the
type of memory that you install in the server. See “Unbuffered DIMMs (UDIMMs)”
on page 170 and “Registered DIMMs (RDIMMs)” on page 171 for more
information.
v The amount of usable memory is reduced, depending on the system
configuration. A certain amount of memory must be reserved for system
resources. To view the total amount of installed memory and the amount of
configured memory, run the Setup utility. For additional information, see “Using
the Setup utility” on page 225.
v The maximum operating speed of the server is determined by the slowest DIMM
in the server.
v If you install a pair of DIMMs in DIMM connectors 2 and 5, the size and speed of
the DIMMs that you install in DIMM connectors 2 and 5 must match each other.
How ever, they do not have to be the same size and speed as the DIMMs that
are installed in DIMM connectors 1 and 4.
v You can use compatible DIMMs from various manufacturers in the same pair.
v When you install or remove DIMMs, the server configuration information
changes. When you restart the server, the system displays a message that
indicates that the memory configuration has changed.
Attention: Static electricity that is released to internal server components when
the server is powered-on might cause the server to stop, which could result in
the loss of data. To avoid this potential problem, always use an
electrostatic-discharge wrist strap or other grounding system when working inside
the server with the power on.
v The specifications of a DDR3 DIMM are on a label on the DIMM, in the following
format.
ggg eRxff-PC3-wwwwwm-aa-bb-cc
where:
ggg is the total capacity of the DIMM (for example, 1GB, 2GB, or 4GB)
e is the number of ranks
1 = single-rank
2 = dual-rank
4 = quad-rank
ff is the device organization (bit width)
4 = x4 organization (4 DQ lines per SDRAM)
8 = x8 organization
16 = x16 organization
wwwww is the DIMM bandwidth, in MBps

Chapter 5. Removing and replacing server components 169


8500 = 8.53 GBps (PC3-1066 SDRAMs, 8-byte primary data bus)
10600 = 10.66 GBps (PC3-1333 SDRAMs, 8-byte primary data bus)
m is the DIMM type
E = Unbuffered DIMM (UDIMM) with ECC (x72-bit module data bus)
R = Registered DIMM (RDIMM)
U = Unbuffered DIMM with no ECC (x64-bit primary data bus)
aa is the CAS latency, in clocks at maximum operating frequency
bb is the JEDEC SPD Revision Encoding and Additions level
cc is the reference design file for the design of the DIMM
d is the revision number of the reference design of the DIMM

Note: To determine the type of a DIMM, see the label on the DIMM. The
information on the label is in the format xxxxx nRxxx PC3-xxxxx-xx-xx-xxx. The
numeral in the sixth numerical position indicates whether the DIMM is single-rank
(n=1) or dual-rank (n=2).

Unbuffered DIMMs (UDIMMs)


The following notes provide information that you must consider when installing
UDIMMs (see “System-board optional-devices connectors” on page 18 for the
location of the DIMM connectors):
v The memory channels run at the fastest common frequency of the installed
DIMMs.
v Do not use both UDIMMs and RDIMMs in the same server.
v Using ECC and non-ECC UDIMMs in the server will cause the server to run in
non-ECC mode.
v The UDIMM options that are available for the server are 1 GB, 2 GB, and 4 GB
(when available) memory DIMMs.
v You can install a maximum of 16 GB of memory in some server models when
you use UDIMMs.
v The server supports up to two single-rank or dual-rank UDIMMs per channel.
v DIMM slots 3 and 6 are not supported when you install UDIMMs in the server.
Do not install DIMMs in these connectors.
v The following table lists the DIMM support compatibility.
Table 8. Supported DIMM compatibility
Intel quad-core Intel dual-core (Core Intel dual-core
DIMM configuration (Xeon 3400 series) i3) (Xeon L3406)
UDIMM non-ECC Not supported Not supported Not supported
only
UDIMM ECC only Supported Supported Supported
UDIMM mix ECC with Not supported Not supported Not supported
non-ECC
RDIMM ECC only Supported Not supported Not supported

v The following table lists the supported UDIMM population.

170 System x3200 M3 Types 7327 and 7328: Problem Determination and Service Guide
Table 9. Supported UDIMM population per channel
Ranks per
DIMMs slots DIMMs installed DIMM (any
per channel in each channel DIMM type DIMM speed combination)
2 1 Unbuffered 1066, 1333 single-rank,
DDR3 ECC dual-rank
2 2 Unbuffered 1066, 1333 single-rank,
DDR3 ECC dual-rank

v The following table lists the maximum DIMM population using ranked UDIMM.
Table 10. Maximum memory population using ranked UDIMMs (depending on your model)
Number of UDIMMs DIMM type DIMM size Total memory
4 single-rank UDIMMs 1 GB 4 GB
4 single-rank UDIMMs 2 GB 8 GB
4 dual-rank UDIMMs 2 GB 8 GB
4 dual-rank UDIMMs 4 GB (when 16 GB
available)

v The following table lists the UDIMM memory population rule to optimize the
system performance.
Table 11. UDIMMs population rule for dual-channel symmetric mode
DIMMs DIMMs DIMMs DIMMs DIMMs DIMMs
connector 1 connector 2 connector 3 connector 4 connector 5 connector 6
populated empty empty empty empty empty
populated empty empty populated empty empty
populated populated empty populated populated empty

Registered DIMMs (RDIMMs)


The following notes provide information that you must consider when you install
RDIMMs (see “System-board optional-devices connectors” on page 18 for the
location of the DIMM connectors):
v The memory channels run at the fastest common frequency of the installed
DIMMs.
v Do not use both RDIMMs and UDIMMs in the same server.
v The server supports up to three single-rank, dual-rank, or quad-rank RDIMMs per
channel.
v The RDIMM options that are available for the server are 1 GB, 2 GB, 4 GB, and
8 GB (when available) memory DIMMs.
v You can install a maximum of 32 GB of memory in the server when you use
RDIMMs.
v The following table lists the supported RDIMM population.
Table 12. Supported RDIMM population per channel
Ranks per
DIMMs slots DIMMs installed DIMM (any
per channel in each channel DIMM type DIMM speed combination)
3 1 Registered 1066, 1333 single-rank,
DDR3 ECC dual-rank

Chapter 5. Removing and replacing server components 171


Table 12. Supported RDIMM population per channel (continued)
Ranks per
DIMMs slots DIMMs installed DIMM (any
per channel in each channel DIMM type DIMM speed combination)
3 2 Registered 1066, 1333 single-rank,
DDR3 ECC dual-rank
3 3 Registered 800 single-rank,
DDR3 ECC dual-rank
3 1 Registered 1066 quad-rank
DDR3 ECC
3 2 Registered 800 quad-rank
DDR3 ECC

v The following table lists the maximum DIMM population using ranked RDIMM.
Table 13. Maximum memory population using ranked RDIMMs (depending on your model)
Number of RDIMMs DIMM type DIMM size Total memory
6 single-rank RDIMMs 1 GB 6 GB
6 single-rank RDIMMs 2 GB 12 GB
6 dual-rank RDIMMs 2 GB 12 GB
4 dual-rank RDIMMs 4 GB 16 GB
4 quad-rank RDIMMs 4 GB 16 GB
6 dual-rank RDIMMs 4 GB 24 GB
4 quad-rank RDIMMs 8 GB (when 32 GB
available)

v The following table lists the RDIMM memory population rule to optimize the
system performance.
Table 14. RDIMMs population rule for dual-channel symmetric mode
DIMMs DIMMs DIMMs DIMMs DIMMs DIMMs
connector 1 connector 2 connector 3 connector 4 connector 5 connector 6
populated empty empty empty empty empty
populated empty empty populated empty empty
populated populated empty populated populated empty
populated populated populated populated populated populated

The following illustration shows the location of the DIMM connectors on the system
board.

172 System x3200 M3 Types 7327 and 7328: Problem Determination and Service Guide
DIMM 1
DIMM 2
DIMM 3
DIMM 4
DIMM 5
DIMM 6

To install a DIMM, complete the following steps:


1. Read the safety information that begins on page vii and “Installation guidelines”
on page 141.
2. Turn off the server and peripheral devices, and disconnect the power cords and
all external cables.
3. Unlock the side cover.
4. Remove the side cover (see “Removing the side cover” on page 145).
5. Locate the DIMM connectors on the system board. Determine the connectors
into which you will install the DIMMs. Install the DIMMs in the sequence shown
in the following table.
Table 15. DIMM installation sequence
Number of DIMMs Installation sequence (connectors)
First pair of DIMMs 1, 4
Second pair of DIMMs 2, 5
Third pair of DIMMs 3, 6

Attention: To avoid breaking the retaining clips or damaging the DIMM


connectors, open and close the clips gently.
6. Open the retaining clips and, if necessary, remove any existing DIMM.

Chapter 5. Removing and replacing server components 173


7. Touch the static-protective package that contains the DIMM to any unpainted
metal surface on the server. Then, remove the new DIMM from the package.
8. Turn the DIMM so that the DIMM keys align correctly with the connector.
9. Insert the DIMM into the connector by aligning the edges of the DIMM with the
slots at the ends of the DIMM connector. Firmly press the DIMM straight down
into the connector by applying pressure on both ends of the DIMM
simultaneously. The retaining clips snap into the locked position when the DIMM
is firmly seated in the connector. If there is a gap between the DIMM and the
retaining clips, the DIMM has not been correctly installed. Open the retaining
clips, remove the DIMM, and then reinsert it.

174 System x3200 M3 Types 7327 and 7328: Problem Determination and Service Guide
Removing an optional ServeRAID-MR10i SAS/SATA controller
To remove a ServeRAID-MR10i SAS/SATA adapter, complete the following steps:
1. Read the safety information beginning on page vii, and “Installation guidelines”
on page 141.
2. Turn off the server and peripheral devices, and disconnect the power cords and
all external cables. Remove the side cover (see “Removing the side cover” on
page 145).
3. Rotate the rear adapter-retention bracket to the open (unlocked) position.
4. Disconnect any cables connected to the adapter.
Attention: To avoid breaking the retaining clips or damaging the
ServeRAID-MR10i adapter connector, open and close the clips gently.
5. Carefully grasp the end of the ServeRAID adapter and pull it out of the
connector.
6. If you are instructed to return the adapter, follow all packaging instructions, and
use any packaging materials for shipping that are supplied to you.

Installing an optional ServeRAID-MR10i SAS/SATA controller


The optional IBM ServeRAID-MR10i SAS/SATA controller can be installed in either
PCI slot 1 or slot 2 on the system board. The ServeRAID-MR10i adapter is
supported on hot-swap server models only. The IBM ServeRAID-MR10i SAS/SATA
adapter enables integrated RAID levels 0, 1, 5, 6, and 10 support capability on
hot-swap hard disk drives. For configuration information, see the documentation on
the ServeRAID CD that comes with the adapter.

Important: To ensure that any of your ServeRAID 10i, 10is, or 10M adapters
function properly on UEFI-based servers, make sure that the adapter firmware level
is updated to at least 11.xx-XXX, and the supporting drivers.

Attention: Some cluster solutions require specific code levels or coordinated code
updates. If the device is part of a cluster solution, verify that the latest level of code
is supported for the cluster solution before you update the code.

To install a ServeRAID-MR10i adapter, complete the following steps:


1. Read the safety information beginning on page vii, and “Installation guidelines”
on page 141.
2. Touch the static-protective package containing the ServeRAID-MR10i adapter to
any unpainted metal surface on the server. Then, remove the ServeRAID-MR10i
adapter from the package.
3. If the battery pack (battery carrier and battery) did not come installed on the
ServeRAID adapter, install the battery pack.
a. Align the battery carrier pins and the connector for the battery carrier with
the pin holes and connector on the ServeRAID adapter; then, lower the
battery carrier onto the ServeRAID adapter.

Chapter 5. Removing and replacing server components 175


Battery

Battery
ServeRAID carrier
adapter
Hard disk
drive cable
connector 0-3

Connector
for battery
carrier

Hard disk
drive cable
connector 4-7

b. Press the battery carrier into the connector on the ServeRAID adapter until it
is firmly connected.
c. Secure the battery carrier to the ServeRAID adapter with the screws that
came with the battery pack.
4. Open the rear retention bracket.
5. Turn the ServeRAID-MR10i adapter so that the ServeRAID-MR10i adapter keys
align correctly with the connector.
Attention: Incomplete insertion might cause damage to the system board or
the ServeRAID-MR10i adapter.
6. Take the signal cable that is attached to the drive backplane and connect it to
the ServeRAID adapter. The following illustration shows the connectors on the
controller to which you connect the signal cables from the drive backplane.

Note: When you restart the server, you are prompted to import the existing
RAID configuration to the new ServeRAID adapter.
7. Press the ServeRAID-MR10i adapter firmly into the connector on the system
board.
8. Reconnect the cables to the new ServeRAID-MR10i adapter.

176 System x3200 M3 Types 7327 and 7328: Problem Determination and Service Guide
Hard disk drive cable 0 - 3

Hard disk drive cable 4 - 7

ServeRAID-MR10i
SAS/SATA controller

Battery

Hard disk drive


cable connector 4 - 7

Hard disk drive


cable connector 0 - 3

Removing an optional ServeRAID-MR10is VAULT SAS/SATA controller


To remove a ServeRAID-MR10is SAS/SATA adapter, complete the following steps:
1. Read the safety information beginning on page vii, and “Installation guidelines”
on page 141.
2. Turn off the server and peripheral devices, and disconnect the power cords and
all external cables. Remove the side cover (see “Removing the side cover” on
page 145).
3. Rotate the rear adapter-retention bracket to the open (unlocked) position.
4. Open the rear retention bracket.
5. Disconnect any cables connected to the adapter.
Attention: To avoid breaking the retaining clips or damaging the
ServeRAID-MR10is adapter connector, open and close the clips gently.
6. Carefully grasp the end of the ServeRAID adapter and pull it out of the
connector.
7. If you are instructed to return the adapter, follow all packaging instructions, and
use any packaging materials for shipping that are supplied to you.

Installing an optional ServeRAID-MR10is VAULT SAS/SATA Controller


The optional IBM ServeRAID-MR10is VAULT SAS/SATA controller can be installed
in either PCI slot 1 or slot 2 on the system board. The ServeRAID-MR10is adapter
is supported on hot-swap server models only. The IBM ServeRAID-MR10is
SAS/SATA adapter with an encryption 1078 DE chip set enables integrated RAID
levels 0, 1, 5, 6, and 10 support capability on hot-swap hard disk drives. For
configuration information, see the documentation on the ServeRAID CD that comes
with the adapter.

Chapter 5. Removing and replacing server components 177


Important: To ensure that any of your ServeRAID 10i, 10is, or 10M adapters
function properly on UEFI-based servers, make sure that the adapter firmware level
is updated to at least 11.xx-XXX, and the supporting drivers.

Attention: Some cluster solutions require specific code levels or coordinated code
updates. If the device is part of a cluster solution, verify that the latest level of code
is supported for the cluster solution before you update the code.

To install the optional ServeRAID-MR10is SAS/SATA adapter, complete the


following steps:
1. Read the safety information beginning on page vii, and “Installation guidelines”
on page 141.
2. Touch the static-protective package containing the ServeRAID-MR10is adapter
to any unpainted metal surface on the server. Then, remove the
ServeRAID-MR10is adapter from the package.
3. If the battery pack (battery carrier and battery) did not come installed on the
ServeRAID adapter, install the battery pack.
a. Align the battery carrier pins and the connector for the battery carrier with
the pin holes and connector on the ServeRAID adapter; then, lower the
battery carrier onto the ServeRAID adapter.

Battery

Battery
ServeRAID carrier
adapter
Hard disk
drive cable
connector 0-3

Connector
for battery
carrier

Hard disk
drive cable
connector 4-7

b. Press the battery carrier into the connector on the ServeRAID adapter until
it is firmly connected.
c. Secure the battery carrier to the ServeRAID adapter with the screws that
came with the battery pack.
4. Turn the ServeRAID-MR10is adapter so that the ServeRAID-MR10is adapter
keys align correctly with the connector.
Attention: Incomplete insertion might cause damage to the system board or
the ServeRAID-MR10is adapter.

178 System x3200 M3 Types 7327 and 7328: Problem Determination and Service Guide
ServeRAID-MR10is
controller

PCI slot 1
PCI slot 2

5. Press the ServeRAID-MR10is adapter firmly into the connector on the system
board.
6. Reconnect the cables to the new ServeRAID-MR10is adapter. Make sure that
the ServeRAID-MR10is SAS/SATA adapter is cabled.
Hard disk drive cable 0 - 3

Hard disk drive cable 4 - 7

ServeRAID-MR10is
SAS/SATA controller

Battery

Hard disk drive


cable connector 4 - 7

Hard disk drive


cable connector 0 - 3

7. Rotate the rear adapter-retention bracket to the closed (locked) position.


8. Install the side cover (see “Installing the side cover” on page 146).
9. Lock the side cover.

Chapter 5. Removing and replacing server components 179


10. Reconnect the external cables and power cords; then, turn on the attached
devices and turn on the server.

Removing a USB embedded hypervisor flash device


To remove the virtual media key, complete the following steps:
1. Read the safety information that begins on page vii and “Installation guidelines”
on page 141.
2. Turn off the server and peripheral devices and disconnect all power cords; then,
remove the side cover (see “Removing the side cover” on page 145).
3. Unlock and remove the side cover (see “Removing the side cover” on page
145).
4. Unlock the USB retaining latch by squeezing the two retaining clips toward each
other. Then, lift up the bracket cover.
5. Grasp the flash device and pull to remove it from the connector.
6. Press down on the retention latch to return it to the locked position.

7. If you are instructed to return the flash device, follow all packaging instructions,
and use any packaging materials for shipping that are supplied to you.

Installing a USB embedded hypervisor flash device


To install the virtual media key, complete the following steps:
1. Read the safety information that begins on page vii and “Installation guidelines”
on page 141.
2. Turn off the server and all attached devices; then, disconnect all power cords.
3. Unlock and remove the side cover (see “Removing the side cover” on page
145).
4. Unlock the USB retaining latch by squeezing the two retaining clips toward
each other.
5. Align the flash device with the connector on the system board and push it into
the connector until it is firmly seated.
6. Press down on the retaining latch to lock the flash device into the USB
connector.

180 System x3200 M3 Types 7327 and 7328: Problem Determination and Service Guide
7. Reconnect the power cord and any cables that you removed.
8. Install and lock the side cover (see “Installing the side cover” on page 146).
9. Reconnect the power cord and any cables that you removed.
10. Turn on the peripheral devices and the server.

Removing the virtual media key


To remove the virtual media key, complete the following steps:
1. Read the safety information that begins on page vii and “Installation guidelines”
on page 141.
2. Turn off the server and peripheral devices and disconnect all power cords; then,
remove the side cover (see “Removing the side cover” on page 145).
3. Grasp the virtual media key and gently slide it up and off of the mounting tab.

Chapter 5. Removing and replacing server components 181


Virtual media
key (front)
Mounting bracket
(rear)

Virtual media Mounting tab


key connector

4. If you are instructed to return the virtual media key, follow all packaging
instructions, and use any packaging materials for shipping that are supplied to
you.

Installing the virtual media key


To install the virtual media key, complete the following steps:
1. Read the safety information that begins on page vii and “Installation guidelines”
on page 141.
2. Turn off the server and all attached devices; then, disconnect all power cords.
3. Unlock and remove the side cover (see “Removing the side cover” on page
145).

182 System x3200 M3 Types 7327 and 7328: Problem Determination and Service Guide
Virtual media
key (front)
Mounting bracket
(rear)

Virtual media Mounting tab


key connector

4. Align the virtual media key with the mounting tab and slide it down the tab onto
the connector on the system board. Press the virtual media key down into the
connector until it is firmly seated on the system board.
5. Install and lock the side cover (see “Installing the side cover” on page 146).
6. Reconnect the power cord and any cables that you removed.
7. Turn on the peripheral devices and the server.

Removing the system battery


The following notes describe information that you must consider when you replace
the battery:
v IBM has designed this product with your safety in mind. The lithium battery must
be handled correctly to avoid possible danger. If you replace the battery, you
must adhere to the following instructions.

Note: In the U. S., call 1-800-IBM-4333 for information about battery disposal.
v If you replace the original lithium battery with a heavy-metal battery or a battery
with heavy-metal components, be aware of the following environmental
consideration. Batteries and accumulators that contain heavy metals must not be
disposed of with normal domestic waste. They will be taken back free of charge
by the manufacturer, distributor, or representative, to be recycled or disposed of
in a proper manner.
v To order replacement batteries, call 1-800-IBM-SERV within the United States,
and 1-800-465-7999 or 1-800-465-6666 within Canada. Outside the U.S. and
Canada, call your support center or business partner.

Chapter 5. Removing and replacing server components 183


Note: After you replace the battery, you must reconfigure the server and reset
the system date and time.
Statement 2:

CAUTION:
When replacing the lithium battery, use only IBM Part Number 33F8354 or
an equivalent type battery recommended by the manufacturer. If your
system has a module containing a lithium battery, replace it only with the
same module type made by the same manufacturer. The battery contains
lithium and can explode if not properly used, handled, or disposed of.

Do not:
– Throw or immerse into water
– Heat to more than 100°C (212°F)
– Repair or disassemble

Dispose of the battery as required by local ordinances or regulations.

To remove the battery, complete the following steps.


1. Read the safety information that begins on page vii and “Installation guidelines”
on page 141.
2. Turn off the server and all attached devices; then, disconnect all power cords
and external cables.
3. Unlock and remove the side cover (see “Removing the side cover” on page
145).
4. Locate the battery on the system board (see “System-board internal connectors”
on page 16).
5. Remove the battery:
a. Use a fingernail to press the top of the battery clip away from the battery.
The battery pops up when it is released.

b. Use your thumb and index finger to lift the battery from the socket.

Installing the battery


The following notes describe information that you must consider when you replace
the battery in the server.
v You must replace the battery with a lithium battery of the same type from the
same manufacturer.
v To order replacement batteries, call 1-800-426-7378 within the United States, and
1-800-465-7999 or 1-800-465-6666 within Canada. Outside the U.S. and
Canada, call your IBM marketing representative or authorized reseller.

184 System x3200 M3 Types 7327 and 7328: Problem Determination and Service Guide
v After you replace the battery, you must reconfigure the server and reset the
system date and time.
v To avoid possible danger, read and follow the following safety statement.

Statement 2:

CAUTION:
When replacing the lithium battery, use only IBM Part Number 33F8354 or an
equivalent type battery recommended by the manufacturer. If your system has
a module containing a lithium battery, replace it only with the same module
type made by the same manufacturer. The battery contains lithium and can
explode if not properly used, handled, or disposed of.

Do not:
v Throw or immerse into water
v Heat to more than 100°C (212°F)
v Repair or disassemble

Dispose of the battery as required by local ordinances or regulations.

To install the replacement battery, complete the following steps:


1. Follow any special handling and installation instructions that come with the
replacement battery.
2. Insert the new battery:
a. Orient the battery so that the positive side faces up.
b. Tilt the battery so that you can insert it into the socket on the side opposite
the battery clip.

c. Press the battery down into the socket until it clicks into place. Make sure
that the battery clip holds the battery securely.
3. Install the side cover (see “Installing the side cover” on page 146).
4. Lock the side cover if you unlocked it during removal.
5. Reconnect the external cables and power cords; then, turn on the attached
devices and turn on the server.
6. Start the Configuration/Setup Utility program and reset the configuration:
v Set the system date and time.
v Set the power-on password.
v Reconfigure the server.
See “Using the Setup utility” on page 225 for details.

Chapter 5. Removing and replacing server components 185


Removing and replacing consumable parts
Replacement of consumable parts is your responsibility. If IBM installs a
consumable part at your request, you will be charged for the installation.

The illustrations in this document might differ slightly from your hardware.

186 System x3200 M3 Types 7327 and 7328: Problem Determination and Service Guide
Removing and replacing Tier 2 CRUs
You may install a Tier 2 CRU yourself or request IBM to install it, at no additional
charge, under the type of warranty service that is designated for the server.

The illustrations in this document might differ slightly from your hardware.

Removing the rear system fan


Attention:
v Replace a failed fan within 48 hours.
v To ensure proper cooling and airflow, do not operate the server for more than 30
minutes with the side cover removed.

To remove the rear system fan, complete the following steps:


1. Turn off the server and all attached devices; then, disconnect all power cords
and external cables.
2. Unlock and remove the side cover (see “Removing the side cover” on page
145).
3. Remove any adapters that impede access to the fan and the fan connector on
the system board (see “Removing an adapter” on page 151).
4. Disconnect the fan cable from the system board.
5. Grasp the fan with both hands and pull firmly, extending the rubber grommets.
The grommets will be pulled through the holes in either the fan or the chassis
and can then be removed.

Rubber
grommets

Rear system
Fan

6. Pull the fan up and out of the chassis.


7. If you are instructed to return the fan, follow all packaging instructions, and use
any packaging materials for shipping that are supplied to you.

Chapter 5. Removing and replacing server components 187


Installing the rear system fan
Attention:
v Replace a failed fan within 48 hours.
v To ensure proper cooling and airflow, do not operate the server for more than 30
minutes with the side cover removed.

To install the rear system fan, complete the following steps:


1. The replacement fan comes with the rubber grommets installed; however, they
might have come out during shipment. If any of the rubber grommets are
missing from the fan, install them on the fan before you continue. Use
needle-nosed pliers to pull the grommets through the holes in the fan.
2. Position the fan so that the grommets protrude through the holes in the chassis;
then, use needle-nosed pliers to pull the grommets through the holes from
outside the chassis.

Rubber
grommets

Rear system
Fan

3. Connect the fan cable to the system board (see “System-board internal
connectors” on page 16 for the location of the rear fan connector).
4. Install any adapters that you removed (see “Installing an adapter” on page 152).
5. Install the side cover (see “Installing the side cover” on page 146).
6. Lock the side cover if you unlocked it during removal.
7. Reconnect the external cables and power cords; then, turn on the attached
devices and turn on the server.

188 System x3200 M3 Types 7327 and 7328: Problem Determination and Service Guide
Removing the hard disk drive fan assembly
This procedure applies only to server models that have a hard disk drive fan
assembly.

Attention:
v Replace a failed fan within 48 hours.
v To ensure proper cooling and airflow, do not operate the server for more than 30
minutes with the side cover removed.

To remove the hard disk drive fan assembly, complete the following steps:
1. Read the safety information that begins on page vii and “Installation guidelines”
on page 141.
2. Turn off the server and all attached devices; then, disconnect all power cords
and external cables.
3. Unlock and remove the side cover (see “Removing the side cover” on page
145).
4. Rotate the rear adapter-retention bracket to the open (unlocked) position.
5. Disconnect the hard disk drive fan assembly cable from the system board,
making a note of the cable was connected to the hard disk drive fan connector
for later installation.
6. Remove the lower bezel (see “Removing the lower bezel” on page 147).
7. Remove the hard disk drives.
8. Lift up and hold the drive cage release tab; then, rotate the drive cage out of
the chassis until the retaining tab on top of the cage locks into place.

Drive cage
release tab

Hard disk
drive cage

9. Pull out on the hard disk drive fan assembly release tabs; then, rotate the
assembly away from the drive cage slightly.

Chapter 5. Removing and replacing server components 189


Release
tabs
Slot

Hard disk drive


fan assembly

If you have the eight-drive, 2.5-inch hot-swap hard disk drive model, the hard
disk drive fan assembly looks like the following illustration.

Slot

Release
tabs
Hard disk drive
fan assembly

10. Remove the cable from the slot on the hard disk drive fan assembly; then,
rotate the assembly away from the drive cage and remove the assembly from
the drive cage.
11. If you are instructed to return the hard disk drive fan assembly, follow all
packaging instructions, and use any packaging materials for shipping that are
supplied to you.

190 System x3200 M3 Types 7327 and 7328: Problem Determination and Service Guide
Installing the hard disk drive fan assembly
This procedure applies only to server models that have a hard disk drive fan
assembly.

Attention:
v Replace a failed fan within 48 hours.
v To ensure proper cooling and airflow, do not operate the server for more than 30
minutes with the side cover removed.

To install the hard disk drive fan assembly, complete the following steps:
1. Insert the hard disk drive fan assembly retaining tab over the right edge of the
hard disk drive backplane; then, rotate the fan assembly toward the backplane.
Do not fully close the hard disk drive fan assembly.

Release
tabs
Slot

Hard disk drive


fan assembly

If you have the eight-drive, 2.5-inch hot-swap hard disk drive model, the hard
disk drive fan assembly looks like the following illustration.

Slot

Release
tabs
Hard disk drive
fan assembly

Chapter 5. Removing and replacing server components 191


2. Route the hard disk drive signal and power cables through the slots on the
edge of the hard disk drive fan assembly. Make sure that the cables will not be
pinched between the hard disk drive assembly and the hard disk drive
backplane when the assembly is installed.
3. Rotate the hard disk drive fan assembly toward the backplane. Align the right
edge of the hard disk drive fan assembly and the right edge of the backplane.
Make sure the release tabs are fully engaged on the drive cage.
4. Rotate the drive cage toward the front of the server until it stops; then, lift and
hold the retaining tab on top of the drive cage while you rotate the drive cage
into the chassis until it locks into place.

Retaining
tab

5. Connect the hard disk drive fan assembly cable to the system board (see
“System-board internal connectors” on page 16 for the location of the hard disk
drive fan connector).
6. Reinstall the hard disk drives.

Note: Before you continue, check all internal power cables to be sure that
they are connected to the system board and other optional devices.
7. Install the lower bezel (see “Installing the lower bezel” on page 148).
8. Install the side cover (see “Installing the side cover” on page 146).
9. Lock the side cover if you unlocked it during removal.
10. Reconnect the external cables and power cords; then, turn on the attached
devices and turn on the server.

Removing the simple-swap backplate


This procedure applies only to server models with the simple-swap SATA backplate
installed on the back of the hard disk drive cage.

To remove the simple-swap backplate, complete the following steps:

Note: You need a screwdriver in order to complete the steps.


1. Read the safety information that begins on page vii and “Installation guidelines”
on page 141.

192 System x3200 M3 Types 7327 and 7328: Problem Determination and Service Guide
2. Turn off the server and all attached devices; then, disconnect all power cords
and external cables.
3. Unlock and remove the side cover (see “Removing the side cover” on page
145).
4. Remove the lower bezel (see “Removing the lower bezel” on page 147).
5. Remove the simple-swap hard disk drives that are installed in the hard disk
drive cage (see “Removing a simple-swap hard disk drive” on page 163).
6. Remove the hard disk drive fan assembly from the hard disk drive cage (see
“Removing the hard disk drive fan assembly” on page 189).
7. Disconnect the power cable from the simple-swap backplate.
8. Disconnect the signal cable from the system board.
9. Press and hold the drive cage release tab; then, rotate the drive cage out of
the chassis until the retaining tab on top of the cage locks into place.
10. Lift up on the retaining latch at the top of the drive cage; then, tilt the top of the
simple-swap backplate away from the drive cage until it is clear of the locating
pins.

Retaining tab

Retaining
latch

Simple-swap
backplate

Drive cage
release tab
Locating pins

11. Lift the simple-swap backplate out of the lower lip on the drive cage and set it
aside.
12. If you are instructed to return the simple-swap backplate, follow all packaging
instructions, and use any packaging materials for shipping that are supplied to
you.

Installing the simple-swap backplate


This procedure applies only to server models with the simple-swap SATA backplate
installed on the back of the hard disk drive cage.

To install the simple-swap backplate, complete the following steps.

Chapter 5. Removing and replacing server components 193


1. Position the bottom edge of the simple-swap backplate on the lower lip of the
drive cage.

Retaining tab

Retaining
latch

Simple-swap
backplate

Drive cage
release tab
Locating pins

2. Tilt the top of the simple-swap backplate toward the drive cage and over the
locating pins until the retaining latch is engaged securely.
3. Press and hold the retaining tab on top of the cage; then, rotate the drive cage
into the chassis until it locks into place.
4. Connect the signal cables to the system board (see “System-board internal
connectors” on page 16 for the location of the Serial ATA drive connectors).
5. Connect the power cables to the simple-swap backplate.
6. Install the hard disk drive fan assembly on the hard disk drive cage (see
“Installing the hard disk drive fan assembly” on page 191).
7. Install the simple-swap hard disk drives that you removed from the hard disk
drive cage (see “Installing a simple-swap hard disk drive” on page 164).
8. Install the lower bezel (see “Installing the lower bezel” on page 148).
9. Install the side cover (see “Installing the side cover” on page 146).
10. Lock the side cover if you unlocked it during removal.
11. Reconnect the external cables and power cords; then, turn on the attached
devices and turn on the server.

194 System x3200 M3 Types 7327 and 7328: Problem Determination and Service Guide
Removing the SAS/SATA hard disk drive backplane
This procedure applies only to hot-swap server models with a SAS/SATA hard disk
drive backplane installed on the back of the hard disk drive cage.

Note: A 3.5-inch hard disk drive model is used as an example. It is also applicable
for 2.5-inch hard disk drive model.

To remove the SAS/SATA hard disk drive backplane, complete the following steps:
1. Read the safety information that begins on page vii and “Installation guidelines”
on page 141.
2. Turn off the server and all attached devices; then, disconnect all power cords
and external cables.
3. Unlock and remove the side cover (see “Removing the side cover” on page
145).
4. Remove the lower bezel (see “Removing the lower bezel” on page 147).
5. Remove the hot-swap SAS/SATA hard disk drives installed in the hard disk
drive cage (see “Removing a hot-swap hard disk drive” on page 160).
6. Remove the hard disk drive fan assembly from the hard disk drive cage (see
“Removing the hard disk drive fan assembly” on page 189).
7. Disconnect the power and signal cables from the hard disk drive backplane.
8. Press and hold the drive cage release tab; then, rotate the drive cage out of
the chassis until the retaining tab on top of the cage locks into place.
9. Remove the two screws that secure the SAS/SATA hard disk drive backplane
to the drive cage.

Retaining tab

Retaining
latch

Drive cage
release tab
Locating pins

10. Tilt the top of the hard disk drive backplane away from the drive cage until it is
clear of the locating pins.
11. Lift the SAS/SATA hard disk drive backplane out of the lower lip on the drive
cage and set it aside.

Chapter 5. Removing and replacing server components 195


12. If you are instructed to return the SAS/SATA hard disk drive backplane, follow
all packaging instructions, and use any packaging materials for shipping that
are supplied to you.

Installing the SAS/SATA hard disk drive backplane


This procedure applies only to hot-swap server models with a SAS/SATA hard disk
drive backplane installed on the back of the hard disk drive cage.

Note: A 3.5-inch hard disk drive model is used as an example. It is also applicable
for 2.5-inch hard disk drive model.

To install the hard disk drive backplane, complete the following steps:
1. Place the bottom edge of the SAS/SATA hard disk drive backplane in the lower
lip of the drive cage.
2. Tilt the top of the SAS/SATA hard disk drive backplane toward the drive cage
and over the locating pins.

Retaining tab

Retaining
latch

Drive cage
release tab
Locating pins

3. Install the two screws that secure the SAS/SATA hard disk drive backplane to
the drive cage.
4. Press and hold the retaining tab on top of the cage; then, rotate the drive cage
into the chassis until it locks into place.
5. Connect the power and signal cables to the hard disk drive backplane.
6. Install the hard disk drive fan assembly onto the hard disk drive cage (see
“Installing the hard disk drive fan assembly” on page 191).
7. Install the hot-swap hard disk drives that you removed from the hard disk drive
cage (see “Installing a hot-swap hard disk drive” on page 161).
8. Install the lower bezel (see “Installing the lower bezel” on page 148).
9. Install the side cover (see “Installing the side cover” on page 146).
10. Lock the side cover if you unlocked it during removal.

196 System x3200 M3 Types 7327 and 7328: Problem Determination and Service Guide
11. Reconnect the external cables and power cords; then, turn on the attached
devices and turn on the server.

Chapter 5. Removing and replacing server components 197


Removing the front-panel assembly
To remove the front-panel assembly, complete the following steps:
1. Read the safety information that begins on page vii and “Installation guidelines”
on page 141.
2. Turn off the server and all attached devices; then, disconnect all power cords
and external cables.
3. Unlock and remove the side cover (see “Removing the side cover” on page
145).
4. Remove the lower bezel (see “Removing the lower bezel” on page 147).
5. Remove the upper bezel (see “Removing the upper bezel” on page 149).
6. Slide the drives in bay 1 and bay 2 forward slightly (see “Removing a DVD
drive” on page 155 for more information). It is not necessary to remove these
drives.
7. If the server has hot-swap power supplies, remove the power supplies and the
power-supply cage (see “Removing the hot-swap power supply cage” on page
202).
8. Disconnect the front-panel assembly cable from the system board, and note
the routing of the cable (see “System-board internal connectors” on page 16
for the location of the front-panel connector).

9. Press up on the release tab of the front-panel assembly and pull the assembly
toward the rear of the server; then, remove the front-panel assembly from the
chassis.
10. If you are instructed to return the front-panel assembly, follow all packaging
instructions, and use any packaging materials for shipping that are supplied to
you.

198 System x3200 M3 Types 7327 and 7328: Problem Determination and Service Guide
Installing the front-panel assembly
To install the front-panel assembly, complete the following steps:
1. Position the front end of the front-panel assembly in the channel above drive
bay 1 on the left side of the chassis.

2. Push the front-panel assembly toward the front of the chassis until it clicks into
place.
3. Reroute and connect the front-panel assembly cable to the system board (see
“System-board internal connectors” on page 16 for the location of the
front-panel connector).
4. If the server has hot-swap power supplies, install the power-supply cage and
the power supplies (see “Installing the hot-swap power supply cage” on page
204).
5. Push the drives in bay 1 and bay 2 into the drive bays (see “Installing a DVD
drive” on page 156 for more information).
6. Install the upper bezel (see “Installing the upper bezel” on page 150).
7. Install the lower bezel (see “Installing the lower bezel” on page 148).
8. Install the side cover (see “Installing the side cover” on page 146).
9. Lock the side cover if you unlocked it during removal.
10. Reconnect the external cables and power cords; then, turn on the attached
devices and turn on the server.

Removing the front USB connector assembly


To remove the front USB connector assembly, complete the following steps:
1. Read the safety information that begins on page vii and “Installation guidelines”
on page 141.
2. Turn off the server and all attached devices; then, disconnect all power cords
and external cables.
3. Unlock and remove the side cover (see “Removing the side cover” on page
145).
4. Remove the lower bezel (see “Removing the lower bezel” on page 147).
5. Remove the upper bezel (see “Removing the upper bezel” on page 149).
6. Disconnect the front USB cable from the system board, and note the routing of
the cable (see “System-board internal connectors” on page 16 for the location
of the front USB connector).
7. Press down and hold the release tab on the top of the front USB housing;
then, tilt the top of the housing away from the chassis and lift the housing out
of the opening in the chassis.

Chapter 5. Removing and replacing server components 199


8. Squeeze the spring clips on the sides of the front USB connector assembly
and pull the assembly out of the back of the housing.
9. Carefully pull the front USB cable out of the opening in the chassis.
10. If you are instructed to return the front USB connector assembly, follow all
packaging instructions, and use any packaging materials for shipping that are
supplied to you.

Installing the front USB connector assembly


To install the front USB connector assembly, complete the following steps:
1. Carefully insert the front USB cable through the opening in the front of the
chassis.

2. Squeeze the spring clips on the sides of the front USB connector assembly and
insert the assembly into the housing through the back of the housing.
3. Place the bottom edge of the housing into the bottom of the opening in the
chassis; then, tilt the top of the housing into position until it clicks into place.
4. Reroute and connect the front USB cable to the front USB connector on the
system board (see “System-board internal connectors” on page 16 for the
location of the front USB connector).
5. Install the upper bezel (see “Installing the upper bezel” on page 150).
6. Install the lower bezel (see “Installing the lower bezel” on page 148).
7. Install the side cover (see “Installing the side cover” on page 146).
8. Lock the side cover if you unlocked it during removal.

200 System x3200 M3 Types 7327 and 7328: Problem Determination and Service Guide
9. Reconnect the external cables and power cords; then, turn on the attached
devices and turn on the server.

Removing the rear adapter retention bracket


To remove the rear adapter-retention bracket, complete the following steps:
1. Turn off the server and all attached devices; then, disconnect all power cords
and external cables.
2. Unlock and remove the side cover (see “Removing the side cover” on page
145).
3. Remove all adapters (if necessary) and place the adapters on static-protective
surface.

Note: You might find it helpful to note where each adapter is installed before
you remove the adapters.
4. Release the rear adapter-retention bracket by lifting up on the rear
adapter-retention bracket, and rotate the bracket partially toward the closed
position.
5. Grasp the bracket on one side at the hinge point and pull inward (while you
rotate the bracket slightly toward the front of the server) until the bracket is free
of the hinge pin; then, grasp the bracket on the other side at the hinge point,
pull inward until the bracket is free of the hinge pin, and remove the rear
adapter-retention bracket from the server.

Hinge pin

Rear adapter
retention
bracket

Installing the rear adapter retention bracket


To install the rear adapter-retention bracket, complete the following steps:
1. Position the rear adapter retention bracket so that the hole in one of the hinge
points is aligned with the hinge pin on the chassis; then, place the hinge pin
through the hole on the chassis.
2. Rotate the rear adapter-retention bracket into place so that the hole in the
opposite hinge point snaps into place over the hinge pin on the chassis.
3. Install the adapters.
4. Install the side cover (see “Installing the side cover” on page 146).
5. Lock the side cover if you unlocked it during removal.
6. Reconnect the external cables and power cords; then, turn on the attached
devices and turn on the server.

Chapter 5. Removing and replacing server components 201


Removing the front adapter-retention bracket
To remove the front adapter-retention bracket, complete the following steps:
1. Read the safety information that begins on page vii and “Installation guidelines”
on page 141.
2. Turn off the server and all attached devices; then, disconnect all power cords
and external cables.
3. Unlock and remove the side cover (see “Removing the side cover” on page
145).
4. Open the front and rear adapter-retention brackets.
5. Remove all adapters (if necessary) and place them on a static-protective
surface.

Note: You might find it helpful to note where each adapter is installed before
you remove the adapters.
6. Grasp one side of the bracket at a hinge point and pull outward (while you
rotate the bracket slightly toward the rear of the server) until the hinge pin on
the bracket is free of the hole; then, grasp the bracket on the other side at the
hinge point, pull outward until the bracket is free of the hinge pin, and remove
the rear adapter-retention bracket from the server.

Installing the front adapter-retention bracket


To install the front adapter-retention bracket, complete the following steps:
1. Insert one of the hinge pins on the front adapter-retention bracket into the metal
hinge point on the fan cage assembly.
2. Rotate the other hinge pin on the front adapter-retention bracket into position
and push the hinge pin into the other metal hinge point. The hinge pin will
protrude through the hole in the metal hinge point when the adapter-retention
bracket is seated correctly.
3. Reinstall any adapters that you removed earlier.
4. Close the front and rear adapter retention brackets.
5. Install the side cover (see “Installing the side cover” on page 146).
6. Lock the side cover.
7. Reconnect the external cables and power cords; then, turn on the attached
devices and turn on the server.

Removing the hot-swap power supply cage


This procedure applies only to server models that have hot-swap power-supplies.

To remove the power-supply cage, complete the following steps:


1. Read the safety information that begins on page vii and “Installation guidelines”
on page 141.
2. Turn off the server and all attached devices; then, disconnect all power cords
and external cables.
3. Unlock and remove the side cover (see “Removing the side cover” on page
145).
4. Remove the hot-swap power supplies (see “Removing a hot-swap power
supply” on page 165).

Note: It might be helpful to lay the server on its side for the remainder of this
procedure.

202 System x3200 M3 Types 7327 and 7328: Problem Determination and Service Guide
5. Disconnect the cables from the power-supply cage to the system board and all
internal components.
6. Remove the four black screws that secure the power-supply cage to the
chassis; then, slide the cage toward the front of the server to disengage the
retaining clips from the top of the chassis and lift the cage out of the chassis.

7. If you are instructed to return the power-supply cage, follow all packaging
instructions, and use any packaging materials for shipping that are supplied to
you.

Chapter 5. Removing and replacing server components 203


Installing the hot-swap power supply cage
This procedure applies only to server models that have hot-swap power-supplies.

To install the hot-swap power supply cage, complete the following steps:
1. Place the power-supply cage into the chassis and slide it toward the rear of the
server until the retaining clips engage the top of the chassis.

2. Install the four screws that secure the power-supply cage to the chassis.
3. Connect the cables from the power-supply cage to the system board and all
internal components (see “System-board internal connectors” on page 16 for the
locations of the internal connectors).
4. Reinstall both hot-swap power supplies (see “Installing a hot-swap power
supply” on page 167).
5. Install the side cover (see “Installing the side cover” on page 146).
6. Lock the side cover if you unlocked it during removal.
7. Reconnect the external cables and power cords; then, turn on the attached
devices and turn on the server.

Removing and replacing FRUs


Field replaceable units (FRUs) must be installed only by trained service technicians.

Removing a ServeRAID-BR10il v2 SAS/SATA controller


To remove the mini-SAS/SATA RAID controller, complete the following steps:
1. Read the safety information that begins on page vii and “Installation guidelines”
on page 141.
2. Turn off the server and all attached devices; then, disconnect all power cords
and external cables.

Note: When you disconnect the power source from the server, you lose the
ability to view the LEDs because the LEDs are not lit when the power source is
removed. Before you disconnect the power source, make a note of which LEDs
are lit, including the LEDs that are lit on the operation information panel and
LEDs inside the server on the system board.

204 System x3200 M3 Types 7327 and 7328: Problem Determination and Service Guide
3. Unlock and remove the side cover (see “Removing the side cover” on page
145).
4. Open the rear adapter-retention bracket until the release lever on the right side
of the bracket clicks into place.
5. Squeeze the tabs on both sides of the connector on the signal cable and
remove the cable from the SAS/SATA controller.

PCIe SAS slot

ServeRaid-BR10il
controller

6. Carefully disengage the tabs on each side of the SAS/SATA controller connector
and the front of the SAS/SATA controller from the plastic standoff.
7. Grasp the edges of the SAS/SATA controller and pull it out of the connector. If
the standoff comes away from the system board with the controller, gently pull it
out of the controller and push it back into the hole on the system board.
8. If you are instructed to return the SAS/SATA controller, follow all packaging
instructions, and use any packaging materials for shipping that are supplied to
you.

Installing a ServeRAID-BR10il v2 SAS/SATA controller


To install the SAS/SATA RAID controller, complete the following steps:
1. Touch the static-protective package that contains the SAS/SATA controller to
any unpainted surface on the outside of the server; then, remove the SAS/SATA
controller from the package.
2. Position the SAS/SATA controller over the connector and the plastic standoff;
then, press the SAS/SATA controller firmly into the connector and onto the
plastic standoff.

Chapter 5. Removing and replacing server components 205


PCIe SAS slot

ServeRaid-BR10il
controller

3. Connect the signal cable to the SAS/SATA controller.


4. Install and lock the side cover (see “Installing the side cover” on page 146).
5. Reconnect the external cables and power cords; then, turn on the attached
devices and turn on the server.

Removing a non-hot-swap power supply


This procedure applies only to server models that have a non-hot-swap power
supply. See “Removing a hot-swap power supply” on page 165 for information
about the removal of a hot-swap power supply.

When you remove or install a non-hot-swap power supply, observe the following
precautions.

Statement 8:

CAUTION:
Never remove the cover on a power supply or any part that has the following
label attached.

Hazardous voltage, current, and energy levels are present inside any
component that has this label attached. There are no serviceable parts inside
these components. If you suspect a problem with one of these parts, contact
a service technician.

206 System x3200 M3 Types 7327 and 7328: Problem Determination and Service Guide
To remove a non-hot-swap power supply, complete the following steps:
1. Read the safety information that begins on page vii and “Installation guidelines”
on page 141.
2. Turn off the server and all attached devices; then, disconnect all power cords
and external cables.
3. Unlock and remove the side cover (see “Removing the side cover” on page
145).

Note: It might be helpful to lay the server on its side for the remainder of this
procedure.
4. Disconnect the cables from the power supply to the system board and all
internal components.
Attention: Support the power supply while you remove the mounting screws.
After the screws are removed, the power supply is loose and can damage other
components in the server.
5. While you support the power supply, remove the four screws that secure it to
the chassis; then, lift the power supply out of the chassis. Save the screws to
use when you install the replacement power supply.

6. If you are instructed to return the power supply, follow all packaging instructions,
and use any packaging materials for shipping that are supplied to you.

Chapter 5. Removing and replacing server components 207


Installing a non-hot-swap power supply
This procedure applies only to server models that have a non-hot-swap power
supply. See “Installing a hot-swap power supply” on page 167 for information about
the installation of a hot-swap power supply.

To install a non-hot-swap power supply, complete the following steps:


1. Position the power supply in the chassis so that the screw holes in the power
supply are aligned with the corresponding holes in the rear of the chassis.

2. Install the four screws that secure the power supply to the chassis.
3. Connect the cables from the power supply to the system board and all internal
components (see “System-board internal connectors” on page 16 for the
locations of the internal connectors).
4. Install the side cover (see “Installing the side cover” on page 146).
5. Lock the side cover if you unlocked it during removal.
6. Reconnect the external cables and power cords; then, turn on the attached
devices and turn on the server.

208 System x3200 M3 Types 7327 and 7328: Problem Determination and Service Guide
Removing the microprocessor and fan sink
To remove the microprocessor and fan sink, complete the following steps:
1. Read the safety information that begins on page vii and “Installation guidelines”
on page 141.
2. Turn off the server and all attached devices; then, disconnect all power cords
and external cables.
3. Turn the server on its side so that it is lying flat, with the cover facing up.
4. Unlock and remove the side cover (see “Removing the side cover” on page
145).
5. Remove the lower bezel (see “Removing the lower bezel” on page 147).
6. Remove the hard disk drives.
7. Press and hold the drive cage release tab; then, rotate the drive cage out of
the chassis until the retaining tab on top of the cage locks into place.
8. Disconnect any cables that impede access to the fan sink and microprocessor.
Attention: The fan-sink retention lever is spring-loaded when the fan sink is
in place. Releasing the lever too quickly or allowing it to spring upward can
damage the fan sink and surrounding components.
9. Remove the fan sink from the microprocessor:
a. Disconnect the fan-sink cable from the system board.
b. Release the fan-sink retention lever by pressing down on the end, moving
it to the side and slowly releasing it to the open (up) position.

Important: Be careful when you handle the microprocessor and fan sink.
If the microprocessor and fan sink will be reused, do not contaminate the
thermal material between them.

Orientation indicators

Fan-sink retention lever

Chapter 5. Removing and replacing server components 209


c. Tip the top of the fan sink toward the front of the server while you slide it
away from the lower flange of the retention module; then, remove it from
the server. After removal, place the fan sink on its side on a clean, flat
surface.

Attention: The microprocessor retention latch is spring-loaded when the


microprocessor is in place. Releasing the latch too quickly or allowing it to
spring upward can damage the microprocessor and surrounding components.
10. Release the microprocessor retention latch by pressing down on the end,
moving it to the side, and slowly releasing it to the open (up) position.
11. Open the microprocessor bracket frame by lifting up the tab on the top edge.
Microprocessor

Alignment
Microprocessor marks
bracket frame

Microprocessor
release lever

12. Carefully lift the microprocessor straight up and out of the socket, and place it
on a static-protective surface.
13. If you are instructed to return the microprocessor and fan sink, follow all
packaging instructions, and use any packaging materials for shipping that are
supplied to you.

210 System x3200 M3 Types 7327 and 7328: Problem Determination and Service Guide
Installing a microprocessor and fan sink
To install the microprocessor, complete the following steps:
1. Touch the static-protective package that contains the microprocessor to any
unpainted metal surface on the server. Then, remove the microprocessor from
the package.
2. Remove the protective cover, tape, or label from the surface of the
microprocessor socket, if any is present.
3. Rotate the release lever on the microprocessor socket to the fully open
position.
Attention: Make sure that the release lever on the microprocessor socket is
in the fully open position before you insert the microprocessor in the socket.
Failure to do so might result in permanent damage to the microprocessor,
microprocessor socket, and system board.
4. Carefully grasp the microprocessor and place the microprocessor into the
microprocessor socket.

Note: To maintain correct orientation between the microprocessor and the


microprocessor socket during installation, observe the following information:
v The microprocessor has two notches that are keyed to two tabs on the
sides of the socket.
v A triangle-shaped indicator on one corner of the microprocessor points to a
45-degree angle on one corner of the socket.
v Do not use excessive force when you press the microprocessor into the
socket.

Orientation indicators

Fan-sink retention lever

5. Close the microprocessor bracket frame; then, close the microprocessor


retention latch and lock it securely in place.

Chapter 5. Removing and replacing server components 211


Microprocessor

Alignment
Microprocessor marks
bracket frame

Microprocessor
release lever

6. Install the fan sink:


a. Make sure that the fan sink retention lever is in the fully open position.

Important: Be careful when you handle the microprocessor and fan sink.
Do not contaminate the thermal material between them.

b. Slide the bottom edge of the fan sink under the lower flange of the
retention module; then, place the top of the fan sink onto the top of the
retention module.
c. Close the fan sink retention lever and lock it securely in place.
d. Reconnect the fan sink cable to the system board (see “System-board
internal connectors” on page 16 for the location of the fan-sink connector).
7. Reconnect any cables that you disconnected during the removal of the old
microprocessor.
8. Rotate the drive cage toward the front of the server until it stops; then, lift and
hold the retaining tab on top of the drive cage while you rotate the drive cage
into the chassis until it locks into place.
9. Reinstall the hard disk drives.

212 System x3200 M3 Types 7327 and 7328: Problem Determination and Service Guide
10. Install the lower bezel (see “Installing the lower bezel” on page 148).
11. Install the side cover (see “Installing the side cover” on page 146).
12. Lock the side cover if you unlocked it during removal.
13. Reconnect the external cables and power cords; then, turn on the attached
devices and turn on the server.

Thermal grease
The thermal grease must be replaced whenever the fan sink has been removed
from the top of the microprocessor and is going to be reused or when debris is
found in the grease.

When you are installing the fan sink on the same microprocessor that is was
removed from, make sure that:
v The thermal grease on the fan sink and microprocessor is not contaminated.
v Additional thermal grease is not added to the existing thermal grease on the fan
sink and microprocessor.

Note:
v Read the Safety information on page vii.
v Read the “Installation guidelines” on page 141.
v Read “Handling static-sensitive devices” on page 144.

To replace damaged or contaminated thermal grease on the microprocessor and


fan sink, complete the following steps:
1. Place the fan sink on a clean work surface.
2. Remove the cleaning pad from its package and unfold it completely.
3. Use the cleaning pad to wipe the thermal grease from the bottom of the fan
sink.

Note: Make sure that all of the thermal grease is removed.


4. Use a clean area of the cleaning pad to wipe the thermal grease from the
microprocessor; then, dispose of the cleaning pad after all of the thermal grease
is removed.
0.02 mL of thermal
grease

Microprocessor

5. Use the thermal-grease syringe to place 9 uniformly spaced dots of 0.02 mL


each on the top of the microprocessor. The outermost dots must be within
approximately 5 mm of the edge of the microprocessor, this is to ensure uniform
distribution of the grease.

Chapter 5. Removing and replacing server components 213


Note: If the grease is properly applied, approximately half of the grease will
remain in the syringe.
6. Install the fan sink onto the microprocessor as described in “Installing a
microprocessor and fan sink” on page 211.

214 System x3200 M3 Types 7327 and 7328: Problem Determination and Service Guide
Removing the system board
To remove the system board, complete the following steps:
1. Read the safety information that begins on page vii and “Installation guidelines”
on page 141.
2. Turn off the server and all attached devices; then, disconnect all power cords
and external cables.
3. Turn the server on its side so that it is lying flat, with the cover facing up.
4. Unlock and remove the side cover (see “Removing the side cover” on page
145).
5. Note where each cable is connected; then, disconnect all cables from the
system board.
6. Press and hold the drive cage release tab; then, rotate the drive cage out of
the chassis until the retaining tab on top of the cage locks into place.
7. Remove any of the following components (in addition to others that might not
be listed) that are installed on the system board and put them in a safe,
static-protective place:
v Adapters (see “Removing an adapter” on page 151).
v SAS/SATA controller (see “Removing a ServeRAID-BR10il v2 SAS/SATA
controller” on page 204).
v Virtual media key (see “Removing the virtual media key” on page 181).
v Microprocessor and fan sink (see “Removing the microprocessor and fan
sink” on page 209).
v DIMMs (see “Removing a memory module” on page 168).
v Battery (see “Removing the system battery” on page 183).
v SAS/SATA controller (see “Removing a ServeRAID-BR10il v2 SAS/SATA
controller” on page 204 ).
v Hypervisor key (see “Removing a USB embedded hypervisor flash device”
on page 180).
v The fan connector covers.
8. Remove the four screws that secure the fan sink retention module and fan sink
mounting bracket to the system board; then, set the fan sink retention module,
fan sink mounting bracket, and screws aside for use later.

Note: Make sure that you observe the orientation of the fan sink retention
module before you move it so that when you reinstall it, you install it in the
same orientation.

Chapter 5. Removing and replacing server components 215


9. Remove the eight screws (seven in front and one in rear) that secure the
system board to the chassis.

System board
(8 screws)

10. Slide the system board toward the front of the server to disengage the tabs on
the fan sink mounting bracket from the slots on the bottom of the chassis;
then, carefully lift the system board out of the server.

216 System x3200 M3 Types 7327 and 7328: Problem Determination and Service Guide
11. Remove the fan connector covers from fan connectors 1, 3, and 5 on the
system board. Then, put the fan connector covers aside for use later.
12. If you are instructed to return the system board, follow all packaging
instructions, and use any packaging materials for shipping that are supplied to
you.

Installing the system board


To install the system board, complete the following steps:
1. Touch the static-protective package that contains the system board to any
unpainted metal surface on the server. Then, remove the system board from
the package.
2. Install the fan connector covers removed from the old system board onto fan
connectors 1, 3, and 5 on the system board.

3. Place the fan sink mounting bracket underneath the system board and align
the holes on fan sink mounting bracket with the four screw holes for the fan
sink retention module slot on system board. Place the fan sink retention
module on top of the system board and align it with the four screw holes for
the fan sink retention module slot (make sure that the fan sink retention
module orientation of the is correct). Take the four screws that you removed
earlier and secure the fan sink mounting bracket and the fan sink retention
module to the system board.

Chapter 5. Removing and replacing server components 217


4. Insert the system board into the chassis and slide it toward the rear of the
server until the tabs on the fan sink mounting bracket is fully engaged in the
holes for fan sink mounting bracket slots on the bottom the chassis.

Note: The tabs are fully engaged when the screw holes in the system board
are aligned with the corresponding holes in the chassis.

System board
(8 screws)

218 System x3200 M3 Types 7327 and 7328: Problem Determination and Service Guide
5. Install the eight screws (seven in front and one in rear) that secure the system
board to the chassis.
6. Install any of the following components that you removed from the system
board:
v The fan connector covers.
v Hypervisor key (see “Installing a USB embedded hypervisor flash device” on
page 180).
v Virtual media key (see “Installing the virtual media key” on page 182).
v SAS/SATA controller (see “Installing a ServeRAID-BR10il v2 SAS/SATA
controller” on page 205 ).
v Battery (see “Installing the battery” on page 184).
v DIMMs (see “Installing a memory module” on page 169).
v Microprocessor and fan sink (see “Installing a microprocessor and fan sink”
on page 211).
v Adapters (see “Installing an adapter” on page 152).
7. Press and hold the retaining tab on top of the cage; then, rotate the drive cage
into the chassis until it locks into place.
8. Reconnect any cables to the system board that you disconnected during
removal.
9. Install the side cover (see “Installing the side cover” on page 146).
10. Lock the side cover if you unlocked it during removal.
11. Reconnect the external cables and power cords; then, turn on the attached
devices and turn on the server.

Chapter 5. Removing and replacing server components 219


220 System x3200 M3 Types 7327 and 7328: Problem Determination and Service Guide
Chapter 6. Configuration information and instructions
This chapter provides information about updating the firmware and using the
configuration utilities.

Updating the firmware


Important: Some cluster solutions require specific code levels or coordinated code
updates. If the device is part of a cluster solution, verify that the latest level of code
is supported for the cluster solution before you update the code.

The firmware for the server is periodically updated and is available for download on
the IBM Web site. To check for the latest level of firmware, such as the server
firmware, vital product data (VPD) code, device drivers, and service processor
firmware, complete the following steps.

Note: Changes are made periodically to the IBM Web site. The actual procedure
might vary slightly from what is described in this document.
1. Go to http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/.
2. Under Product support, click System x.
3. Under Popular links, click Software and device drivers.
4. Click System x3200 M3 to display the matrix of downloadable files for the
server.

Download the latest firmware for the server; then, install the firmware, using the
instructions that are included with the downloaded files.

When you replace a device in the server, you might have to either update the
server with the latest version of the firmware that is stored in memory on the device
or restore the pre-existing firmware from a diskette or CD image.

The following items are downloadable from the Web at http://www.ibm.com/systems/


support/:
v Server firmware is stored in ROM on the system board.
v IMM firmware is stored in ROM on the system board.
v Ethernet firmware is stored in ROM on the Ethernet controller.
v ServeRAID firmware is stored in ROM on the ServeRAID adapter.
v SAS/SATA firmware is stored in ROM on the SAS/SATA controller on the system
board.

Major components contain VPD code. You can select to update the VPD code
during the server firmware update procedure.

Configuring the server


The ServerGuide program provides software-setup tools and installation tools that
are designed for the server. Use this CD during the installation of the server to
configure basic hardware features, such as an integrated SAS/SATA controller with
RAID capabilities, and to simplify the installation of your operating system. For
information about using this CD, see “Using the ServerGuide Setup and Installation
CD” on page 223.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2011 221


In addition to the ServerGuide Setup and Installation CD, you can use the following
configuration programs to customize the server hardware:
v Setup utility
The Setup utility is part of the basic input/output system firmware. Use it to
change the startup-device sequence, set the date and time, and set passwords.
For information about using this program, see “Using the Setup utility” on page
225.
v Boot Manager program
The Boot Manager program is part of the server firmware. Use it to override the
startup sequence that is set in the Setup utility and temporarily assign a device to
be first in the startup sequence. For more information about using this program,
see “Using the Boot Manager program” on page 229.
v Integrated Management Module
Use the integrated management module (IMM) for configuration, to update the
firmware and sensor data record/field replaceable unit (SDR/FRU) data, and to
remotely manage a network. For information about using these programs, see
“Using the integrated management module” on page 230.
v Remote presence capability and blue-screen capture
The remote presence and blue-screen capture feature are integrated into the
Integrated Management Module (IMM). The virtual media key is required to
enable the remote presence functions. When the optional virtual media key is
installed in the server, it activates the remote presence functions. Without the
virtual media key, you will not be able to access the network remotely to mount
or unmount drives or images on the client system. However, you will still be able
to access the host graphical user interface through the Web interface without the
Virtual Media Key. To order the optional IBM Virtual Media Key, contact your IBM
marketing representative or authorized reseller. For more information about how
to enable the remote presence function, see “Enabling the remote presence
feature” on page 231.
v Ethernet controller configuration
For information about configuring the Ethernet controller, see “Configuring the
Ethernet controller” on page 233.
v IBM Advanced Settings Utility (ASU) program
Use this program as an alternative to the Setup utility for modifying UEFI
settings. Use the ASU program online or out of band to modify UEFI settings
from the command line without the need to restart the server to access the Setup
utility. For more information about using this program, see “IBM Advanced
Settings Utility program” on page 236.
v LSI Configuration Utility program
Use the LSI Configuration Utility program to configure the integrated SAS/SATA
controller with RAID capabilities and the devices that are attached to it. For
information about using this program, see “Using the LSI Configuration Utility
program” on page 234.
The following table lists the different server configurations and the applications
that are available for configuring and managing RAID arrays.
Table 16. Server configuration and applications for configuring and managing RAID arrays
RAID array configuration RAID array management
(before operating system is (after operating system is
Server configuration installed) installed)
ServeRAID-BR10il v2 LSI Utility (Setup utility, press MegaRAID Storage Manager
adapter (LSI 1068) installed Ctrl+C), ServerGuide (for monitoring storage only)

222 System x3200 M3 Types 7327 and 7328: Problem Determination and Service Guide
Table 16. Server configuration and applications for configuring and managing RAID
arrays (continued)
RAID array configuration RAID array management
(before operating system is (after operating system is
Server configuration installed) installed)
ServeRAID-MR10i adapter MegaRAID Storage Manager MegaRAID Storage Manager
(LSI 1078) installed (MSM),, MegaRAID BIOS (MSM)
Configuration Utility (press C
to start), ServerGuide
ServeRAID-MR10is VAULT MegaRAID Storage Manager MegaRAID Storage Manager
adapter installed (MSM),, MegaRAID BIOS (MSM)
Configuration Utility (press C
to start), ServerGuide

Using the ServerGuide Setup and Installation CD


The ServerGuide Setup and Installation CD provides software setup tools and
installation tools that are designed for your server. The ServerGuide program
detects the server model and hardware options that are installed and uses that
information during setup to configure the hardware. The ServerGuide program
simplifies operating-system installations by providing updated device drivers and, in
some cases, installing them automatically. To download the CD, go to
http://www.ibm.com/systems/management/serverguide/sub.html and click IBM
Service and Support Site.

The ServerGuide program has the following features:


v An easy-to-use interface
v Diskette-free setup, and configuration programs that are based on detected
hardware
v ServeRAID Manager program, which configures your ServeRAID adapter
v Device drivers that are provided for your server model and detected hardware
v Operating-system partition size and file-system type that are selectable during
setup

ServerGuide features
Features and functions can vary slightly with different versions of the ServerGuide
program. To learn more about the version that you have, start the ServerGuide
Setup and Installation CD and view the online overview. Not all features are
supported on all server models.

The ServerGuide program requires a supported IBM server with an enabled


startable (bootable) CD drive. In addition to the ServerGuide Setup and Installation
CD, you must have your operating-system CD to install the operating system.

The ServerGuide program performs the following tasks:


v Sets system date and time
v Detects the RAID adapter or controller and runs the SAS/SATA RAID
configuration program
v Checks the microcode (firmware) levels of a ServeRAID adapter and determines
whether a later level is available from the CD
v Detects installed hardware options and provides updated device drivers for most
adapters and devices
v Provides diskette-free installation for supported Windows operating systems

Chapter 6. Configuration information and instructions 223


v Includes an online readme file with links to tips for your hardware and
operating-system installation

Setup and configuration overview


When you use the ServerGuide Setup and Installation CD, you do not need setup
diskettes. You can use the CD to configure any supported IBM server model. The
setup program provides a list of tasks that are required to set up your server model.
On a server with a ServeRAID adapter or SAS/SATA controller with RAID
capabilities, you can run the SAS/SATA RAID configuration program to create
logical drives.

Note: Features and functions can vary slightly with different versions of the
ServerGuide program.

When you start the ServerGuide Setup and Installation CD, the program prompts
you to complete the following tasks:
v Select your language.
v Select your keyboard layout and country.
v View the overview to learn about ServerGuide features.
v View the readme file to review installation tips for your operating system and
adapter.
v Start the operating-system installation. You will need your operating-system CD.

Important: Before you install a legacy operating system (such as VMware) on a


server with an LSI SAS controller, you must first complete the following steps:
1. Update the device driver for the LSI SAS controller to the latest level.
2. In the Setup utility, set Legacy Only as the first option in the boot sequence in
the Boot Manager menu.
3. Using the LSI Configuration Utility program, select a boot drive.
For detailed information and instructions, go to https://www-947.ibm.com/systems/
support/supportsite.wss/docdisplay?lndocid=MIGR-5083225.

Typical operating-system installation


The ServerGuide program can reduce the time it takes to install an operating
system. It provides the device drivers that are required for your hardware and for
the operating system that you are installing. This section describes a typical
ServerGuide operating-system installation.

Note: Features and functions can vary slightly with different versions of the
ServerGuide program.
1. After you have completed the setup process, the operating-system installation
program starts. (You will need your operating-system CD to complete the
installation.)
2. The ServerGuide program stores information about the server model, service
processor, hard disk drive controllers, and network adapters. Then, the program
checks the CD for newer device drivers. This information is stored and then
passed to the operating-system installation program.
3. The ServerGuide program presents operating-system partition options that are
based on your operating-system selection and the installed hard disk drives.
4. The ServerGuide program prompts you to insert your operating-system CD and
restart the server. At this point, the installation program for the operating system
takes control to complete the installation.

224 System x3200 M3 Types 7327 and 7328: Problem Determination and Service Guide
Installing your operating system without using ServerGuide
If you have already configured the server hardware and you are not using the
ServerGuide program to install your operating system, complete the following steps
to download the latest operating-system installation instructions from the IBM Web
site.

Note: Changes are made periodically to the IBM Web site. The actual procedure
might vary slightly from what is described in this document.
1. Go to http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/.
2. Under Product support, click System x.
3. From the menu on the left side of the page, click System x support search.
4. From the Task menu, select Install.
5. From the Product family menu, select System x3200 M3.
6. From the Operating system menu, select your operating system, and then click
Search to display the available installation documents.

Using the Setup utility


Use the Unified Extensible Firmware Interface (UEFI), formerly BIOS, Setup utility
to perform the following tasks:
v View configuration information
v View and change assignments for devices and I/O ports
v Set the date and time
v Set the startup characteristics of the server and the order of startup devices
v Set and change settings for advanced hardware features
v View, set, and change settings for power-management features
v View and clear error logs
v Resolve configuration conflicts

Starting the Setup utility


To start the Setup utility, complete the following steps:
1. Turn on the server.

Note: Approximately 1 to 3 minutes after the server is connected to ac power,


the power-control button becomes active.
2. When the prompt <F1> Setup is displayed, press F1. If you have set an
administrator password, you must type the administrator password to access the
full Setup utility menu. If you do not type the administrator password, a limited
Setup utility menu is available.
3. Select settings to view or change.

Setup utility menu choices


The following choices are on the Setup utility main menu for the UEFI. Depending
on the version of the firmware, some menu choices might differ slightly from these
descriptions.
v System Information
Select this choice to view information about the server. When you make changes
through other choices in the Setup utility, some of those changes are reflected in
the system information; you cannot change settings directly in the system
information. This choice is on the full Setup utility menu only.
– System Summary

Chapter 6. Configuration information and instructions 225


Select this choice to view configuration information, including the ID, speed,
and cache size of the microprocessors, machine type and model of the server,
the serial number, the system UUID, and the amount of installed memory.
When you make configuration changes through other options in the Setup
utility, the changes are reflected in the system summary; you cannot change
settings directly in the system summary.
– Product Data
Select this choice to view the system-board identifier, the revision level or
issue date of the firmware, the integrated management module and
diagnostics code, and the version and date.
This choice is on the full Setup utility menu only.
v System Settings
Select this choice to view or change the server component settings.
– Processors
Select this choice to view or change the processor settings.
– Memory
Select this choice to view or change the memory settings.
– Devices and I/O Ports
Select this choice to view or change assignments for devices and input/output
(I/O) ports. You can configure the serial ports, configure remote console
redirection, enable or disable integrated Ethernet controllers. If you disable a
device, it cannot be configured, and the operating system will not be able to
detect it (this is equivalent to disconnecting the device).
– Power
Select this choice to view or change power capping to control consumption,
processors, and performance states.
– Legacy Support
Select this choice to view or set legacy support.
- Force Legacy Video on Boot
Select this choice to force INT video support, if the operating system does
not support UEFI video output standards.
- Rehook INT 19h
Select this choice to enable or disable devices from taking control of the
boot process. The default is Disable.
- Legacy Thunk Support
Select this choice to enable or disable UEFI to interact with PCI mass
storage devices that are non-UEFI compliant.
– Integrated Management Module
Select this choice to view or change the settings for the integrated
management module.
- POST Watchdog Timer
Select this choice to view or enable the POST watchdog timer.
- POST Watchdog Timer Value
Select this choice to view or set the POST loader watchdog timer value.
- Reboot System on NMI
Enable or disable restarting the system whenever a nonmaskable interrupt
(NMI) occurs. Enable is the default.
- Commands on USB Interface Preference

226 System x3200 M3 Types 7327 and 7328: Problem Determination and Service Guide
Select this choice to enable or disable the Ethernet over USB interface on
IMM.
- Network Configuration
Select this choice to view the system management network interface port,
the IMM MAC address, the current IMM IP address, and host name; define
the static IMM IP address, subnet mask, and gateway address, specify
whether to use the static IP address or have DHCP assign the IMM IP
address, save the network changes.
- Reset IMM to Defaults
Select this choice to view or reset IMM to the default settings.
- Reset IMM
Select this choice to reset IMM.
– System Security
Select this choice to view or configure Trusted Platform Module (TPM)
support.
– Adapters and UEFI Drivers
Select this choice to view information about the UEFI 1.10 and UEFI 2.0
compliant adapters and drivers installed in the server.
– Network
Select this choice to view or configure the network device options, such as
iSCSI, PXE, and network devices.
v Date and Time
Select this choice to set the date and time in the server, in 24-hour format
(hour:minute:second).
This choice is on the full Setup utility menu only.
v Start Options
Select this choice to view or boot to devices, including the startup sequence, .
The server starts from the first boot record that it finds.
This choice is on the full Setup utility menu only.
v Boot Manager
Select this choice to view, add, delete, or change the device boot priority, boot
from a file, select a one-time boot, or reset the boot order to the default setting. If
the server has Wake on LAN hardware and software and the operating system
supports Wake on LAN functions, you can specify a startup sequence for the
Wake on LAN functions. For example, you can define a startup sequence that
checks for a disc in the DVD drive, then checks the hard disk drive, and then
checks a network adapter.
v System Event Logs
Select this choice to enter the System Event Manager, where you can view the
error messages in the system event logs. You can use the arrow keys to move
between pages in the error log.
The system event logs contain all event and error messages that have been
generated during POST, by the systems-management interface handler, and by
the system service processor. Run the diagnostic programs to get more
information about error codes that occur. See “Running the diagnostic programs”
on page 74 for instructions on running the diagnostic programs.
Important: If the system-error LED on the front of the server is lit but there are
no other error indications, clear the IMM system-event log. Also, after you
complete a repair or correct an error, clear the IMM system-event log to turn off
the system-error LED on the front of the server.

Chapter 6. Configuration information and instructions 227


– POST Event Viewer
Select this choice to enter the POST event viewer to view the POST error
messages.
– System Event Log
Select this choice to view the IMM system event log.
– Clear System Event Log
Select this choice to clear the IMM system event log.
v User Security
Select this choice to set, change, or clear passwords. See “Passwords” for more
information.
This choice is on the full and limited Setup utility menu.
– Set Power-on Password
Select this choice to set or change a power-on password. See “Power-on
password” on page 229 for more information.
– Clear Power-on Password
Select this choice to clear a power-on password. See “Power-on password”
on page 229 for more information.
– Set Administrator Password
Select this choice to set or change an administrator password. An
administrator password is intended to be used by a system administrator; it
limits access to the full Setup utility menu. If an administrator password is set,
the full Setup utility menu is available only if you type the administrator
password at the password prompt. For more information, see “Administrator
password” on page 229.
– Clear Administrator Password
Select this choice to clear an administrator password. For more information,
see “Administrator password” on page 229.
v Save Settings
Select this choice to save the changes that you have made in the settings.
v Restore Settings
Select this choice to cancel the changes that you have made in the settings and
restore the previous settings.
v Load Default Settings
Select this choice to cancel the changes that you have made in the settings and
restore the factory settings.
v Exit Setup
Select this choice to exit from the Setup utility. If you have not saved the
changes that you have made in the settings, you are asked whether you want to
save the changes or exit without saving them.

Passwords
From the User Security menu choice, you can set, change, and delete a power-on
password and an administrator password. The User Security choice is on the full
Setup utility menu only.

If you set only a power-on password, you must type the power-on password to
complete the system startup and to have access to the full Setup utility menu.

An administrator password is intended to be used by a system administrator; it


limits access to the full Setup utility menu. If you set only an administrator

228 System x3200 M3 Types 7327 and 7328: Problem Determination and Service Guide
password, you do not have to type a password to complete the system startup, but
you must type the administrator password to access the Setup utility menu.

If you set a power-on password for a user and an administrator password for a
system administrator, you must type the power-on password to complete the system
startup. A system administrator who types the administrator password has access to
the full Setup utility menu; the system administrator can give the user authority to
set, change, and delete the power-on password. A user who types the power-on
password has access to only the limited Setup utility menu; the user can set,
change, and delete the power-on password, if the system administrator has given
the user that authority.

Power-on password: If a power-on password is set, when you turn on the server,
the system startup will not be completed until you type the power-on password. You
can use any combination of between six and 20 printable ASCII characters for the
password.

If you forget the power-on password, you can regain access to the server in the
following way:
v If an administrator password is set, type the administrator password at the
password prompt. Start the Setup utility and reset the power-on password.

Administrator password: An administrator password is intended to be used by a


system administrator; it limits access to the full Setup utility menu. You can use any
combination of between six and 20 printable ASCII characters for the password.

Attention: If you set an administrator password and then forget it, there is no way
to change, override, or remove it. You must replace the system board.

Using the Boot Manager program


The Boot Manager program is a built-in, menu-driven configuration utility program
that you can use to temporarily redefine the first startup device without changing
settings in the Setup utility.

To use the Boot Manager program, complete the following steps:


1. Turn off the server.
2. Restart the server.
3. When the prompt <F12> Select Boot Device is displayed, press F12. If a
bootable USB mass storage device is installed, a submenu item (USB
Key/Disk) is displayed.
4. Use the Up arrow and Down arrow keys to select an item from the Boot
Selection Menu and press Enter.

The next time the server starts, it returns to the startup sequence that is set in the
Setup utility.

Starting the backup server firmware


The system board contains a backup copy area for the server firmware (formerly
BIOS firmware). This is a secondary copy of the server firmware that you update
only during the process of updating the server firmware. If the primary copy of the
server firmware becomes damaged, use this backup copy.

To force the server to start from the backup copy, turn off the server; then, place the
J6 jumper in the backup position (pins 2 and 3).

Chapter 6. Configuration information and instructions 229


Use the backup copy of the server firmware until the primary copy is restored. After
the primary copy is restored, turn off the server; then, move the J6 jumper back to
the primary position (pins 1 and 2).

Using the integrated management module


The integrated management module (IMM) is a second generation of the functions
that were formerly provided by the baseboard management controller hardware. It
combines service processor functions, video controller, and (when an optional
virtual media key is installed) remote presence function in a single chip.

The IMM supports the following basic system management features:


v Environmental monitor with fan speed control for temperature, voltages, fan
failure, and power supply failure.
v Light path diagnostics LEDs indicators to report errors that occur with fans,
power supplies, microprocessor, hard disk drives, and system errors.
v DIMM error assistance. The Unified Extensible Firmware Interface (UEFI)
disables a failing DIMM that is detected during POST, and the IMM lights the
associated system error LED and the failing DIMM error LED.
v System event log (SEL).
v ROM-based IMM firmware flash updates.
v Auto Boot Failure Recovery (ABR).
v A virtual media key, which enables remote presence support (remote video,
remote keyboard/mouse, and remote storage).
v Automatic microprocessor disable on failure and restart in a two-microprocessor
configuration when one microprocessor signals an internal error.
v Nonmaskable interrupt (NMI) detection and reporting.
v Automatic Server Restart (ASR) when POST is not complete or the operating
system hangs and the operating system watchdog timer times-out. The IMM
might be configured to watch for the operating system watchdog timer and reboot
the system after a timeout, if the ASR feature is enabled. Otherwise, the IMM
allows the administrator to generate a nonmaskable interrupt (NMI) by pressing
an NMI button on the system board for an operating-system memory dump. ASR
is supported by IPMI.
v Intelligent Platform Management Interface (IPMI) Specification V2.0 and
Intelligent Platform Management Bus (IPMB) support.
v Serial port redirection over telnet or ssh.
v Serial over LAN (SOL).
v Active Energy Manager.
v Query power-supply input power.
v PECI 2 support.
v Power/reset control (power-on, hard and soft shutdown, hard and soft reset,
schedule power control).
v Alerts (in-band and out-of-band alerting, PET traps - IPMI style, SNMP, e-mail).
v Operating-system failure blue screen capture.
v Command-line interface.
v Configuration save and restore.
v PCI configuration data.
v Boot sequence manipulation.

230 System x3200 M3 Types 7327 and 7328: Problem Determination and Service Guide
The IMM also provides the following remote server management capabilities
through the OSA SMBridge management utility program:
v Command-line interface (IPMI Shell)
The command-line interface provides direct access to server management
functions through the IPMI 2.0 protocol. Use the command-line interface to issue
commands to control the server power, view system information, and identify the
server. You can also save one or more commands as a text file and run the file
as a script.
v Serial over LAN
Establish a Serial over LAN (SOL) connection to manage servers from a remote
location. You can remotely view and change the UEFI settings, restart the server,
identify the server, and perform other management functions. Any standard Telnet
client application can access the SOL connection.

Using the remote presence capability and blue-screen capture


The remote presence and blue-screen capture features are integrated functions of
the integrated management module (IMM). When the optional IBM Virtual Media
Key is installed in the server, it activates the remote presence functions. The virtual
media key is required to enable the integrated remote presence and blue-screen
capture features. Without the virtual media key, you will not be able to access the
network remotely to mount or unmount drives or images on the client system.
However, you can still access the Web interface without the key.

After the virtual media key is installed in the server, it is authenticated to determine
whether it is valid. If the key is not valid, you receive a message from the Web
interface (when you attempt to start the remote presence feature) indicating that the
hardware key is required to use the remote presence feature.

The virtual media key has an LED. When this LED is lit and green, it indicates that
the key is installed and functioning correctly. When the LED is not lit, it indicates
that the key might not be installed correctly.

The remote presence feature provides the following functions:


v Remotely viewing video with graphics resolutions up to 1600 x 1200 at 85 Hz,
regardless of the system state
v Remotely accessing the server, using the keyboard and mouse from a remote
client
v Mapping the DVD drive, diskette drive, and USB flash drive on a remote client,
and mapping ISO and diskette image files as virtual drives that are available for
use by the server
v Uploading a diskette image to the IMM memory and mapping it to the server as a
virtual drive

The blue-screen capture feature captures the video display contents before the IMM
restarts the server when the IMM detects an operating-system hang condition. A
system administrator can use the blue-screen capture to assist in determining the
cause of the hang condition.

Enabling the remote presence feature


To enable the remote presence feature, complete the following steps:
1. Install the virtual media key into the dedicated slot on the system board (see
“System-board optional-devices connectors” on page 18).
2. Turn on the server.

Chapter 6. Configuration information and instructions 231


Note: Approximately 1 to 3 minutes after the server is connected to ac power,
the power-control button becomes active.

Obtaining the IP address for the IMM


To access the Web interface, you need the IP address for IMM. You can obtain the
IMM IP address through the Setup utility. The server comes with a default IP
address for the IMM of 192.168.70.125. To locate the IP address, complete the
following steps:
1. Turn on the server.

Note: Approximately 1 to 3 minutes after the server is connected to ac power,


the power-control button becomes active.
2. When the prompt <F1> Setup is displayed, press F1. (This prompt is displayed
on the screen for only a few seconds. You must press F1 quickly.) If you have
set both a power-on password and an administrator password, you must type
the administrator password to access the full Setup utility menu.
3. From the Setup utility main menu, select System Settings.
4. On the next screen, select Integrated Management Module.
5. On the next screen, select Network Configuration.
6. Find the IP address and write it down.
7. Exit from the Setup utility.

Logging on to the Web interface


To log onto the Web interface to use the remote presence functions, complete the
following steps:
1. Open a Web browser on a computer that connects to the server and in the
address or URL field, type the IP address or host name of the IMM to which
you want to connect.

Note: The IMM defaults to DHCP. If a DHCP host is not available, the IMM
assigns a static IP address of 192.168.70.125.
2. On the Login page, type the user name and password. If you are using the IMM
for the first time, you can obtain the user name and password from your system
administrator. All login attempts are documented in the event log.

Note: The IMM is set initially with a user name of USERID and password of
PASSW0RD (passw0rd with a zero, not a the letter O). You have read/write
access. You must change the default password the first time you log on.
3. On the Welcome page, type a timeout value (in minutes) in the field that is
provided. The IMM will log you off of the Web interface if your browser is
inactive for the number of minutes that you entered for the timeout value.
4. Click Continue to start the session. The System Health page provides a quick
view of the system status.

Enabling the Intel Gigabit Ethernet Utility program


The Intel Gigabit Ethernet Utility program is part of the server firmware. You can
use it to configure the network as a startable device, and you can customize where
the network startup option appears in the startup sequence.

To enable the Intel Gigabit Ethernet Utility program, complete the following steps:
1. From the Setup utility main menu, select Devices and I/O Ports and press
Enter.

232 System x3200 M3 Types 7327 and 7328: Problem Determination and Service Guide
2. Select Enable/Disable onboard device(s) and press Enter.
3. Select Ethernet and press Enter.
4. Select Enable and press Enter.
5. Exit to the main menu and select Save Settings and press Enter.

Configuring the Ethernet controller


The Ethernet controller is integrated on the system board. It provides an interface
for connecting to a 10-Mbps, 100-Mbps, or 1-Gbps network and provides full-duplex
(FDX) capability, which enables simultaneous transmission and reception of data on
the network. If the Ethernet ports in the server support auto-negotiation, the
controller detects the data-transfer rate (10BASE-T, 100BASE-TX, or 1000BASE-T)
and duplex mode (full-duplex or half-duplex) of the network and automatically
operates at that rate and mode.

You do not have to set any jumpers or configure the controller. However, you must
install a device driver to enable the operating system to address the controller. To
find updated information about configuring the controller, complete the following
steps.

Note: Changes are made periodically to the IBM Web site. The actual procedure
might vary slightly from what is described in this document.
1. Go to http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/.
2. Under Product support, click System x.
3. Under Popular links, click Software and device drivers.
4. From the Product family menu, select System x3200 M3 and click Go.

Enabling and configuring Serial over LAN (SOL)


Establish a Serial over LAN (SOL) connection to manage servers from a remote
location. You can remotely view and change the BIOS settings, restart the server,
identify the server, and perform other management functions. Any standard Telnet
client application can access the SOL connection.

To enable and configure the server for SOL, you must update and configure the
UEFI code; update and configure the integrated management module (IMM)
firmware; update and configure the Ethernet controller firmware; and enable the
operating system for an SOL connection.

UEFI update and configuration


To update and configure the UEFI code to enable SOL, complete the following
steps:
1. Update the UEFI code:
a. Download the latest version of the UEFI code from http://www.ibm.com/
systems/support/.
b. Update the UEFI code, following the instructions that come with the update
file that you downloaded.
2. Update the IMM firmware:
a. Download the latest version of the IMM firmware from http://www.ibm.com/
systems/support/.
b. Update the IMM firmware, following the instructions that come with the
update file that you downloaded.
3. Configure the UEFI settings:

Chapter 6. Configuration information and instructions 233


a. When you are prompted to start the Configuration/Setup Utility program,
restart the server and press F1.
b. Select System Settings → Devices and I/O Ports.
c. Select Console Redirection Settings; then, make sure that the values are
set as follows:
v COM Port 1: Enable
v Remote Console: Enable
v Serial Port Sharing: Enable
v Serial Port Access Mode: Dedicated COM1 Settings
v Baud Rate: 115200
v Data Bits: 8
v Parity: None Stop
v Bits: 1
v Thermal Emulation: ANSI
v Active After Boot: Enable
v Flow Control: Hardware
d. Press Esc twice to exit the Devices and I/O Ports section of the
Configuration/Setup Utility program.
e. Select Save Settings; then, press Enter.
f. Press Enter to confirm.
g. Select Exit Setup; then, press Enter.
h. Make sure that Yes, exit the Setup Utility is selected; then, press Enter.

Using the LSI Configuration Utility program


Note: There are no RAID support on simple-swap models of the server.

Use the LSI Configuration Utility program to configure and manage redundant array
of independent disks (RAID) arrays on hot-swap models of the server. Be sure to
use this program as described in this document.
v Use the LSI Configuration Utility program to perform the following tasks:
– Perform a low-level format on a hard disk drive
– Create an array of hard disk drives with or without a hot-spare drive
– Set protocol parameters on hard disk drives

The integrated SAS/SATA controller with RAID capabilities supports RAID arrays.
The hot-swap server models come with the ServerRAID-BR10il adapter installed,
which provides RAID levels 0, 1, and 1E support. You can use the LSI
Configuration Utility program to configure RAID 1 (IM), RAID 1E (IME), and RAID 0
(IS) for a single pair of attached devices. If you install the optional
ServeRAID-MR10i SAS/SATA controller or the optional ServeRAID-MR10is VAULT
SAS/SATA controller with an encryption 1078 DE chip, they provide RAID levels 0,
1, 5, 6, and 10 support. If you install a different type of RAID adapter, follow the
instructions in the documentation that comes with the adapter to view or change
settings for attached devices.

In addition, you can download an LSI command-line configuration program from


http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/.

234 System x3200 M3 Types 7327 and 7328: Problem Determination and Service Guide
When you are using the LSI Configuration Utility program to configure and manage
arrays on hot-swap models of the server, consider the following information:
v The integrated SAS/SATA controller with RAID capabilities supports the following
features:
– Integrated Mirroring (IM) with hot-spare support (also known as RAID 1)
Use this option to create an integrated array of two disks plus up to two
optional hot spares. All data on the primary disk can be migrated.
– Integrated Mirroring Enhanced (IME) with hot-spare support (also known as
RAID 1E)
Use this option to create an integrated mirror enhanced array of three to eight
disks, including up to two optional hot spares. All data on the array disks will
be deleted.
– Integrated Striping (IS) (also known as RAID 0)
Use this option to create an integrated striping array of two to eight disks. All
data on the array disks will be deleted.
v Hard disk drive capacities affect how you create arrays. The drives in an array
can have different capacities, but the RAID controller treats them as if they all
have the capacity of the smallest hard disk drive.
v If you use an integrated SAS/SATA controller with RAID capabilities to configure
a RAID 1 (mirrored) array after you have installed the operating system, you will
lose access to any data or applications that were previously stored on the
secondary drive of the mirrored pair.
v If you install a different type of RAID controller, see the documentation that
comes with the controller for information about viewing and changing settings for
attached devices.

Starting the LSI Configuration Utility program


To start the LSI Configuration Utility program, complete the following steps:
1. Turn on the server.

Note: Approximately 1 to 3 minutes after the server is connected to ac power,


the power-control button becomes active.
2. When the prompt <F1 Setup> is displayed, press F1. If you have set an
administrator password, you are prompted to type the password.
3. Select System Settings → Adapters and UEFI drivers.
4. Select Please refresh this page on the first visit and press Enter.
5. Select LSI controller_driver_name Driver and press Enter, where
controller_driver_name is the name of the SAS/SATA controller driver. For the
SAS/SATA controller driver name, see the documentation that comes with your
controller.
6. To perform storage-management tasks, follow the procedures in the
documentation that comes with the SAS/SATA controller.

When you have finished changing settings, press Esc to exit from the program;
select Save to save the settings that you have changed.

Formatting a hard disk drive


Low-level formatting removes all data from the hard disk. If there is data on the disk
that you want to save, back up the hard disk before you perform this procedure.

Note: Before you format a hard disk, make sure that the disk is not part of a
mirrored pair.

Chapter 6. Configuration information and instructions 235


To format a drive, complete the following steps:
1. From the list of adapters, select the controller (channel) for the drive that you
want to format and press Enter.
2. Select SAS Topology and press Enter.
3. Select Direct Attach Devices and press Enter.
4. To highlight the drive that you want to format, use the Up Arrow and Down
Arrow keys. To scroll left and right, use the Left Arrow and Right Arrow keys or
the End key. Press Alt+D.
5. To start the low-level formatting operation, select Format and press Enter.

Creating a RAID array of hard disk drives


To create a RAID array of hot-swap hard disk drives, complete the following steps:
1. From the list of adapters, select the controller (channel) for the drives that you
want to mirror.
2. Select RAID Properties.
3. Select the type of array that you want to create.
4. Use the arrow keys to highlight the first drive in the pair; then, press the Minus
(-) or Plus (+) key to change the mirror value to Primary.
5. Continue to select the next drive using the Minus (-) or Plus (+) key until you
have selected all the drives for your array.
6. Press C to create the disk array.
7. Select Apply changes and exit menu to create the array.

IBM Advanced Settings Utility program


The IBM Advanced Settings Utility (ASU) program is an alternative to the Setup
utility for modifying UEFI settings. Use the ASU program online or out of band to
modify UEFI settings from the command line without the need to restart the system
to access the Setup utility.

You can also use the ASU program to configure the optional remote presence
features or other IMM settings. The remote presence features provide enhanced
systems-management capabilities.

In addition, the ASU program provides limited settings for configuring the IPMI
function in the IMM through the command-line interface.

Use the command-line interface to issue setup commands. You can save any of the
settings as a file and run the file as a script. The ASU program supports scripting
environments through a batch-processing mode.

For more information and to download the ASU program, go to


http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/.

Updating IBM Systems Director


If you plan to use IBM Systems Director to manage the server, you must check for
the latest applicable IBM Systems Director updates and interim fixes.

Note: Changes are made periodically to the IBM Web site. The actual procedure
might vary slightly from what is described in this document.

To locate and install a newer version of IBM Systems Director, complete the
following steps:

236 System x3200 M3 Types 7327 and 7328: Problem Determination and Service Guide
1. Check for the latest version of IBM Systems Director:
a. Go to http://www.ibm.com/systems/management/director/downloads.html.
b. If a newer version of IBM Systems Director than what comes with the server
is shown in the drop-down list, follow the instructions on the Web page to
download the latest version.
2. Install the IBM Systems Director program.

If your management server is connected to the Internet, to locate and install


updates and interim fixes, complete the following steps:
1. Make sure that you have run the Discovery and Inventory collection tasks.
2. On the Welcome page of the IBM Systems Director Web interface, click View
updates.
3. Click Check for updates. The available updates are displayed in a table.
4. Select the updates that you want to install, and click Install to start the
installation wizard.

If your management server is not connected to the Internet, to locate and install
updates and interim fixes, complete the following steps:
1. Make sure that you have run the Discovery and Inventory collection tasks.
2. On a system that is connected to the Internet, go to http://www.ibm.com/
eserver/support/fixes/fixcentral/.
3. From the Product family list, select IBM Systems Director.
4. From the Product list, select IBM Systems Director.
5. From the Installed version list, select the latest version, and click Continue.
6. Download the available updates.
7. Copy the downloaded files to the management server.
8. On the management server, on the Welcome page of the IBM Systems
Director Web interface, click the Manage tab, and click Update Manager.
9. Click Import updates and specify the location of the downloaded files that you
copied to the management server.
10. Return to the Welcome page of the Web interface, and click View updates.
11. Select the updates that you want to install, and click Install to start the
installation wizard.

Updating the Universal Unique Identifier (UUID)


The Universal Unique Identifier (UUID) must be updated when the system board is
replaced. Use the Advanced Settings Utility to update the UUID in the UEFI-based
server. The ASU is an online tool that supports several operating systems. Make
sure that you download the version for your operating system. You can download
the ASU from the IBM Web site. To download the ASU and update the UUID,
complete the following steps.

Note: Changes are made periodically to the IBM Web site. The actual procedure
might vary slightly from what is described in this document.
1. Download the Advanced Settings Utility (ASU):
a. Go to http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/.
b. Under Product support, select System x.
c. Under Popular links, select Tools and utilities.
d. In the left pane, click System x and BladeCenter Tools Center.

Chapter 6. Configuration information and instructions 237


e. Scroll down and click Tools reference.
f. Scroll down and click the plus-sign (+) for Configuration tools to expand the
list; then, select Advanced Settings Utility (ASU).
g. In the next window under Related Information, click the Advanced Settings
Utility link and download the ASU version for your operating system.
2. ASU sets the UUID in the Integrated Management Module (IMM). Select one of
the following methods to access the Integrated Management Module (IMM) to
set the UUID:
v Online from the target system (LAN or keyboard console style (KCS) access)
v Remote access to the target system (LAN based)
v Bootable media containing ASU (LAN or KCS, depending upon the bootable
media)

Note: IBM provides a method for building a bootable media. You can create
a bootable media using the Bootable Media Creator (BoMC) application from
the Tools Center Web site. In addition, the Windows and Linux based tool kits
are also available to build a bootable media.
3. Copy and unpack the ASU package, which also includes other required files, to
the server. Make sure that you unpack the ASU and the required files to the
same directory. In addition to the application executable (asu or asu64), the
following files are required:
v For Windows based operating systems:
– ibm_rndis_server_os.inf
– device.cat
v For Linux based operating systems:
– cdc_interface.sh
4. After you install ASU, use the following command syntax to set the UUID:
asu set SYSTEM_PROD_DATA.SysInfoUUID <uuid_value> [access_method]
Where:
<uuid_value>
Up to 16-byte hexadecimal value assigned by you.
[access_method]
The access method that you selected to use from the following
methods:
v Online authenticated LAN access, type the command:
[host <imm_internal_ip>] [user <imm_user_id>][password
<imm_password>]
Where:
imm_internal_ip
The IMM internal LAN/USB IP address. The default value is
169.254.95.118.
imm_user_id
The IMM account (1 of 12 accounts). The default value is USERID.
imm_password
The IMM account password (1 of 12 accounts). The default value is
PASSW0RD (with a zero 0 not an O).

Note: If you do not specify any of these parameters, ASU will use the default
values. When the default values are used and ASU is unable to access the

238 System x3200 M3 Types 7327 and 7328: Problem Determination and Service Guide
IMM using the online authenticated LAN access method, ASU will
automatically use the unauthenticated KCS access method.
The following commands are examples of using the userid and password
default values and not using the default values:

Example that does not use the userid and password default values:
asu set SYSTEM_PROD_DATA.SYsInfoUUID <uuid_value> --user <user_id>
--password <password>

Example that does use the userid and password default values:
asu set SYSTEM_PROD_DATA.SysInfoUUID <uuid_value>
v Online KCS access (unauthenticated and user restricted):
You do not need to specify a value for access_method when you use this
access method.

Example:
asu set SYSTEM_PROD_DATA.SysInfoUUID <uuid_value>
The KCS access method uses the IPMI/KCS interface. This method requires
that the IPMI driver be installed. Some operating systems have the IPMI
driver installed by default. ASU provides the corresponding mapping layer.
See the Advanced Settings Utility Users Guide for more details. You can
access the ASU Users Guide from the IBM Web site.

Note: Changes are made periodically to the IBM Web site. The actual
procedure might vary slightly from what is described in this document.
a. Go to http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/.
b. Under Product support, select System x.
c. Under Popular links, select Tools and utilities.
d. In the left pane, click System x and BladeCenter Tools Center.
e. Scroll down and click Tools reference.
f. Scroll down and click the plus-sign (+) for Configuration tools to expand
the list; then, select Advanced Settings Utility (ASU).
g. In the next window under Related Information, click the Advanced
Settings Utility link.
v Remote LAN access, type the command:

Note: When using the remote LAN access method to access IMM using the
LAN from a client, the host and the imm_external_ip address are required
parameters.
host <imm_external_ip> [user <imm_user_id>[[password <imm_password>]
Where:
imm_external_ip
The external IMM LAN IP address. There is no default value. This
parameter is required.
imm_user_id
The IMM account (1 of 12 accounts). The default value is USERID.
imm_password
The IMM account password (1 of 12 accounts). The default value is
PASSW0RD (with a zero 0 not an O).
The following commands are examples of using the userid and password
default values and not using the default values:

Chapter 6. Configuration information and instructions 239


Example that does not use the userid and password default values:
asu set SYSTEM_PROD_DATA.SYsInfoUUID <uuid_value> --host <imm_ip>
--user <user_id> --password <password>

Example that does use the userid and password default values:
asu set SYSTEM_PROD_DATA.SysInfoUUID <uuid_value> --host <imm_ip>
v Bootable media:
You can also build a bootable media using the applications available through
the Tools Center Web site at http://publib.boulder.ibm.com/infocenter/toolsctr/
v1r0/index.jsp. From the left pane, click IBM System x and BladeCenter
Tools Center, then click Tool reference for the available tools.
5. Restart the server.

Updating the DMI/SMBIOS data


The Desktop Management Interface (DMI) must be updated when the system board
is replaced. Use the Advanced Settings Utility to update the DMI in the UEFI-based
server. The ASU is an online tool that supports several operating systems. Make
sure that you download the version for your operating system. You can download
the ASU from the IBM Web site. To download the ASU and update the DMI,
complete the following steps.

Note: Changes are made periodically to the IBM Web site. The actual procedure
might vary slightly from what is described in this document.
1. Download the Advanced Settings Utility (ASU):
a. Go to http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/.
b. Under Product support, select System x.
c. Under Popular links, select Tools and utilities.
d. In the left pane, click System x and BladeCenter Tools Center.
e. Scroll down and click Tools reference.
f. Scroll down and click the plus-sign (+) for Configuration tools to expand the
list; then, select Advanced Settings Utility (ASU).
g. In the next window under Related Information, click the Advanced Settings
Utility link and download the ASU version for your operating system.
2. ASU sets the DMI in the Integrated Management Module (IMM). Select one of
the following methods to access the Integrated Management Module (IMM) to
set the DMI:
v Online from the target system (LAN or keyboard console style (KCS) access)
v Remote access to the target system (LAN based)
v Bootable media containing ASU (LAN or KCS, depending upon the bootable
media)

Note: IBM provides a method for building a bootable media. You can create
a bootable media using the Bootable Media Creator (BoMC) application from
the Tools Center Web site. In addition, the Windows and Linux based tool kits
are also available to build a bootable media.
3. Copy and unpack the ASU package, which also includes other required files, to
the server. Make sure that you unpack the ASU and the required files to the
same directory. In addition to the application executable (asu or asu64), the
following files are required:
v For Windows based operating systems:
– ibm_rndis_server_os.inf

240 System x3200 M3 Types 7327 and 7328: Problem Determination and Service Guide
– device.cat
v For Linux based operating systems:
– cdc_interface.sh
4. After you install ASU, Type the following commands to set the DMI:

asu set SYSTEM_PROD_DATA.SysInfoProdName <m/t_model> [access_method]


asu set SYSTEM_PROD_DATA.SysInfoSerialNum <s/n> [access_method]
asu set SYSTEM_PROD_DATA.SysEncloseAssetTag <asset_tag> [access_method]
Where:
<m/t_model>
The server machine type and model number. Type mtm xxxxyyy, where
xxxx is the machine type and yyy is the server model number.
<s/n> The serial number on the server. Type sn zzzzzzz, where zzzzzzz is the
serial number.
<asset_method>
The server asset tag number. Type asset
aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa, where
aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa is the asset tag number.
[access_method]
The access method that you select to use from the following methods:
v Online authenticated LAN access, type the command:
[host <imm_internal_ip>] [user <imm_user_id>][password
<imm_password>]
Where:
imm_internal_ip
The IMM internal LAN/USB IP address. The default value is
169.254.95.118.
imm_user_id
The IMM account (1 of 12 accounts). The default value is USERID.
imm_password
The IMM account password (1 of 12 accounts). The default value is
PASSW0RD (with a zero 0 not an O).

Note: If you do not specify any of these parameters, ASU will use the default
values. When the default values are used and ASU is unable to access the
IMM using the online authenticated LAN access method, ASU will
automatically use the following unauthenticated KCS access method.
The following commands are examples of using the userid and password
default values and not using the default values:

Examples that do not use the userid and password default values:
asu set SYSTEM_PROD_DATA.SYsInfoProdName <m/t_model>
--user <imm_user_id> --password <imm_password>
asu set SYSTEM_PROD_DATA.SYsInfoSerialNum <s/n> --user <imm_user_id>
--password <imm_password>
asu set SYSTEM_PROD_DATA.SYsEncloseAssetTag <asset_tag>
--user <imm_user_id> --password <imm_password>

Examples that do use the userid and password default values:


asu set SYSTEM_PROD_DATA.SysInfoProdName <m/t_model>

Chapter 6. Configuration information and instructions 241


asu set SYSTEM_PROD_DATA.SysInfoSerialNum <s/n>
asu set SYSTEM_PROD_DATA.SysEncloseAssetTag <asset_tag>
v Online KCS access (unauthenticated and user restricted):
You do not need to specify a value for access_method when you use this
access method.
The KCS access method uses the IPMI/KCS interface. This method requires
that the IPMI driver be installed. Some operating systems have the IPMI
driver installed by default. ASU provides the corresponding mapping layer.
See the Advanced Settings Utility Users Guide at http://www-947.ibm.com/
systems/support/supportsite.wss/docdisplay?brandind=5000008
&lndocid=MIGR-55021 for more details.
The following commands are examples of using the userid and password
default values and not using the default values:

Examples that do not use the userid and password default values:
asu set SYSTEM_PROD_DATA.SYsInfoProdName <m/t_model>
asu set SYSTEM_PROD_DATA.SYsInfoSerialNum <s/n>
asu set SYSTEM_PROD_DATA.SYsEncloseAssetTag <asset_tag>
v Remote LAN access, type the command:

Note: When using the remote LAN access method to access IMM using the
LAN from a client, the host and the imm_external_ip address are required
parameters.
host <imm_external_ip> [user <imm_user_id>[[password <imm_password>]
Where:
imm_external_ip
The external IMM LAN IP address. There is no default value. This
parameter is required.
imm_user_id
The IMM account (1 of 12 accounts). The default value is USERID.
imm_password
The IMM account password (1 of 12 accounts). The default value is
PASSW0RD (with a zero 0 not an O).
The following commands are examples of using the userid and password
default values and not using the default values:

Examples that do not use the userid and password default values:
asu set SYSTEM_PROD_DATA.SYsInfoProdName <m/t_model> --host <imm_ip>
--user <imm_user_id> --password <imm_password>
asu set SYSTEM_PROD_DATA.SYsInfoSerialNum <s/n> --host <imm_ip>
--user <imm_user_id> --password <imm_password>
asu set SYSTEM_PROD_DATA.SYsEncloseAssetTag <asset_tag>
--host <imm_ip> --user <imm_user_id> --password <imm_password>

Examples that do use the userid and password default values:


asu set SYSTEM_PROD_DATA.SysInfoProdName <m/t_model> --host <imm_ip>
asu set SYSTEM_PROD_DATA.SysInfoSerialNum <s/n> --host <imm_ip>
asu set SYSTEM_PROD_DATA.SysEncloseAssetTag <asset_tag>
--host <imm_ip>
v Bootable media:
You can also build a bootable media using the applications available through
the Tools Center Web site at http://publib.boulder.ibm.com/infocenter/toolsctr/

242 System x3200 M3 Types 7327 and 7328: Problem Determination and Service Guide
v1r0/index.jsp. From the left pane, click IBM System x and BladeCenter
Tools Center, then click Tool reference for the available tools.
5. Restart the server.

Chapter 6. Configuration information and instructions 243


244 System x3200 M3 Types 7327 and 7328: Problem Determination and Service Guide
Appendix A. Getting help and technical assistance
If you need help, service, or technical assistance or just want more information
about IBM products, you will find a wide variety of sources available from IBM to
assist you. This section contains information about where to go for additional
information about IBM and IBM products, what to do if you experience a problem
with your system, and whom to call for service, if it is necessary.

Before you call


Before you call, make sure that you have taken these steps to try to solve the
problem yourself:
v Check all cables to make sure that they are connected.
v Check the power switches to make sure that the system and any optional
devices are turned on.
v Use the troubleshooting information in your system documentation, and use the
diagnostic tools that come with your system. Information about diagnostic tools is
in the Problem Determination and Service Guide on the IBM Documentation CD
that comes with your system.
v Go to the IBM support Web site at http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/ to check
for technical information, hints, tips, and new device drivers or to submit a
request for information.

You can solve many problems without outside assistance by following the
troubleshooting procedures that IBM provides in the online help or in the
documentation that is provided with your IBM product. The documentation that
comes with IBM systems also describes the diagnostic tests that you can perform.
Most systems, operating systems, and programs come with documentation that
contains troubleshooting procedures and explanations of error messages and error
codes. If you suspect a software problem, see the documentation for the operating
system or program.

Using the documentation


Information about your IBM system and preinstalled software, if any, or optional
device is available in the documentation that comes with the product. That
documentation can include printed documents, online documents, readme files, and
help files. See the troubleshooting information in your system documentation for
instructions for using the diagnostic programs. The troubleshooting information or
the diagnostic programs might tell you that you need additional or updated device
drivers or other software. IBM maintains pages on the World Wide Web where you
can get the latest technical information and download device drivers and updates.
To access these pages, go to http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/ and follow the
instructions. Also, some documents are available through the IBM Publications
Center at http://www.ibm.com/shop/publications/order/.

Getting help and information from the World Wide Web


On the World Wide Web, the IBM Web site has up-to-date information about IBM
systems, optional devices, services, and support. The address for IBM System x®
and xSeries information is http://www.ibm.com/systems/x/. The address for IBM
BladeCenter® information is http://www.ibm.com/systems/bladecenter/. The address
for IBM IntelliStation® information is http://www.ibm.com/intellistation/.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2011 245


You can find service information for IBM systems and optional devices at
http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/.

Software service and support


Through IBM Support Line, you can get telephone assistance, for a fee, with usage,
configuration, and software problems with System x and xSeries servers,
BladeCenter products, IntelliStation workstations, and appliances. For information
about which products are supported by Support Line in your country or region, see
http://www.ibm.com/services/sl/products/.

For more information about Support Line and other IBM services, see
http://www.ibm.com/services/, or see http://www.ibm.com/planetwide/ for support
telephone numbers. In the U.S. and Canada, call 1-800-IBM-SERV
(1-800-426-7378).

Hardware service and support


You can receive hardware service through your IBM reseller or IBM Services. To
locate a reseller authorized by IBM to provide warranty service, go to
http://www.ibm.com/partnerworld/ and click Find a Business Partner on the right
side of the page. For IBM support telephone numbers, see http://www.ibm.com/
planetwide/. In the U.S. and Canada, call 1-800-IBM-SERV (1-800-426-7378).

In the U.S. and Canada, hardware service and support is available 24 hours a day,
7 days a week. In the U.K., these services are available Monday through Friday,
from 9 a.m. to 6 p.m.

IBM Taiwan product service

IBM Taiwan product service contact information:


IBM Taiwan Corporation
3F, No 7, Song Ren Rd.
Taipei, Taiwan
Telephone: 0800-016-888

246 System x3200 M3 Types 7327 and 7328: Problem Determination and Service Guide
Appendix B. Notices
This information was developed for products and services offered in the U.S.A.

IBM may not offer the products, services, or features discussed in this document in
other countries. Consult your local IBM representative for information on the
products and services currently available in your area. Any reference to an IBM
product, program, or service is not intended to state or imply that only that IBM
product, program, or service may be used. Any functionally equivalent product,
program, or service that does not infringe any IBM intellectual property right may be
used instead. However, it is the user's responsibility to evaluate and verify the
operation of any non-IBM product, program, or service.

IBM may have patents or pending patent applications covering subject matter
described in this document. The furnishing of this document does not give you any
license to these patents. You can send license inquiries, in writing, to:
IBM Director of Licensing
IBM Corporation
North Castle Drive
Armonk, NY 10504-1785
U.S.A.

INTERNATIONAL BUSINESS MACHINES CORPORATION PROVIDES THIS


PUBLICATION “AS IS” WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESS
OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES
OF NON-INFRINGEMENT, MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE. Some states do not allow disclaimer of express or
implied warranties in certain transactions, therefore, this statement may not apply to
you.

This information could include technical inaccuracies or typographical errors.


Changes are periodically made to the information herein; these changes will be
incorporated in new editions of the publication. IBM may make improvements and/or
changes in the product(s) and/or the program(s) described in this publication at any
time without notice.

Any references in this information to non-IBM Web sites are provided for
convenience only and do not in any manner serve as an endorsement of those
Web sites. The materials at those Web sites are not part of the materials for this
IBM product, and use of those Web sites is at your own risk.

IBM may use or distribute any of the information you supply in any way it believes
appropriate without incurring any obligation to you.

Trademarks
IBM, the IBM logo, and ibm.com are trademarks of International Business Machines
Corp., registered in many jurisdictions worldwide. Other product and service names
might be trademarks of IBM or other companies. A current list of IBM trademarks is
available on the web at “Copyright and trademark information” at
http://www.ibm.com/legal/copytrade.shtml.

Adobe and PostScript are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Adobe


Systems Incorporated in the United States and/or other countries.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2011 247


Cell Broadband Engine is a trademark of Sony Computer Entertainment, Inc., in the
United States, other countries, or both and is used under license therefrom.

Intel, Intel Xeon, Itanium, and Pentium are trademarks or registered trademarks of
Intel Corporation or its subsidiaries in the United States and other countries.

Java and all Java-based trademarks and logos are trademarks or registered
trademarks of Oracle and/or its affiliates.

Linux is a registered trademark of Linus Torvalds in the United States, other


countries, or both.

Microsoft, Windows, and Windows NT are trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in


the United States, other countries, or both.

UNIX is a registered trademark of The Open Group in the United States and other
countries.

Important notes
Processor speed indicates the internal clock speed of the microprocessor; other
factors also affect application performance.

CD or DVD drive speed is the variable read rate. Actual speeds vary and are often
less than the possible maximum.

When referring to processor storage, real and virtual storage, or channel volume,
KB stands for 1024 bytes, MB stands for 1,048,576 bytes, and GB stands for
1,073,741,824 bytes.

When referring to hard disk drive capacity or communications volume, MB stands


for 1,000,000 bytes, and GB stands for 1,000,000,000 bytes. Total user-accessible
capacity can vary depending on operating environments.

Maximum internal hard disk drive capacities assume the replacement of any
standard hard disk drives and population of all hard disk drive bays with the largest
currently supported drives that are available from IBM.

Maximum memory might require replacement of the standard memory with an


optional memory module.

IBM makes no representation or warranties regarding non-IBM products and


services that are ServerProven®, including but not limited to the implied warranties
of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose. These products are offered
and warranted solely by third parties.

IBM makes no representations or warranties with respect to non-IBM products.


Support (if any) for the non-IBM products is provided by the third party, not IBM.

Some software might differ from its retail version (if available) and might not include
user manuals or all program functionality.

248 System x3200 M3 Types 7327 and 7328: Problem Determination and Service Guide
Particulate contamination
Attention: Airborne particulates (including metal flakes or particles) and reactive
gases acting alone or in combination with other environmental factors such as
humidity or temperature might pose a risk to the server that is described in this
document. Risks that are posed by the presence of excessive particulate levels or
concentrations of harmful gases include damage that might cause the server to
malfunction or cease functioning altogether. This specification sets forth limits for
particulates and gases that are intended to avoid such damage. The limits must not
be viewed or used as definitive limits, because numerous other factors, such as
temperature or moisture content of the air, can influence the impact of particulates
or environmental corrosives and gaseous contaminant transfer. In the absence of
specific limits that are set forth in this document, you must implement practices that
maintain particulate and gas levels that are consistent with the protection of human
health and safety. If IBM determines that the levels of particulates or gases in your
environment have caused damage to the server, IBM may condition provision of
repair or replacement of servers or parts on implementation of appropriate remedial
measures to mitigate such environmental contamination. Implementation of such
remedial measures is a customer responsibility.
Table 17. Limits for particulates and gases
Contaminant Limits
Particulate v The room air must be continuously filtered with 40% atmospheric dust
spot efficiency (MERV 9) according to ASHRAE Standard 52.21.
v Air that enters a data center must be filtered to 99.97% efficiency or
greater, using high-efficiency particulate air (HEPA) filters that meet
MIL-STD-282.
v The deliquescent relative humidity of the particulate contamination
must be more than 60%2.
v The room must be free of conductive contamination such as zinc
whiskers.
Gaseous v Copper: Class G1 as per ANSI/ISA 71.04-19853
v Silver: Corrosion rate of less than 300 Å in 30 days
1
ASHRAE 52.2-2008 - Method of Testing General Ventilation Air-Cleaning Devices for
Removal Efficiency by Particle Size. Atlanta: American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and
Air-Conditioning Engineers, Inc.
2
The deliquescent relative humidity of particulate contamination is the relative humidity at
which the dust absorbs enough water to become wet and promote ionic conduction.
3
ANSI/ISA-71.04-1985. Environmental conditions for process measurement and control
systems: Airborne contaminants. Instrument Society of America, Research Triangle Park,
North Carolina, U.S.A.

Documentation format
The publications for this product are in Adobe Portable Document Format (PDF)
and should be compliant with accessibility standards. If you experience difficulties
when you use the PDF files and want to request a Web-based format or accessible
PDF document for a publication, direct your mail to the following address:
Information Development
IBM Corporation
205/A015
3039 E. Cornwallis Road
P.O. Box 12195
Research Triangle Park, North Carolina 27709-2195

Appendix B. Notices 249


U.S.A.

In the request, be sure to include the publication part number and title.

When you send information to IBM, you grant IBM a nonexclusive right to use or
distribute the information in any way it believes appropriate without incurring any
obligation to you.

Telecommunication regulatory statement


This product is not intended to be connected directly or indirectly by any means
whatsoever to interfaces of public telecommunications networks, nor is it intended
to be used in a public services network.

Electronic emission notices


When you attach a monitor to the equipment, you must use the designated monitor
cable and any interference suppression devices that are supplied with the monitor.

Federal Communications Commission (FCC) statement


Note: This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a
Class A digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are
designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the
equipment is operated in a commercial environment. This equipment generates,
uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in
accordance with the instruction manual, may cause harmful interference to radio
communications. Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause
harmful interference, in which case the user will be required to correct the
interference at his own expense.

Properly shielded and grounded cables and connectors must be used in order to
meet FCC emission limits. IBM is not responsible for any radio or television
interference caused by using other than recommended cables and connectors or by
unauthorized changes or modifications to this equipment. Unauthorized changes or
modifications could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2)
this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.

Industry Canada Class A emission compliance statement


This Class A digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003.

Avis de conformité à la réglementation d'Industrie Canada


Cet appareil numérique de la classe A est conforme à la norme NMB-003 du
Canada.

Australia and New Zealand Class A statement


Attention: This is a Class A product. In a domestic environment this product may
cause radio interference in which case the user may be required to take adequate
measures.

250 System x3200 M3 Types 7327 and 7328: Problem Determination and Service Guide
European Union EMC Directive conformance statement
This product is in conformity with the protection requirements of EU Council
Directive 2004/108/EC on the approximation of the laws of the Member States
relating to electromagnetic compatibility. IBM cannot accept responsibility for any
failure to satisfy the protection requirements resulting from a nonrecommended
modification of the product, including the fitting of non-IBM option cards.

This product has been tested and found to comply with the limits for Class A
Information Technology Equipment according to CISPR 22/European Standard EN
55022. The limits for Class A equipment were derived for commercial and industrial
environments to provide reasonable protection against interference with licensed
communication equipment.

Attention: This is a Class A product. In a domestic environment this product may


cause radio interference in which case the user may be required to take adequate
measures.

European Community contact:


IBM Technical Regulations
Pascalstr. 100, Stuttgart, Germany 70569
Telephone: 0049 (0)711 785 1176
Fax: 0049 (0)711 785 1283
E-mail: tjahn@de.ibm.com

Taiwanese Class A warning statement

Chinese Class A warning statement

Appendix B. Notices 251


Japanese Voluntary Control Council for Interference (VCCI) statement

Korean Class A warning statement

252 System x3200 M3 Types 7327 and 7328: Problem Determination and Service Guide
Index
A collecting data 1
components
ABR, automatic boot failure recovery 126
on the server 133
AC power LED 14
configuration
accessible documentation 249
minimum 130
acoustical noise emissions 6, 8
ServerGuide Setup and Installation CD 221, 223
adapter
Setup utility 221
hot-plug devices 175
using the Setup utility 225
installing 152
configuration programs
hot-plug 175
LSI Configuration Utility 222
removing 151
configuring
ServeRAID-MR10i 175
with ServerGuide 224
ServeRAID-MR10is
configuring the server 221
installing 177
configuring your server 221
specifications 6
connector
administrator password 229
Ethernet 14
administrator password, clear 228
external 11, 13
administrator password, set 228
power cord 13
Advanced Settings Utility 236
serial 14
ASM event log 24
Universal Serial Bus (USB) 11, 14
assertion event, system-event log 24
video 14
assistance, getting 245
contamination, particulate and gaseous 7, 249
attention notices 6
controls and indicators 9
automatic boot failure recovery (ABR) 126
cooling 7
cover, side
installing 146
B removing 145
Battery failure LED 70 CPU error LEDs 70
battery, replacing 184 creating
battery, system a RAID array 236
replacing 183 CRUs, replacing
before you install a legacy operating system 224 system battery 183
bezel customer replaceable units (CRUs) 133
lower
installing 148
removing 147
upper
D
danger statements 6
installing 150
data collection 1
removing 149
deassertion event, system-event log 24
blue-screen capture feature
device, hypervisor flash
overview 231
installing 180
boot failure, three consecutive 126
diagnosing a problem 1
Boot Manager program 222, 229
diagnostic
error codes 75
LEDs, error 69
C test log, viewing 74
cabling text message format 74
the ServeRAID-MR10is adapter 177 tools, overview 23
caution statements 6 DIMM LEDs 69
CD drive DIMMs
installing 156 removing 168
problems 57 DIMMs, installing 169
removing 155 DIMMs, registered 171
checkout procedure 55, 56 DIMMs, unbuffered 170
Class A electronic emission notice 250 Director, Systems
clear, administrator password 228 updating 236
clear, power-on password 228 diskette drive
code updates 2 installing 156

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2011 253


diskette drive (continued) error symptoms (continued)
removing 155 USB port 68
display problems 62 video 62
documentation format 249 errors
drive format, diagnostic code 74
removable-media 158, 159 Ethernet
drive bays, internal 154 activity LED 14
drives connector 14
bay 1, 2, or 3 controller, configuring 233
installing 156 high performance modes 233
hot-swap, removing 160, 161 link status LED 14
simple-swap, removing 164 modes 233
simple-swap, removing 163 utility, enabling 232
specifications 6 Ethernet controller configuration 222
DSA diagnostic Ethernet controller, troubleshooting 129
programs, overview 73 event logs 24
DSA log 24 clearing 26
dual inline memory module (DIMM) expansion slots 8
connectors 169 external connectors 13, 17
installing 169
retaining clips 174
DVD drive F
activity LED 12 fan
eject button 12 hard disk drive, assembly
installing 156 installing 191
problems 57 removing 189
removing 155 rear
installing 188
removing 187
E fan sink
eject button installing 211
DVD 12 removing 209
electrical input 6, 7 fan sink retention module
electronic emission Class A notice 250 removing 215
enabling FCC Class A notice 250
Intel Gigabit Ethernet Utility 232 features
enclosure manager heartbeat LED 70 ServerGuide 223
environment 6, 7 features and specifications 6
error codes and messages features, server 6
diagnostic 75 field replaceable units (FRUs) 133
IMM 35 firmware, server
messages, diagnostic 73 starting the backup 229
POST 26 firmware, server, recovering 124
SCSI (SAS) 128 firmware, updating 221
error symptoms formatting
CD-ROM drive 57 a hard disk drive 235
DVD-ROM drive 57 front USB connector assembly
general 58 installing 200
hard disk drive 58 removing 199
intermittent 59 front-panel assembly
keyboard 60 installing 199
memory 61 removing 198
microprocessor 62
monitor 62
mouse 60 G
optional devices 64 gaseous contamination 7, 249
pointing device 60 getting help 245
power 65 grease, thermal 213
serial port 66 guidelines
ServerGuide 67 installation 141
software 67 system reliability 142

254 System x3200 M3 Types 7327 and 7328: Problem Determination and Service Guide
H installing (continued)
fan
hard disk drive
hard disk drive, assembly 191
activity LED 11
rear 188
formatting 235
fan sink 211
problems 58
front USB connector assembly 200
hard disk drives
front-panel assembly 199
hot-swap SAS or SATA, installing 161
hot-swap drives 161
hot-swap SAS or SATA, removing 160
hot-swap power supply cage 204
simple-swap SATA, installing 164
hot-swap SAS or SATA drives 161
simple-swap SATA, removing 163
hypervisor flash device 180
hardware service and support 246
internal drives 154
hardware, configuring 221
memory modules 169
heat output 6, 7
microprocessor 211
help, getting 245
power supply
hot-plug adapter.
hot-swap 167
See adapter
non-hot-swap 208
hot-plug devices
SAS/SATA controller 205
adapters 175
SAS/SATA hard disk drive backplane 196
hot-swap drive
side cover 146
specifications 6
simple-swap backplate 193
hot-swap drives
simple-swap drives 164
SAS backplane LEDs 12
simple-swap SATA drives 164
SAS/SATA backplane LEDs 12
system board 217
hot-swap drives, SAS or SATA
tape drive 156, 159
installing 161
the ServeRAID-MR10is adapter 177
removing 160
the virtual media key 182
hot-swap power supply cage
integrated baseboard management controller 15
installing 204
integrated functions 7
removing 202
integrated management module
hypervisor flash device
error messages 35
installing 180
using 230
integrated management module event log 24
Integrated Management Module programs 222
I Intel Gigabit Ethernet Utility program
IBM Advanced Settings Utility program enabling 232
overview 236 intermittent problems 59
IBM Support Line 246 internal connectors 16
IBM Systems Director internal drives
updating 236 installing 154
IMM 222, 230 removing 154
error messages 35 IP address
IMM event log 24 obtaining for the IMM 232
IMM heartbeat LED 70
important notices 6
in-band method
of recovering the server firmware 125
J
jumper
indicators 9
UEFI boot recovery 125
installation order
jumpers on the system board 20
memory modules 173
installing
adapter 152
an adapter 175
K
battery 184 key, virtual media
bezel installing 182
lower 148 keyboard problems 60
upper 150
CD drive 156
diskette drive 156 L
drives, bay 1, 2, or 3 156 LED
DVD drive 156 AC power 14

Index 255
LED, NOS installation (continued)
Battery failure 70 without ServerGuide 225
enclosure manager heartbeat 70 notes 6
IMM heartbeat 70 notes, important 248
System-board error 70 notices 247
LEDs electronic emission 250
DVD drive activity 12 FCC, Class A 250
Ethernet link status 14 notices and statements 6
Ethernet transmit/receive activity 14
hard disk drive activity 11
hot-swap hard disk drive activity 12 O
hot-swap hard disk drive status 12 obtaining
on the system board 69 the IP address for IMM 232
power-on 11 online publications 6, 125
power-supply 71 online service request 4
system board 19 option
system-error 11 connectors 18
LEDs, optional device
CPU error 70 problems 64
DIMM 69 optional devices
PCI slot error 70 connectors 13
legacy operating system options
requirement 224 memory modules 169
logs order of installation
system event message 34 memory modules 173
LSI Configuration Utility program out-of-band method
starting 235 of recovering the server firmware 126
using 234

P
M particulate contamination 7, 249
memory parts listing 133
installing 169 password 228
specifications 6 administrator 228
memory module power-on 228
installing 169 password, administrator 229
order of installation 173 clear 228
specifications 7 set 228
memory modules password, power-on 229
removing 168 clear 228
memory problems 61 set 228
menu choices passwords, setting 228
for the Setup utility 225 PCI slot error LEDs 70
messages pointing-device problems 60
diagnostic 73 ports
messages, error Ethernet 14
POST 26 serial 14
microprocessor Universal Serial Bus (USB) 11, 14
installing 211 video 14
problems 62 POST 26
removing 209 error codes 26
specifications 6, 7 POST event log 24
minimum configuration 130 power control-button 11
modes, Ethernet 233 power cords 138
monitor problems 62 power problems 65, 128
mouse problems 60 power supply
hot-swap
installing 167
N removing 165
NOS installation non-hot-swap
with ServerGuide 224 installing 208

256 System x3200 M3 Types 7327 and 7328: Problem Determination and Service Guide
power supply (continued) removing (continued)
non-hot-swap (continued) DVD drive 155
removing 206 fan
specifications 7 hard disk drive, assembly 189
power supply LEDs 71 rear 187
power switch 11 fan sink 209
power-cord connector 13 front USB connector assembly 199
power-on LED 11, 14 front-panel assembly 198
power-on password, clear 228 hot-swap drives 160
power-on password, set 228 hot-swap power supply cage 202
power-on self-test (POST) 26 hot-swap SAS or SATA drives 160
power-on, password 229 hypervisor flash device 180
problem isolation tables 57 internal drives 154
problem, diagnosing 1 memory modules 168
problems microprocessor 209
CD-ROM, DVD-ROM drive 57 power supply
Ethernet controller 129 hot-swap 165
hard disk drive 58 non-hot-swap 206
IMM 35 SAS/SATA controller 204
intermittent 59 SAS/SATA hard disk drive backplane 195
keyboard 60 ServeRAID-MR10i SAS/SATA controller 175
memory 61 ServeRAID-MR10is SAS/SATA controller 177
microprocessor 62 side cover 145
monitor 62 simple-swap backplate 192
mouse 60 simple-swap drives 163
optional devices 64 simple-swap SATA drives 163
pointing device 60 system board 215
POST 26 tape drive 158
power 65, 128 the fan sink retention module 215
serial port 66 replacement parts 133
ServerGuide 67 replacing
software 67 battery 184
undetermined 130 battery, system 183
USB port 68 retaining clips, dual inline memory module (DIMM) 174
video 62 running
public services network, use in 250 the diagnostic programs 74
public telecommunications network, connection to 250
publications 5
S
safety information
R Statement 12 xv
RAID array Statement 13 xv
creating 236 Statement 15 xvi
recovering the server firmware 124 SAS backplane
recovering, UEFI update failure 124 LEDs
recoverying the server firmware hot-swap drive status 12
in-band method 125 SAS or SATA hot-swap drives
out-of-band method 126 installing 161
remote presence feature removing 160
using 231 SAS/SATA backplane
Remote presence support 222 LEDs
removing hot-swap drive activity 12
adapter 151 SAS/SATA controller
battery, system 183 installing 205
bezel removing 204
lower 147 SAS/SATA hard disk drive backplane
upper 149 installing 196
CD drive 155 removing 195
connector 181 SATA backplane
DIMMs 168 activity LEDs for hot-swap drives 12
diskette drive 155

Index 257
SATA simple-swap drives system board
installing 164 error LEDs 69
removing 163 external connectors 17
SCSI (SAS) error messages 128 installing 217
serial connector 14 internal connectors 16
serial port problems 66 jumpers 20
server LEDs 19
power features 14 option connectors 18
specifications 6 removing 215
turning it off 15 system board jumpers 20
server components 133 system event log 34
server configuration 221 system reliability 142
server firmware, recovering 124 system specifications 6
server replaceable units 133 System-board error LED 70
server shutdown 15 system-error LED 11
server, backup firmware system-event log 24
starting 229 Systems Director, updating 236
ServeRAID-MR10i
adapter 175
ServeRAID-MR10i SAS/SATA controller T
removing 175 tape drive
ServeRAID-MR10is adapter installing 156, 159
installing 177 remove 158
ServeRAID-MR10is SAS/SATA controller telephone numbers 246
removing 177 temperature 6
ServerGuide test log, viewing 74
features 223 thermal grease 213
NOS installation 224 three boot failure 126
problems 67 TOE 7
setup 224 tools, diagnostic 23
Setup and Installation CD 221, 223 trademarks 247
service bulletins 3 troubleshooting procedures 4
service request, online 4 start here 1
set, administrator password 228 turning off the server 15
set, power-on password 228 integrated baseboard management controller 15
setting, passwords 228
Setup utility 221, 222
menu choices 225 U
starting 225 UEFI
using 225 boot recovery jumper 125
shutting down the server 15 UEFI update failure
simple-swap backplate recovery 124
installing 193 undetermined problems 130
removing 192 undocumented problems 4
simple-swap drives United States electronic emission Class A notice 250
installing 164 United States FCC Class A notice 250
removing 163 Universal Serial Bus (USB)
size 7 connectors
software problems 67 front 11
software service and support 246 rear 14
specifications, server 6 Universal Serial Bus (USB) problems 68
start here UpdateXpress 2
troubleshooting procedures 1 updating
starting IBM Systems Director 236
the LSI Configuration Utility program 235 Systems Director, IBM 236
the server firmware 229 updating firmware 221
the Setup utility 225 USB, front connector assembly
statements and notices 6 installing 200
static-sensitive devices, handling 144 removing 199
status LEDs 9 using
support, web site 245 IMM 230

258 System x3200 M3 Types 7327 and 7328: Problem Determination and Service Guide
using (continued)
the integrated management module 230
the LSI Configuration Utility program 234
the remote presence feature 231
utility
Setup 225
Utility program
IBM Advanced Settings 236
utility, Setup 222

V
video
connector 14
specifications 6
video problems 62
viewing event logs 24
virtual media key
installing 182

W
Wake on LAN feature 14
web site
publication ordering 245
support 245
support line, telephone numbers 246
Web site
compatible options 169
ServerProven list 169
UEFI flash diskette 124
weight 6, 7

Index 259
260 System x3200 M3 Types 7327 and 7328: Problem Determination and Service Guide


Part Number: 90Y5683

Printed in USA

(1P) P/N: 90Y5683

You might also like